Information processing device, information processing system, and launch program and storage medium storing the same

ABSTRACT

A game device according to the present embodiment includes a camera as image pick-up means. An inner camera is accommodated in an upper housing. In addition, a microphone hole is provided in an inner surface of the upper housing so as to sense external sound through a microphone.

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.12/531,586, filed Sep. 16, 2009, which is the U.S. national phase ofInternational Application No. PCT/JP2008/067864 filed Oct. 1, 2008,which designated the U.S., the entire contents of which are herebyincorporated by reference.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to an information processing device, aninformation processing system, and a launch program and a storage mediumstoring the same. More particularly, the present invention relates to aconfiguration capable of providing a photographing function and/or avoice and sound obtaining function.

BACKGROUND AND SUMMARY

For example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (PatentDocument 1) discloses a portable telephone as a prior portableinformation processing device having a photographing function. Thisportable telephone adopts foldable arrangement, in which a displayscreen is provided on an inner surface of each of two housings. In thisportable phone, two cameras serving as image pick-up means are providedin an outer surface and an inner surface of an upper housing,respectively.

In addition, a portable instrument described in Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2) has a camera and amicrophone, in which a screen is provided on each of two surfaces of ahousing (casing).

Moreover, for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2007-195830(Patent Document 3) also discloses an information processing deviceincluding two housings that are foldably connected to each other as aportable information processing device adopting foldable arrangement.This information processing device has a display screen on an innersurface of each housing (which is a surface located inside when theinformation processing device is folded) (two display screens in total).

Further, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4)discloses information equipment containing a camera. This informationequipment includes a body unit and a display unit pivotably connected toeach other by a hinge block. In this information equipment, the camerais arranged in the hinge block.

In addition, prior arts as listed below have been known.

-   Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224-   Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-274304-   Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2007-195830-   Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564-   Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791-   Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478-   Patent Document 7: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 01-297986-   Patent Document 8: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2002-125176-   Patent Document 9: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-320091-   Patent Document 10: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-333149-   Patent Document 11: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-184060-   Patent Document 12: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2007-201727-   Patent Document 13: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 09-247634-   Patent Document 14: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 10-341388-   Patent Document 15: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2000-56756-   Non-Patent Document 1: “Chotto Shot Camera Instruction Manual,” Sony    Computer Entertainment Inc., Nov. 2, 2006

In the portable instruments disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2004-274304 (Patent Document 2), however, the camera serving as theimage pick-up means and the microphone serving as the audio input meanshave not been arranged at positions suitable for the photographingfunction and the voice and sound obtaining function, respectively.

In addition, the information processing device disclosed in JapanesePatent Laying-Open No. 2007-195830 (Patent Document 3) has not at alltaken into account the photographing function, and the informationequipment disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564(Patent Document 4) has not at all taken into account the voice andsound obtaining function.

Another problem is as follows. In a configuration to cause a computer toexecute various programs, various storage media storing programs havebeen proposed. Here, none of the prior arts discloses or suggests aconcept to execute in coordination a program stored in a storage mediumembedded in a computer main body (information processing device) and aprogram stored in a storage medium attached to the computer.

Yet another problem is as follows. In a configuration to provide a userwith a menu screen for selecting a program to be launched from among aplurality of application programs (what is called a launcher function),none of the prior arts discloses or suggests a concept to simultaneouslyprovide a function other than the launcher function.

The present invention was made to solve at least one of these problems.A first object of the present invention is to provide an informationprocessing device having a structure suitable for a photographingfunction and/or a voice and sound obtaining function. In addition, asecond object of the present invention is to provide an informationprocessing system capable of executing in coordination a program storedin a storage medium embedded in a main body and a program stored in anexternally attached storage medium. Moreover, a third object of thepresent invention is to provide a launch program suitable for aninformation processing device having a photographing function, and astorage medium storing the program.

The present invention adopts the following features in order to solvethe problems above. It is noted that reference characters, step numbers,supplementary explanations, and the like in parentheses in this sectionare merely provided to facilitate understanding of the present inventionin relation to embodiments which will be described later, rather thanlimiting the scope of the present invention in any manner.

According to one aspect of the present invention, an informationprocessing device (10) constituted of a plurality of housings (11, 21)so that the device can be opened and closed is provided. The informationprocessing device (10) includes: image pick-up means (23) and audioinput means (21C, 42) provided in a coupling portion of the plurality ofhousings; storage means (34); image pick-up data obtaining means (31,SA50) for obtaining image pick-up data with the image pick-up means;image pick-up data storage control means (31, SA54) for causing thestorage means to store the image pick-up data obtained by the dataobtaining means; audio data obtaining means (31, SD171) for obtainingaudio data through the audio input means; and audio data storage controlmeans (33, SD173) for causing the storage means to store the audio dataobtained by the audio data obtaining means.

Here, the image pick-up data includes a still image and a moving image.Moreover, arrangement allowing opening and closing includes not only afoldable type which will be described later but also a sliding type, arotatable type, and a combination thereof. The information processingdevice in the subject application can be in various states between astate in which a prescribed surface of at least one housing is hidden byanother housing and a state in which the prescribed surface thereof isexposed, as a result of folding, sliding, and rotation. In particular,in an example where a display portion is provided in the prescribedsurface, the information processing device may be in various statesbetween a display portion hidden state and a display portion exposedstate, as a result of folding, sliding, and rotation.

According to this aspect, the image pick-up means (23) and the audioinput means (21C, 42) are provided in the coupling portion of theplurality of housings (11, 21), so that they can maintain substantiallythe same positional relation without being affected by an angle betweenthe housings. Thus, regardless of usage of the information processingdevice, relative positional relation of the image pick-up means (23) andthe audio input means (21C, 42) with respect to the user is maintainedsubstantially constant, and hence a photographing operation and/or avoice and sound obtaining operation can always be appropriate.

In addition, according to this aspect, as the image pick-up means (23)and the audio input means (21C, 42) are provided in the couplingportion, the user can also perform the photographing operation and/orthe voice and sound obtaining operation by holding only any one of theplurality of housings (11, 21) with one hand, or perform thephotographing operation and/or the voice and sound obtaining operationin a more stable manner by holding both housings (11, 21) with bothhands. Thus, use adapted to a situation for photographing and/orobtaining voice and sound can be achieved.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesimage pick-up data reproduction means (31, SA41) for reproducing theimage pick-up data stored in the storage means. Thus, the image pick-updata obtained as a result of photographing can immediately be checked.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesimage pick-up data edition means (31, SA58) for editing the imagepick-up data stored in the storage means. Thus, the user can subject theimage pick-up data obtained as a result of photographing to a desirededition operation for fun.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesaudio data reproduction means (31, SD76#) for reproducing the audio datastored in the storage means. Thus, the user can immediately check theobtained audio data. Preferably, the information processing device (10)further includes audio data edition means (31, SD262) for editing theaudio data stored in the storage means. Thus, the user can subject theobtained audio data to a desired edition operation for fun.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includes:near field communication means (38); image pick-up data transmissioncontrol means (31, SC52) for transmitting the image pick-up data storedin the storage means to another information processing device throughthe near field communication means; and image pick-up data receptioncontrol means (31, SC53) for receiving the image pick-up data fromanother information processing device through the near fieldcommunication means and causing the storage means to store the imagepick-up data.

According to this preferred aspect, the image pick-up data obtained as aresult of photographing can be exchanged among users having informationprocessing devices of the same type. Thus, the same image pick-up datacan be shared in a group for fun, or the image pick-up data obtained asa result of photographing can be distributed to another user for fun.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesopening and closing detection means (50) for detecting opening andclosing, and each time the opening and closing detection means detectsopening and closing, the image pick-up data reproduction means has apicked-up image displayed based on different image pick-up data in theimage pick-up data stored in the storage means (SA73). It is noted thatthe picked-up image is displayed on the display portion that can be invarious states between the hidden state and the exposed state as aresult of folding, sliding, and rotation.

According to this preferred aspect, each time the information processingdevice is opened and closed, displayed image pick-up data is varied, sothat the user can look forward to an image displayed at the time whenhe/she opens the information processing device.

Preferably, the storage means further stores an image pick-up dataobtaining program (53) causing a computer representing the informationprocessing device to function as the image pick-up data obtaining meansand the image pick-up data storage control means, and an audio dataobtaining program (57) causing the computer representing the informationprocessing device to function as the audio data obtaining means and theaudio data storage control means. The information processing device (10)further includes launch control means (31, SA5 to SA13) for selectingany of at least the image pick-up data obtaining program and the audiodata obtaining program and launching the selected program when theinformation processing device is started up, and the launch controlmeans has a function (31, SA10) to obtain the image pick-up data withthe image pick-up means and cause the storage means to store theimage-pick-up data.

According to this preferred aspect, in an environment where execution ofat least the image pick-up data obtaining program (53) and the audiodata obtaining program (57) is permitted, the user can readily selectand execute a desired program by using launch control means (31, SA5 toSA13).

In addition, according to this preferred aspect, while the photographingfunction by photographing processing means is performed, the imagepick-up data obtaining program (53) can directly be launched. Namely, asthe photographing function provided by the image pick-up data obtainingprogram (53) can readily be launched from the photographing functionprovided by the photographing processing means, a user who hasexperienced the photographing function provided by the photographingprocessing means can be led to perform the photographing functionprovided by the image pick-up data obtaining program (53).

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesfirst operation means (14I, 14J) provided on an upper surface of onehousing out of the plurality of housings, on a side where anotherhousing out of the plurality of housings is located when the informationprocessing device is opened, and the image pick-up data recording meansobtains the image pick-up data with the image pick-up means and causesthe storage means to store the image pick-up data when the firstoperation means is operated.

According to this preferred aspect, the user can perform an operation toobtain image pick-up data by operating the first operation means (14I,14J) with his/her hand holding the information processing device.Namely, as the user can perform the operation to obtain image pick-updata while he/she holds the information processing device, the user canreadily perform the photographing operation. Therefore, arrangement moresuitable for a portable information processing device can be provided.

Preferably, the image pick-up means and the audio input means areprovided around a center of the coupling portion. Thus, relativepositional relation between the information processing device and theuser can substantially be the same in an example where the user holdsthe information processing device only with his/her right hand and in anexample where the user holds the information processing device only withhis/her left hand.

Further preferably, the image pick-up means is provided in the center ofthe coupling portion and the audio input means is provided at a positionoffset from the center of the coupling portion. A range of image pick-upby the image pick-up means is determined depending on a locationthereof, whereas a range of sound collection by the audio input means isrelatively great. Therefore, by preferentially providing the imagepick-up means in the center of the coupling portion, photographing in amore appropriate condition can be carried out.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesdisplay means (12, 22) provided in each housing. Thus, an image or thelike picked up by the image pick-up means can also be displayed.

Preferably, the housing is a horizontally long housing. By adopting thehorizontally long housing, arrangement is suitable for user's eyemovement.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesfirst and second operation means (14A to 14E) arranged on left and rightof the display means respectively in one housing out of the plurality ofhousings, and first and second audio output means (21D, 45, 47) arrangedon left and right of the display means respectively in another housingout of the plurality of housings.

According to this preferred aspect, voice and sound or the like obtainedby the voice and sound obtaining means can be output.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) further includesconnection means (36, 37) for removably attaching a memory card (28,29). Thus, the memory card in which various types of programs, imagepick-up data, or audio data have been stored can freely be attached, sothat the information processing device can display or reproduce the dataor arbitrarily store the obtained image pick-up data or audio data.Consequently, a degree of freedom and applications of the informationprocessing device can remarkably be enhanced.

Further preferably, the image pick-up data storage control means canhave the image pick-up data selectively stored in the storage means andthe memory card.

Alternatively, further preferably, the audio data storage control meanscan have the audio data selectively stored in the storage means and thememory card.

According to these features, as the image pick-up data and/or the audiodata can be stored in any storage medium depending on the number ofpieces, a type, a size, and the like thereof, a degree of freedom forthe user can be enhanced. In addition, the memory card stores the imagepick-up data and/or the audio data, so that the image pick-up dataand/or the audio data can also be output to a device different from theinformation processing device.

Preferably, the information processing device further includes embeddedstorage means storing a program for causing a computer representing theinformation processing device to function as the image pick-up dataobtaining means and the image pick-up data storage control means, sothat the computer representing the information processing device canexecute the program. Thus, the information processing device alone canprovide the user with the photographing function without externalattachment of a memory or the like.

Further preferably, the information processing device reads anapplication program stored in the memory card, so that a computerrepresenting the information processing device can execute theapplication program. Thus, the information processing device canselectively execute a wide variety of application programs regardless ofa limited capacity of the embedded storage means.

An information processing system according to another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing the computer representing the information processing device tofunction as the image pick-up data obtaining means and the image pick-updata storage control means, in which data can be written, and the imagepick-up data storage control means can have the image pick-up dataselectively stored in any of the storage means and the memory card.

According to the information processing system according to this aspect,as the user can have the image pick-up data selectively stored in theembedded storage means and an externally attached memory card, a storagemedium in accordance with a situation can be used.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing the computer representing the information processing device tofunction as image pick-up data utilization processing means forutilizing the image pick-up data stored in the storage means.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing the computer representing the information processing device tofunction as image pick-up data utilization processing means forutilizing the image pick-up data stored in the storage means and thememory card.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing the computer representing the information processing device tofunction as the audio data obtaining means and the audio data storagecontrol means, in which data can be written, and the audio data storagecontrol means can have the audio data selectively stored in any of thestorage means and the memory card.

According to the information processing system according to this aspect,as the user can have the audio data selectively stored in the embeddedstorage means and an externally attached memory card, a storage mediumin accordance with a situation can be used.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing the computer representing the information processing device tofunction as audio data utilization processing means for utilizing theaudio data stored in the storage means.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card storing as the application program, a program forcausing a computer representing the information processing device tofunction as audio data utilization processing means for utilizing theaudio data stored in the storage means and the memory card.

The information processing device (10) above preferably includes aplurality of connection means for removably attaching a memory card.Thus, a plurality of memory cards of various types can simultaneously beattached, so that the user can select a desired program from among moreapplication programs and execute the selected program.

Further preferably, the connection means includes first connection meansfor removably attaching a memory card (28) complying with universalspecifications and second connection means for removably attaching amemory card (29) complying with dedicated specifications.

According to this preferred aspect, the user can readily exchange imagepick-up data and/or audio data with another user through a memory cardcomplying with the universal specifications, or readily transfer thedata to another device. On the other hand, an unauthorized operation canbe prevented by storing various types of application programs in amemory card complying with the dedicated specifications. In addition,the memory card complying with the dedicated specifications stores imagepick-up data and/or audio data, so that information specific to theinformation device according to the present invention can together bestored and various types of effects or information can also bedisplayed.

Further preferably, the image pick-up data storage control means canhave the image pick-up data selectively stored in the storage means, thememory card complying with the universal specifications, and the memorycard complying with the dedicated specifications.

In addition, further preferably, the audio data storage control meanscan have the audio data selectively stored in the storage means, thememory card complying with the universal specifications, and the memorycard complying with the dedicated specifications.

According to these preferred aspects, the user can have the obtainedimage pick-up data and/or audio data stored in a more appropriate memorycard, depending on contents thereof or the like. In addition, efficiencyin organization or the like of the image pick-up data and/or the audiodata can also be improved.

In addition, further preferably, reading and execution of an applicationprogram stored in the memory card complying with the dedicatedspecifications by the computer representing the information processingdevice is permitted, while reading and execution of an applicationprogram stored in the memory card complying with the universalspecifications by the computer representing the information processingdevice is prohibited. Thus, a problem caused by execution of anunauthorized application program or the like stored in a memory cardcomplying with the universal specifications can be avoided.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card complying with the dedicated specifications, for storingas the application program, a program for causing the computerrepresenting the information processing device to function as secondimage pick-up data obtaining means and second image pick-up data storagecontrol means, and the second image pick-up data storage control meanscan have the image pick-up data selectively stored in at least one ofthe storage means, the memory card complying with the universalspecifications, and the memory card complying with the dedicatedspecifications.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card complying with the dedicated specifications, for storingas the application program, a program for causing the computerrepresenting the information processing device to function as secondaudio data obtaining means and second audio data storage control means,and the second audio data storage control means can have the audio dataselectively stored in at least one of the storage means, the memory cardcomplying with the universal specifications, and the memory cardcomplying with the dedicated specifications.

According to these aspects, as the user can have image pick-up dataand/or audio data selectively stored in the embedded storage means andthe externally attached memory card complying with the universalspecifications and memory card complying with the dedicatedspecifications, a storage medium can be used in accordance with asituation.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: the information processing device above; andthe memory card complying with the dedicated specifications, for storingas the application program, a program for causing the computerrepresenting the information processing device to function as imagepick-up data utilization processing means for utilizing the imagepick-up data stored in the storage means, the memory card complying withthe universal specifications, and the memory card complying with thededicated specifications.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: a memory card (28, 29); and an informationprocessing device (10) capable of reading an application program storedin the memory card and performing processing. The information processingdevice (10) includes image pick-up means (23), embedded storage means(34), connection means (36, 37) for removably attaching the memory card,and embedded program storage means (901 to 908). The embedded programstorage means stores a program for causing a computer representing theinformation processing device to function as first image pick-up dataobtaining means for obtaining image pick-up data with the image pick-upmeans, and first image pick-up data storage control means for causingthe embedded storage means to store the image pick-up data obtained bythe image pick-up data obtaining means. The memory card stores as theapplication program, a program for causing the computer representing theinformation processing device to function as second image pick-up dataobtaining means for obtaining image pick-up data with the image pick-upmeans, and second image pick-up data storage control means for causingthe embedded storage means to store the image pick-up data obtained bythe image pick-up data obtaining means.

An information processing system according to yet another aspect of thepresent invention includes: a memory card (28, 29); and an informationprocessing device capable of reading an application program stored inthe memory card and performing processing. The information processingdevice (10) includes image pick-up means (23), embedded storage means(34), connection means (36, 37) for removably attaching the memory card,and embedded program storage means (901 to 908). The embedded programstorage means stores a program for causing a computer representing theinformation processing device to function as first image pick-up dataobtaining means for obtaining image pick-up data with the image pick-upmeans, and first image pick-up data storage control means for causingthe embedded storage means to store the image pick-up data obtained bythe image pick-up data obtaining means. The memory card stores as theapplication program, a program for causing the computer representing theinformation processing device to function as image pick-up datautilization processing means for utilizing the image pick-up data storedin the embedded storage means.

According to yet another aspect of the present invention, a launchprogram (51) executed by a computer representing an informationprocessing device (10) having image pick-up means (23) and capable ofstoring a plurality of application programs, for selectively launchingan application program desired by a user from among the plurality ofapplication programs is provided. The launch program (51) causes thecomputer to function as: first launch operation acceptance means (SA6,SA11) for accepting a first launch operation for selectively launchingthe plurality of application programs; first launch means (SA12) forreading, when the first launch operation is performed, an applicationprogram selected in the first launch operation from among the pluralityof application programs into prescribed storage means for storing aprogram to be executed by the computer and launching that applicationprogram; and photographing processing means (SA10) for performingphotographing processing for storing an image picked up by the imagepick-up means in storage means in accordance with a prescribedphotographing operation.

According to this aspect, the user can select an application program tobe executed from among the plurality of application programs byperforming the first launch operation and also can obtain a picked-upimage from photographing means by performing a prescribed photographingoperation. Therefore, the user can readily and quickly use thephotographing function even in a state prior to launch of an applicationprogram. In addition, the photographing processing means can be launchedwhile the photographing function provided by the launch program is beingperformed.

Preferably, the photographing processing means has a photographingfunction to store the image picked up by the image pick-up means in thestorage means but does not have a function to edit the image taken byusing the photographing function.

Preferably, the photographing processing means has a photographingfunction to store the image picked up by the image pick-up means in thestorage means but does not have a function to arbitrarily view an imagefrom among images taken by using the photographing function.

According to these aspects, as the function to edit and/or view an imageis not provided by the photographing processing means provided by thelaunch program, the user will desire use of a photographing applicationprogram having these functions. Consequently, the user can be led to usethe photographing application program from the photographing processingmeans.

Preferably, the information processing device (10) stores as theapplication program, a photographing application program (53) having aphotographing function to store an image picked up by the image pick-upmeans in the storage means. Thus, the user will desire use of a moreadvanced photographing application program, and the user can be led touse the photographing application program.

Further preferably, the photographing application program further has afunction to edit a taken image.

Preferably, the photographing application program further has a functionto arbitrarily view an image from among taken images.

Preferably, the photographing application program causes the storagemeans to store a taken image.

Preferably, the launch program allows exchange of a taken image storedin the storage means with another information processing device.

Preferably, the photographing application program causes the storagemeans to store a taken image in accordance with the photographingoperation.

Preferably, a taken image stored in the storage means is displayedtogether with an image for selectively launching the plurality ofapplication programs (SA5).

Preferably, after a launched application program ends, a taken imagedifferent from a previously displayed image among taken images stored inthe storage means is displayed (SA28) together with the image forselectively launching the plurality of application programs as a resultof execution of the launch program.

According to these aspects, as the photographing application program canprovide the user with a more sophisticated function than thephotographing processing means provided by the launch program, appeal ofthe photographing application program can be enhanced.

According to yet another aspect of the present invention, a storagemedium storing the launch program described in any paragraph above isprovided.

According to the present invention, an information processing devicehaving a structure suitable for a photographing function and/or a voiceand sound obtaining function can be provided. In addition, aninformation processing system capable of executing in coordination aprogram stored in a storage medium embedded in a main body and a programstored in an externally attached storage medium can be provided.Moreover, a launch program suitable for an information processing devicehaving a photographing function and a storage medium storing the programcan be provided.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a plan view showing appearance of an image pick-up deviceaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a back side of a game deviceaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an illumination operation of an LED ofthe game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for illustrating an operation of a volume button ofthe game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 5 is a side view in a state where the game device according to thepresent embodiment is opened (in an unfolded state).

FIG. 6 is a side view in a state where the game device according to thepresent embodiment is closed (in a folded state).

FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a lower housing shown in FIG. 1which is taken along the line A-A′.

FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of an upper housing shown in FIG. 1which is taken along the line B-B′.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a state where a user holds the game deviceaccording to the present embodiment with both hands.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds the gamedevice according to the present embodiment with one hand.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds the gamedevice according to the present embodiment lengthwise.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds the gamedevice according to the present embodiment lengthwise.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which the game device accordingto the present embodiment is held for use.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state in which the game device accordingto the present embodiment is placed for use.

FIG. 15 is a plan view showing appearance of an image pick-up deviceaccording to a variation of the present embodiment.

FIG. 16 is a side view in a state where the game device according to thevariation of the present embodiment is opened (in an unfolded state).

FIG. 17 is a side view in a state where the game device according to thevariation of the present embodiment is closed (in a folded state).

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gamedevice according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for illustrating a method of launching eachapplication program in the game device according to the presentembodiment.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing main data stored in a main memory of thegame device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a main flowchart showing a flow of launcher processing in thegame device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a flow of simplified photographingprocessing shown in FIG. 21.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a menu screen in the launcherprocessing in the game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in aphotographing enabled state in the launcher processing in the gamedevice according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed after aphotographing operation in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22 is performed.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed aftersimplified photographing processing in the flowchart shown in FIG. 21 isperformed.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing leadingprocessing shown in FIG. 21.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of processing at the time ofopening and closing of the game device according to the presentembodiment.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a change method in processing for changinga display image in the flowchart shown in FIG. 28.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a flow of multifunctional photographingprocessing according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed inmultifunctional photographing processing according to the presentembodiment.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of photograph display modeprocessing shown in FIG. 30.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in aphotograph display mode according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing mode processingshown in FIG. 32.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in aphotographing mode according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing processing(No. 1) in the game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed inphotographing processing in the image pick-up device according to thepresent embodiment shown in FIG. 36.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a flow of input image generationprocessing shown in FIG. 36.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in a penmode shown in FIG. 38.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed inprocessing for displaying a stored image shown in FIG. 36.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing processing (No.2) in the game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in displayprocessing shown in FIG. 41.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a flow of edition processing shown inFIG. 41.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the penmode in the edition processing shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in a sealmode in the edition processing shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed in calendar processingaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary system in which aplurality of game devices according to the present embodiment areconnected to each other.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display (No. 1) displayedbefore whether the game device according to the present embodimentserves as a transmission-end device or a reception-end device isdetermined.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display (No. 1) displayedbefore whether the game device according to the present embodimentserves as a transmission-end device or a reception-end device isdetermined.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed in afirst stage, on a transmission-end game device according to the presentembodiment and a reception-end game device according to the presentembodiment.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed in asecond stage, on the transmission-end game device according to thepresent embodiment and the reception-end game device according to thepresent embodiment.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed in athird stage, on the transmission-end game device according to thepresent embodiment and the reception-end game device according to thepresent embodiment.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed in afourth stage, on the transmission-end game device according to thepresent embodiment and the reception-end game device according to thepresent embodiment.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed in afifth stage, on the transmission-end game device according to thepresent embodiment and the reception-end game device according to thepresent embodiment.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display displayed whencommunication is disconnected, on the transmission-end game deviceaccording to the present embodiment and the reception-end game deviceaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of various data stored in a mainmemory in accordance with execution of an image communication programaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example in which the game deviceaccording to the present embodiment performs image communicationprocessing.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing sub routine showing detailed operation inimage transmission processing shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing sub routine showing detailed operation inimage reception processing shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an exemplary signal transmitted andreceived between the game device serving as a transmitter according tothe present embodiment and the game device serving as a receiveraccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an exemplary sound selection screen 400 ina sound function in the game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a music reproduction folder listselection screen according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating another music reproduction folder listselection screen according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a music file selection screenaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a reproduction operation selectionscreen according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating processing relating to functionselection in the game device according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor transition to a selection function mode in FIG. 66.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in a musicreproduction mode.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor search of a folder in an SD card.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing forgenerating a folder list.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor determining a folder name.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a specific example illustrating foldersearch processing.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor selecting a music file.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor reproducing a music file.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged view of a volume setting icon.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of volumesetting processing according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating another example of the volume settingicon.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a function to change a reproductionspeed or a key by selecting a speed and key adjustment icon.

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a function for change to another toneby modulating a frequency of a reproduction signal, performing filteringprocessing or the like, based on selection of a tone adjustment icon.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a case where sound effect output froma speaker or the like is changed in response to a user's operation of anR button and an L button for selecting a sound effect selection icon.

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating visualizer display processingaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of thevisualizer display processing.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating another visualizer display screen.

FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating yet another visualizer display screen.

FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flow when a headphone is sensedaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating sleep processing in a case where agame device 10 is folded to a folded position.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in a sleepmusic reproduction mode.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an automatic recording modeaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of recordingprocessing according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor storing recording data.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart of an automatic reproduction mode according tothe present embodiment.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of settingprocessing according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen according to thepresent embodiment.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in amicrophone recording and reproduction mode.

FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file list selectionscreen according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a recording data reproductionoperation selection screen.

FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of processingfor reproducing a recording data file.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing (No. 1) ofprocessing for creating a recording data file.

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a recording start screen according tothe present embodiment.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing (No. 2) ofprocessing for creating a recording data file.

FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file colordesignation screen according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a favorite folder selection screenaccording to the present embodiment.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for illustrating a storage medium that can be usedin the game device according to the present embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF THE REFERENCE SIGNS

10 game device; 11 lower housing; 12 lower LCD; 13 touch panel; 21 upperhousing; 22 upper LCD; 23 inner camera; and 25 outer camera.

Detailed Description

An embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail withreference to the drawings. It is noted that the same or correspondingelements in the drawings have the same reference characters allotted anddescription thereof will not be repeated.

1. Overview

A portable game device 10 according to one embodiment of the presentinvention will be described hereinafter.

Game device 10 according to the present embodiment has image pick-upmeans (camera), and functions also as an image pick-up device.Representatively, game device 10 can pick up an image of a subject withthe image pick-up means, display the image obtained as a result of imagepick-up on a screen, store data of the picked-up image, and transmit toand receive from another device data of the picked-up image.

In addition, game device 10 according to the present embodiment istypically provided as a computer including operation means such as a CPUand a memory, and it can execute various application programs relatingto image processing or information processing. By executing such aprogram, game device 10 also functions as an image processing device oran information processing device. Naturally, game device 10 according tothe present embodiment can also execute various game programs.

Namely, though any computer system may execute the program according tothe present invention, a configuration in which game device 10 executesthe program according to the present invention will be illustrated inthe present embodiment. It is noted that functions provided by theprogram according to the present invention may be implemented by ahardware circuit in a part or in its entirety.

2. Definition of Terms

Obtaining image data from the image pick-up means (camera) is hereinreferred to as “image pick-up,” and storage of picked-up image data isreferred to as “photographing”.

3. Appearance

<Overall Appearance>

FIG. 1 is a plan view showing appearance of game device 10 according tothe present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a backsurface side of game device 10 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2, game device 10 according to the presentembodiment is representatively a foldable portable game device. FIG. 1shows a state where game device 10 is opened (opened state). Normally, auser uses game device 10 in the opened state and the user stores gamedevice 10 in a closed state when he/she does not use game device 10.Therefore, game device 10 is preferably configured to have such a sizeas being held by the user with both hands or one hand, even when gamedevice 10 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, game device 10 includes two housings of alower housing 11 and an upper housing 21. Lower housing 11 and upperhousing 21 are connected to each other so that the game device can beopened or closed (foldable). In other words, shaft portions 11A shown inFIG. 1 are provided at opposing ends of an upper side (a side on apositive side of an x-axis shown in the drawing) of lower housing 11 ina left-right direction (in a y direction shown in the drawing) (shaftportions 11A are structurally integral with lower housing 11). Further,a shaft portion 21A shown in FIG. 1 is provided in a central portion ofa lower side (a side on a negative side of the x-axis shown in thedrawing) of upper housing 21 in the left-right direction (in the ydirection shown in the drawing) (shaft portion 21A is structurallyintegral with upper housing 21). Shaft portions 11A and shaft portion21A are connected to each other by a hinge provided therein in a mannerpivotable about an axis in the left-right direction. Thus, lower housing11 and upper housing 21 are connected to each other in a mannerpivotable about the axis in the left-right direction.

In the present embodiment, housings 11 and 21 each have a horizontallylong shape (namely, a dimension of each housing in a lateral directionis greater than that in a vertical direction) and typically have arectangular shape. Further, housings 11 and 21 each have a plate-likeshape (namely, a length in a thickness direction is shorter than thosein vertical and lateral directions). Further, upper housing 21 and lowerhousing 11 each have a thin plate-like shape. Preferably, upper housing21 is smaller in thickness than lower housing 11. Lower housing 11 andupper housing 21 are pivotably connected to each other at long sidesthereof.

In an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may be formed of onehousing, instead of a foldable type.

9 2 As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 includes two display devices ofan upper LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 22 and a lower LCD 12. Upper LCD22 is disposed in an inner surface of upper housing 21 (which is asurface located on the inside of game device 10 in a closed state) andlower LCD 12 is disposed in an inner surface of lower housing 11.

Though an LCD is used as a display device in the present embodiment, anyother display devices such as a display device using EL (ElectroLuminescence) may be used. In addition, game device 10 can include adisplay device of any resolution. Though a case where game device 10includes two display devices is described by way of example in thepresent embodiment, in an alternative embodiment, the number of displaydevices in the game device is not particularly limited.

<Lower Housing>

A configuration provided in lower housing 11 of game device 10 will nowbe described.

As described above, game device 10 includes lower LCD 12. Lower LCD 12has a horizontally long shape, and is arranged such that a long sidedirection thereof corresponds to a long side direction of lower housing11. In addition, lower LCD 12 is accommodated in lower housing 11.Further, lower LCD 12 is provided in the inner surface of lower housing11. Thus, by closing game device 10 when it is not used, a screen oflower LCD 12 can be prevented from getting dirty and being damaged.

The inner surface of lower housing 11 is formed to be substantiallyplanar. At a center of the inner surface of lower housing 11, an opening11B is formed for exposing lower LCD 12. On the left side of opening 11B(on the negative side of the y-axis shown in the drawing), an opening11C is formed, and on the right side of opening 11B, openings 11D areformed. Openings 11C and 11D are for exposing key tops (upper surfacesof buttons 14A to 14E). The screen of lower LCD 12 accommodated in lowerhousing 11 is exposed through opening 11B and the key tops are exposedthrough openings 11C and 11D.

Thus, in the inner surface of lower housing 11, non-screen areas(dotted-line areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1, specifically, areas forarranging buttons 14A to 14D; button arrangement areas) are provided onopposing sides of opening 11B provided at the center of the innersurface of lower housing 11 for lower LCD 12. Each of the buttonarrangement areas is designed to have a dimension of 15 mm or more(preferably 20 mm or more, more preferably 30 to 40 mm) in the lateraldirection (in the y direction shown in the drawing).

Buttons 14A to 14K and a touch panel 13 are provided as an input devicein lower housing 11. As shown in FIG. 1, among buttons 14A to 14K, adirection input button 14A, a button 14B, a button 14C, a button 14D, abutton 14E, a power button 14F, a start button 14G, and a select button14H are provided on the inner surface of lower housing 11. Here, theinner surface means the inner side when upper housing 21 and lowerhousing 11 are folded.

Direction input button 14A is used, for example, for a selectionoperation, and buttons 14B to 14E, start button 14G, and select button14H are used, for example, for an enter operation or a cancel operation.Power button 14F is used for turning on/off the power of game device 10.

In the present embodiment, direction input button 14A and power button14F are provided on one side (left side in FIG. 1) of lower LCD 12provided around the center of lower housing 11, and buttons 14B to 14Eare provided on the other side (right side in FIG. 1) of lower LCD 12.As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17( c), power button 14F may be provided on aright side surface of lower housing 11.

Direction input button 14A has a cross shape, and is about 20 mm inlength and width. Direction input button 14A is provided such that acenter thereof is located in a position distant from the left end oflower housing 11 by about 20 mm and from the lower end of lower housing11 by about 40 mm.

Power button 14F has a circular shape, and is provided such that acenter thereof is located in a position distant from the left end oflower housing 11 by about 25 mm and from the lower end of lower housing11 by about 10 mm.

Each of buttons 14B to 14E has a circular shape and a radius ofapproximately 5 mm. Button 14B is provided such that a center thereof islocated in a position distant from the right end of lower housing 11 byabout 10 mm and from the lower end of lower housing 11 by about 40 mm.Button 14C is provided such that a center thereof is located in aposition distant from the right end of lower housing 11 by about 20 mmand from the lower end of lower housing 11 by about 40 mm. Button 14D isprovided such that a center thereof is located in a position distantfrom the right end of lower housing 11 by about 20 mm and from the lowerend of lower housing 11 by about 50 mm. Button 14E is provided such thata center thereof is located in a position distant from the right end oflower housing 11 by about 25 mm and from the lower end of lower housing11 by about 45 mm.

Direction input button 14A and buttons 14B to 14E are used forperforming various operations (which will be described later) on gamedevice 10.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, an L button 14I is provided at a leftend portion of an upper surface of lower housing 11 and an R button 14Jis provided at a right end portion of the upper surface of lower housing11. L button 14I and R button 14J are used, for example, for performinga photographing instruction operation (shutter operation).

In addition, a volume button 14K is provided on a left side surface oflower housing 11. Volume button 14K is used for adjusting a volume of aspeaker included in game device 10. In addition, in the presentembodiment, volume button 14K is used also for adjusting brightness ofupper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12 by being operated together with selectbutton 14H. Such an operation will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 further includes touch panel 13 asanother input device in addition to operation buttons 14A to 14I. Touchpanel 13 is attached to the screen of lower LCD 12. Touch panel 13 maybe of any type such as a resistive film type, an optical type (infraredtype), or a capacitive coupling type. Touch panel 13 used in the presentembodiment has the same resolution (detection accuracy) as that of lowerLCD 12, however, resolution of touch panel 13 and resolution of lowerLCD 12 may not necessarily be equal to each other. In addition, a touchpanel based on any principles may be employed as the touch panel in thepresent embodiment, so long as such a device can detect a contactcoordinate on a screen.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the right side surface of lower housing11, an insertion opening 17 is provided. Insertion opening 17 canaccommodate a touch pen 27 used for performing an operation on touchpanel 13. An input to touch panel 13 is usually provided by using touchpen 27, however, in addition to touch pen 27, a finger of the user canbe used for operating touch panel 13.

In the right side surface of lower housing 11, an insertion opening isprovided for accommodating a memory card 28. Inside the insertionopening, a connector (not shown) is provided for electrically connectinggame device 10 and memory card 28 to each other. Memory card 28 isremovably attached to the connector.

Memory card 28 is based on universal specifications as defined by anystandardization organization, and representatively implemented by an SD(Secure Digital) memory card. Memory card 28 contains a non-volatilerewritable memory, and it is used, for example, for storing (saving) animage picked up by game device 10 or for reading an image generated inanother device into game device 10. Alternatively, memory card 28, forexample, stores in advance a music file which is music data, andreproduction processing can be performed by reading the music file intogame device 10. Some kind of program may be stored in memory card 28through a personal computer or the like, however, such a program cannotbe executed in game device 10.

Further, in the upper surface of lower housing 11, an insertion opening(shown with a chain-dotted line in FIG. 1) is provided for accommodatinga memory card 29. Inside the insertion opening as well, a connector (notshown) is provided for electrically connecting game device 10 and memorycard 29 to each other.

Memory card 29 is preferably based on specifications dedicated for gamedevice 10 according to the present embodiment. Namely, memory card 29 isdesigned to have a size different from that of a memory card complyingwith the universal specifications. Memory card 29 is a storage mediumstoring an image communication program, a game program or the like, andit is removably attached to the insertion opening provided in lowerhousing 11. In addition, memory card 29 may also store a selectedapplication program which will be described later. An applicationprogram stored in memory card 29 is read into a main memory 32 andexecuted by a CPU 31 when execution of the application program isselected with a method as will be described later with reference to FIG.23.

Though memory card 29 may contain an ROM and store a program in the ROM,memory card 29 may contain a non-volatile rewritable memory so that datacan be written therein by game device 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, three LEDs 15A to 15C are disposed in aleft-hand-side portion of shaft portion 11A of lower housing 11 (LEDs15A to 15C may be disposed in a right-hand-side portion of shaft portion11A as shown in FIG. 15). An illumination operation of these LEDs 15A to15C will be described later.

<Upper Housing>

Meanwhile, a feature for picking up an image (a camera) and a featurefor displaying the picked-up image (a display device) are provided inupper housing 21. A feature provided in upper housing 21 will bedescribed hereinafter.

As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 includes upper LCD 22. Upper LCD 22is accommodated in upper housing 21. Upper LCD 22 has a horizontallylong shape, and is arranged such that a long side direction thereofcorresponds to a long side direction of upper housing 21. Upper LCD 22is provided in the inner surface of upper housing 21 (the surfacelocated on the inside of game device 10 in the closed state). Thus, byclosing game device 10 when it is not used, a screen of upper LCD 22 canbe prevented from getting dirty and being damaged. Similarly to lowerLCD 12, a display device of any other type having any resolution may beused instead of upper LCD 22. Though details will be described later,upper LCD 22 mainly displays thereon an image concerning an imagepick-up operation, such as an image for explaining a manner of operationto the user. In an alternative embodiment, a touch panel may be providedalso on upper LCD 22.

Game device 10 includes two cameras 23 and 25 as image pick-up means.Each of cameras 23 and 25 is accommodated in upper housing 21. As shownin FIG. 1, inner camera 23 is disposed in the inner surface of upperhousing 21. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, outer camera 25 isdisposed in a surface opposite to the surface in which inner camera 23is disposed, that is, in the outer surface of upper housing 21 (asurface located on the outside of game device 10 in the closed state).

Though a case where game device 10 includes two cameras as the imagepick-up means is described by way of example in the present embodiment,game device 10 may include one camera, or three or more cameras.Further, a camera may be disposed at any position.

As shown in FIG. 2, a fourth LED 26 is disposed in the outer surface ofupper housing 21. Fourth LED 26 is disposed around outer camera 25 (on aright side of outer camera 25 in the present embodiment; and above outercamera 25 in the opened state in the example shown in FIG. 17( b)).Fourth LED 26 is turned on at the time when photographing by innercamera 23 or outer camera 25 is performed (when the shutter button ispressed). Further, fourth LED 26 illuminates while a moving picture istaken by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25.

Such an operation of fourth LED 26 can notify a subject thatphotographing is performed (being performed) by game device 10.

In addition, an external audio output terminal 19 (shown with a dashedline in FIG. 1) in which a plug provided in equipment for external audiooutput (such as a headphone, an earphone and a bone conductionheadphone) is to be inserted is provided in a lower surface of lowerhousing 11. In the inside of this external audio output terminal 19, ajack 62 for electrically connecting game device 1 and the equipment forexternal audio output with each other is provided. The equipment forexternal audio output may be equipment for both ears such as a headphoneor equipment for one ear such as an earphone, and a plug of theequipment for external audio output is removably attached to a jack.Though a headphone is representatively described hereinafter as theequipment for external audio output, equipment such as an earphone mayalso be employed.

Game device 10 includes a microphone (a microphone 43 shown in FIG. 18)as an audio input device. Microphone 43 is accommodated in upper housing21. In the present embodiment, microphone 43 is arranged in shaftportion 21A of upper housing 21. More specifically, the microphone isattached around inner camera 23 (in the drawing, on the side on they-axis), and further specifically, it is arranged on the side of innercamera 23 at a distance of 10 mm therefrom (in the drawing, on the sidein the positive direction of the y-axis).

In addition, in the inner surface of upper housing 21, a microphone hole21C is provided to allow the microphone to sense sound outside gamedevice 10. Microphone hole 21C is provided in shaft portion 21A of upperhousing 21. If microphone hole 21C is provided in a coupling portion oflower housing 11 and upper housing 21, it is preferably provided at aposition offset from the center by a prescribed distance.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15, the microphone may be accommodatedin lower housing 11. In FIG. 15, a microphone hole 16 is provided in theinner surface of lower housing 11, specifically in a lower left portionof the inner surface of lower housing 11 (a button arrangement areacorresponding to a dotted-line area A1). The microphone is arranged inthe vicinity of microphone hole 16 in lower housing 11.

A position where microphone 43 is accommodated and a position ofmicrophone hole 16 do not necessarily have to be in the coupling portionabove, and for example, microphone 43 may be accommodated in lowerhousing 11 and microphone hole 16 may be provided in lower housing 11 incorrespondence with the position of accommodation of microphone 43.Alternatively, microphone hole 16 may be provided adjacent to externaloutput terminal 19 for insertion of a plug provided in a headphone.

<Indication by Indicator and Operation Example>

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an illumination operation of LED 15A toLED 15C of game device 10 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 3( a), game device 10 can establish wirelesscommunication with other equipment as will be described later, and afirst LED 15A illuminates when wireless communication is established.Specifically, first LED 15A illuminates whenever communication withother equipment is enabled. Meanwhile, first LED 15A blinks whilecommunication with other equipment is in progress (or data transmissionis in progress).

Referring to FIG. 3( b), a second LED 15B illuminates while game device10 is being charged.

Referring to FIG. 3( c), a third LED 15C illuminates when the power ofgame device 10 is turned on. In addition, an illumination state of thirdLED 15C is varied depending on a state of charge of a battery (batterypack) mounted on game device 10. Specifically, third LED 15C illuminatesin blue when a battery level is relatively high, while it illuminates inred when the battery level is relatively low. In addition, when thebattery level is very low, third LED 15C blinks in red.

Thus, three LEDs 15A to 15C can notify the user of a state ofcommunication establishment, a state of charge, a battery level, and astate of power on/off of game device 10.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for illustrating an operation of volume button 14Kof game device 10 according to the present embodiment. In game device10, a volume can be set in a plurality of steps (for example, in fivesteps), and as shown in FIG. 4( a), the volume is increased in astepwise fashion each time a “+” (plus) side of volume button 14K ispressed. On the other hand, the volume is lowered in a stepwise fashioneach time a “−” (minus) side of volume button 14K is pressed.

Meanwhile, sound effect (shutter sound) or the like output from aspeaker at the time when photographing by inner camera 23 or outercamera 25 is carried out (when the shutter button is pressed) ispreferably set at a prescribed volume, independently of volume setting.

In addition, when game device 100 is in a sleep state which will bedescribed later, only lowering in the volume is preferably permittedwith regard to the operation of volume button 14K.

Referring to FIG. 4( b), when volume button 14K is operated while selectbutton 14H has been pressed, brightness of upper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12is changed. Namely, each time the “+” (plus) side of volume button 14Kis pressed while select button 14H has been pressed, display on upperLCD 22 and lower LCD 12 becomes brighter in a stepwise fashion. On theother hand, each time the “−” (minus) side of volume button 14K ispressed while select button 14H has been pressed, display on upper LCD22 and lower LCD 12 becomes darker in a stepwise fashion.

4. Detailed Structure and Usage

A more detailed structure of game device 10 according to the presentembodiment and usage of game device 10 by the user will be describedwith reference to FIGS. 5 to 14 in addition to FIGS. 1 and 2 above.

FIG. 5 shows a side view of game device 10 in the opened state (unfoldedstate), and FIG. 6 shows four orthogonal views of game device 10 in theclosed state (folded state). Namely, FIG. 6( a) shows a left side viewof game device 10 in the closed state, FIG. 6( b) shows a top view ofgame device 10, FIG. 6( c) shows a right side view of game device 10,and FIG. 6( d) shows a back view of game device 10.

Game device 10 according to the present embodiment is small enough insize to be held with both hands or one hand in the opened state. Forexample, game device 10 can approximately be 50 to 100 mm long and 100to 200 mm wide with a thickness of 10 to 40 mm in the closed state, andcan approximately be 100 to 200 mm long in the opened state. It is notedthat a direction of length corresponds to the x direction in thedrawings, a direction of width corresponds to the y direction in thedrawings, and a direction of thickness corresponds to the z direction inthe drawings.

More preferably, game device 10 can be 60 to 90 mm long and 100 to 150mm wide with a thickness of 15 to 30 mm in the closed state, and canapproximately be 120 to 160 mm long in the opened state.

Further preferably, game device 10 can be 70 to 80 mm long and 100 to150 mm wide with a thickness of 15 to 25 mm in the closed state, and canapproximately be 135 to 155 mm long in the opened state.

It is noted that the thickness of lower housing 11 is preferably largerthan that of upper housing 21. Further, the length of game device 10 inthe opened state may be substantially the same as the width thereof. Adimension of lower housing 11 in a direction of length is desirably setsuch that a second joint of an index finger is located around an uppercorner of lower housing 11 when a lower corner of lower housing 11 issupported by a center of a palm.

FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of the lower housing shown in FIG. 1which is taken along the line A-A′, and FIG. 8 shows a cross-sectionalview of the upper housing shown in FIG. 1 which is taken along the lineB-B′. As shown in FIG. 7, on the inner surface of lower housing 11 (thesurface located on the inside of game device 10 in the closed state),shaft portion 11A is provided to project in the direction perpendicularto the inner surface (typically, shaft portion 11A is structurallyintegral with the lower housing). Shaft portions 11A are provided atrespective opposing ends in the left-right direction (in the y directionin the drawing) (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 15, each of shaftportions 11A may be provided in a position slightly inward of the endwith respect to the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, in a lower surface of upper housing 21 (a sidesurface on the negative side of the x-axis in the drawing), shaftportion 21A is provided to project in the direction perpendicular to thelower surface (shaft portion 21A is structurally integral with the upperhousing). Shaft portion 21A is provided to project in the directionperpendicular to the lower surface as well as to project also in thedirection perpendicular to the inner surface of upper housing 21 (asurface located on the inside of game device 10 in the closed state).Shaft portion 21A is provided at the center of the lower end of upperhousing 21 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 1). Shaft portion 11Aand shaft portion 21A are pivotably connected to each other by a hingeprovided therein, thereby forming an integral projection portion. Asconstructed above, the projection portion projects from the innersurface of each of housings 11 and 21 (see FIG. 5).

Since shaft portion 11A is provided to project from the inner surface oflower housing 11 and shaft portion 21A is provided to project downwardlyfrom upper housing 21, a step is formed between an outer surface oflower housing 11 (a surface located on the outside of game device 10 inthe closed state) and an outer surface of upper housing 21 by thethickness of lower housing 11 in a state where two housings 11 and 21are connected to each other (see FIG. 5).

As described above, upper housing 21 is pivotably supported by a part ofan upper portion of lower housing 11. Thus, game device 10 can be in theclosed state (a state where an angle between lower housing 11 and upperhousing 21 is about 0° (see FIG. 5)) or in the opened state (a statewhere the angle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 is about180° (see FIG. 1)). Further, in addition to the closed state and theopened state, game device 10 in the present embodiment can maintain anangle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 at any angle rangingbetween the closed state and the opened state by frictional forcegenerated at the hinge or the like. In other words, upper housing 21 canbe stationary at any angle with respect to lower housing 11.

Alternatively, the hinge may have a mechanism for temporarily fixingupper housing 21 and lower housing 11 at a prescribed angle smaller than180° with click feeling. In other words, upper housing 21 and lowerhousing 11 may temporarily be fixed in the opened state at a prescribedangle smaller than 180° with click feeling. Specifically, for example,the prescribed angle ranges from 150° to 175°, and is 160° in thepresent embodiment. In the present embodiment, housings 11 and 21 can beopened up to an angle of 180°, however, in an alternative embodiment,housings 11 and 21 may be opened only up to the prescribed angle aboveor up to an angle of 180° or greater.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 6(a), and 6(c), volume button 14K is provided onthe left side surface of lower housing 11. Volume button 14K is used foradjusting volume of a speaker of game device 10. As shown in FIG. 6( d),button 14J is provided at a right end of an upper surface of lowerhousing 11. Button 14I is provided at a left end of the upper surface oflower housing 11. Preferably, the right end of button 14J extends to theright end of lower housing 11, however, it does not have to be in thatway. In the former case, design is preferably made such that a rightside surface of button 14J is substantially flush with the right sidesurface of lower housing 11. Further, a back end of button 14Jpreferably extends to reach a back surface of lower housing 11, however,it does not have to be in that way. In the former case, design ispreferably made such that the back surface of button 14J issubstantially flush with the back surface of lower housing 11. It isnoted that the above is also applicable to button 14I.

Specifically, buttons 14J and 14I have a length of about 20 mm in theleft-right direction and a width (a length in the thickness direction,that is, a length in the z direction shown in the drawing) of about 10mm. Each of buttons 14I and 14J is used, for example, for performing aphotographing instruction operation (a shutter operation) on game device10. It is noted that buttons 14J and 14I preferably have a width atleast 50% as large as the thickness of lower housing 11.

Both buttons 14I and 14H may function as a shutter button. Here, aright-handed user can use button 14J and a left-handed user can usebutton 14I. Thus, game device 10 is user-friendly for either user.

In game device 10, buttons 14I and 14J may be set to constantly serve asvalid shutter buttons, or alternatively, only button 14J may be set asvalid in the case of setting for right-handedness and only button 14Imay be set as valid in the case of setting for left-handedness bysetting game device 10 to right-handedness or left-handedness (by havingthe user provide an input for setting through a menu program or the likeso that set data is stored). Further, in an alternative embodiment, onlya single button for performing a photographing instruction operation maybe provided on the upper surface of lower housing 11.

A cover is provided on the right side surface of lower housing 11 insuch a manner that it can be opened or closed. Inside this cover, aconnector (not shown) is provided for connecting memory card 28.

As described above, in lower housing 11, input devices (touch panel 13and buttons 14A to 14I) are provided for providing an operation input togame device 10. Thus, in using game device 10, the user can hold lowerhousing 11 and perform an operation on game device 10.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds game device 10with both hands. As shown in FIG. 9, the user holds the side surfacesand the outer surface (the surface opposite to the inner surface) oflower housing 11 with palms, middle fingers, ring fingers, and littlefingers of both hands in a state where LCDs 12 and 22 face the user. Bythus holding the game device, the user can perform an operation ofbuttons 14A to 14E with thumbs and perform an operation of buttons 14Iand 14J with index fingers while holding lower housing 11.

In the present embodiment, lower housing 11 is formed in thehorizontally long shape and provided with buttons on both sides of lowerLCD 12. Thus, the image pick-up device can easily be held and operated.Further, as described above, the button arrangement areas (dotted-lineareas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1) are provided to have a dimension of atleast 15 mm in the lateral direction thereof. Thus, thumbs can beprevented from being located on lower LCD 12 while lower housing 11 isheld.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds game device 10with one hand. In providing an input to touch panel 13, as shown in FIG.10, one hand holding lower housing 11 is released from lower housing 11and lower housing 11 is held only with the other hand, thereby allowingan input to touch panel 13 with that one hand. In this case as well, athumb holding lower housing 11 can be prevented from being located onlower LCD 12.

Alternatively, while holding lower housing 11 with both hands, the usercan provide an input to touch panel 13 with a thumb of one hand (a thumbof a right hand if the user is right-handed). In this case as well, athumb of the other hand holding lower housing 11 (a thumb of a left handif the user is right-handed) can be prevented from being located ontouch panel 13.

As described above, inner camera 23 is disposed in the inner surface ofupper housing 21 (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, outer camera 25 isdisposed in the surface opposite to the surface in which inner camera 23is disposed, that is, in the outer surface of upper housing 21 (thesurface located on the outside of game device 10 in the closed state)(see FIGS. 2, 6(b) and the like).

Thus, inner camera 23 is capable of picking up an image in a directionin which the inner surface of upper housing 21 faces and outer camera 25is capable of picking up an image in a direction opposite to an imagepick-up direction of inner camera 23, that is, in a direction in whichthe outer surface of upper housing 21 faces.

As described above, game device 100 according to the present embodimentis provided with two cameras 23 and 25 such that the image pick-updirections thereof are opposite to each other. Therefore, the user canpick up images in two different directions without changing a manner ofholding game device 10. For example, the user can photograph a view seenfrom game device 10 toward the user with inner camera 23 as well as aview seen from game device 10 in a direction opposite to the user withouter camera 25.

In addition, according to the feature above, a photographing directionof outer camera 25 is opposite to (180° different from) a direction inwhich the display screen of upper LCD 22 faces and a photographingdirection of inner camera 23 is the same as the direction in which thedisplay screen of upper LCD 22 faces. Thus, since a line-of-sightdirection of the user looking at the display screen of upper LCD 22 issubstantially the same as the photographing direction of outer camera 25when an image taken by outer camera 25 is displayed on upper LCD 22, itis easy for the user to recognize the photographing direction. Further,since the line-of-sight direction of the user looking at the displayscreen of upper LCD 22 is substantially opposite to the photographingdirection of inner camera 23 when an image taken by inner camera 23 isdisplayed on upper LCD 22, it is easy for the user to recognize thephotographing direction.

Further, inner camera 23 is disposed at a center of shaft portion 21Aformed in the lower center portion of upper housing 21. In other words,inner camera 23 is disposed at a center of a portion where two housings11 and 21 are connected to each other.

Thus, when game device 10 is in the opened state, inner camera 23 islocated between two LCDs 12 and 22 (see FIG. 1). In other words, innercamera 23 is arranged around the center of game device 10. It is notedthat the “center of game device 10” means a center of an operationsurface of game device 10 (including the inner surfaces of housings 11and 21 in the opened state).

Alternatively, it can also be said that inner camera 23 is arrangedaround a center in the lateral direction of LCDs 12 and 22.

In the present embodiment, since shaft portion 21A is integral withupper housing 21 and inner camera 23 is arranged in shaft portion 21A ina fixed manner, the photographing direction of inner camera 23 ischanged in accordance with opening and closing of upper housing 21.Thus, change in the photographing direction can be achieved withoutproviding an additional mechanism for changing the photographingdirection of the camera. Further, since inner camera 23 is arranged inthe inner surface of a second housing (on the same side of shaft portion21A as the inner surface of the second housing), inner camera 23 faceslower housing 11 as a result of closing of upper housing 21. Thus, innercamera 23 can be protected automatically by closing game device 10.

As described above, in the present embodiment, inner camera 23 isprovided in shaft portion 21A such that it is arranged around the centerof the operation surface of game device 10. In an alternativeembodiment, however, inner camera 23 may be provided in a position otherthan the shaft portion of lower housing 11 or upper housing 21. Forexample, inner camera 23 may be provided in the inner surface of upperhousing 21, between shaft portion 21A and upper LCD 22. When innercamera 23 is provided substantially at the center in the left-rightdirection of the operation surface of game device 10, the user caneasily set a position of game device 10 at least in the left-rightdirection, for example, in photographing the user himself/herself.

Here, for example, the case where inner camera 23 is arranged at an endof the operation surface of game device 10 (for example, at an upper endof the inner surface of upper housing 21) is considered. In operating aportable instrument such as game device 10, the user usually holds gamedevice 10 such that the user faces game device 10 for better viewing thescreen.

In the case where inner camera 23 is arranged at the end of game device10, however, the user cannot be located within an image pick-up range ofinner camera 23 when game device 10 is held in a usual holding position(in a position where the user faces game device 10). For example, in thecase where inner camera 23 is arranged at an upper end of the operationsurface, the image pick-up range is slightly above the user when theuser remains holding game device 10 in the usual holding position, andhence a face of the user cannot successfully be located within the imagepick-up range.

Thus, in the case where inner camera 23 is arranged at the end of theoperation surface of game device 10, game device 10 has to be moved fromthe usual holding position such that the user is successfully locatedwithin the image pick-up range.

On the other hand, when a view seen from game device 10 toward the useris to be photographed, the line-of-sight direction of the user isopposite to the image pick-up direction of the camera and game device 10has to be held in a position different from the usual holding position.Therefore, it is difficult for the user to arrange game device 10 suchthat the user is successfully located within the image pick-up range.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when game device 10 is inthe opened state, inner camera 23 is located around the center of gamedevice 10. Thus, when photographing the user himself/herself with innercamera 23, the user has only to hold game device 10 in a position inwhich the user faces game device 10. In other words, by holding theimage pick-up device in the usual holding position, the user is locatedaround the center of the image pick-up range, and hence the user isreadily located within the image pick-up range. As described above, byarranging inner camera 23 in a position around the center of game device10 when viewed from the user, the user is readily photographed with theuser being successfully located within the image pick-up range.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6( b), outer camera 25 is arranged in anupper portion of upper housing 21 (in a portion distant from lowerhousing 11 (more distant from lower housing 11 than a center of upperhousing 21)) when game device 10 is in the opened state. This is becausethe user holds lower housing 11 in using game device 10, and if outercamera 25 is arranged close to lower housing 11, a hand of the user maybe located within an image pick-up range of outer camera 25.

In the present embodiment, outer camera 25 is provided such that acenter thereof is located in a position distant from a right end ofupper housing 21 by about 20 mm and from an upper end of upper housing21 by about 20 mm when game device 10 is in the opened state. Sinceouter camera 25 is not for photographing the user holding game device10, there is a low need for providing outer camera 25 at the center ofgame device 10. Further, since the user basically holds lower housing11, it would be easier for the user to hold game device 10 having anappropriate thickness. On the other hand, since portability of gamedevice 10 having a small thickness in the folded state is high, upperhousing 21 is preferably as thin as possible. Thus, in the presentembodiment, upper LCD 22 is arranged at the center of upper housing 21in view of visibility and outer camera 25 is arranged in an upperportion of upper housing 21 (that is, in an area on a back side of anon-screen area B2 shown in FIG. 1) avoiding a position where upper LCD22 is arranged.

Thus, since a position where upper LCD 22 is arranged does not overlapwith that of outer camera 25, upper housing 21 can be made thinner.Further, since the user basically holds lower housing 11, by providingouter camera 25 in upper housing 21, a finger holding lower housing 11can be prevented from being located within the image pick-up range ofouter camera 25.

The inner surface of upper housing 21 is formed to be substantiallyplanar. As shown in FIG. 1, at the center of the inner surface of upperhousing 21, an opening 21B is formed for exposing upper LCD 22. Thescreen of upper LCD 22 accommodated in upper housing 21 is exposedthrough opening 21B. Further, a sound emission hole 21D is formed oneach side of opening 21B. A not-shown speaker is accommodated in upperhousing 21 in the rear of sound emission hole 21D. Sound emission hole21D is a hole for emitting sound from the speaker to the outside. Thesesound emission holes 21D are provided on both of left and right sides ofupper LCD 22.

Thus, in the inner surface of upper housing 21, non-screen areas(dotted-line areas B1 and B2 shown in FIG. 1, specifically an area forarranging a speaker; a speaker arrangement area) are provided onrespective sides of opening 21B for upper LCD 22 provided at the centerof the inner surface of upper housing 21.

Here, in the present embodiment, lower housing 11 and upper housing 21are equal in lengths (widths) in the left-right direction thereof (inthe y direction shown in the drawing). Further, lower LCD 12 and upperLCD 22 are equal in widths in the left-right direction and they arearranged in the same position with respect to the left-right direction.Thus, the speaker arrangement area is provided such that the positionthereof in the left-right direction corresponds to the position of thebutton arrangement area. Similarly to the button arrangement area, thespeaker arrangement area is designed to have a dimension of 15 mm ormore (preferably 20 mm or more, more preferably approximately 30 to 40mm; 32 mm in the present embodiment) in the lateral direction.

In the present embodiment, regarding the left-right direction, two soundemission holes 21D are arranged around the centers of the speakerarrangement areas in the left-right direction, respectively. Further,regarding an up-down direction, sound emission hole 21D is arranged in alower area of the speaker arrangement area (in an area close to lowerhousing 11). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15, the speakers and soundemission holes 21D may be arranged at a position slightly higher thanthat in FIG. 1. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of soundemission holes 21D (six in FIG. 15) may be provided for one speaker.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-screen area isprovided in lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 in the same positionwith respect to the left-right direction. Thus, game device 10 is easilyheld when held sideways as shown in FIG. 9 as well as when heldlengthwise (in a state where game device 10 is rotated 90° clockwise orcounterclockwise relative to the state shown in FIG. 9).

FIGS. 11 and 12 are diagrams showing a state where the user holds gamedevice 10 lengthwise. FIG. 11 shows a state where game device 10 is heldwith a left hand, and FIG. 12 shows a state where game device 10 is heldwith a right hand. A right-handed user may rotate game device 10 90°counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9, and hold game device 10with a left hand as shown in FIG. 11. A left-handed user may rotate gamedevice 10 90° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9, and hold gamedevice 10 with a right hand as shown in FIG. 12. In any case, the usercan hold game device 10 while touching the projection portion (shaftportions 11A and 21A) with his/her thumb and the upper surface of lowerhousing 11 with his/her index finger.

As described above, as the step is formed between the outer surface oflower housing 11 and the outer surface of upper housing 21 (see FIG. 5),game device 10 can be held in a stable manner by touching the step withthe index finger. In addition, the shutter button (button 14I or 14J)can easily be pressed by a dominant hand not holding game device 10.

Since the non-screen area is provided on each side of LCDs 12 and 22 asdescribed above, a thumb is not located on the screen even when gamedevice 10 is held lengthwise with either hand. In other words, even whengame device 10 is held lengthwise, game device 10 is easily held andvisibility of the screen and operability of the touch panel are ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the projection portion projects from lowerhousing 11 further than the key tops of buttons 14A to 14E (directioninput button 14A in FIG. 7). Thus, even if a thumb holding game device10 lengthwise is located above a button, the user is less likely toaccidentally press the button, and an erroneous input can be prevented.

Further, since game device 10 has a dimension of 100 to 200 mm in lengthin the opened state, game device 10 held lengthwise has a sufficientwidth substantially equal to the width of game device 10 held sideways,and hence it is not difficult to hold the game device.

When game device 10 is held lengthwise, the angle between the housingsmay be set to the prescribed angle smaller than 180°. By setting theangle between the housings to an angle slightly smaller than 180°, theouter surfaces of housings 11 and 21 fit to a shape of a hand, and henceit becomes easier to hold game device 10.

In addition, as described above, in game device 10 according to thepresent embodiment, cameras 23 and 25 are provided in upper housing 21and a live image picked up by camera 23 or 25 can be displayed on lowerLCD 12 provided in lower housing 11. According to this structure, whengame device 10 is held for use or when game device 10 is placed on adesk for use, it is extremely easy to perform an edition operation on alive image while changing a photographing direction as appropriate.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which game device 10 is held foruse. When game device 10 is held for use, as shown in FIG. 13, the userholds lower housing 11 with one hand (a left hand in FIG. 13). Then, asa live image is displayed on lower LCD 12, the user performs an editionoperation on the live image using touch pen 27 with the other hand.Here, since an angle of lower housing 11 and an angle of upper housing21 can individually be changed, the user can hold game device 10 withthe angle of lower housing 11 being adjusted such that the user caneasily perform an operation on the touch panel, while aiming camera 23or 25 in upper housing 21 at an image pick-up object.

In addition, since the user holds lower housing 11 with one hand, theuser can perform an edition operation through touch panel 13 in a stablemanner. As described above, when game device 10 is held for use, it isextremely easy to perform an edition operation on a live image.

In addition, game device 10 is also suitable for photographing in astate where game device 10 is placed on a stand or the like, in additionto photographing in a state where game device 10 is held by the user.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state in which game device 10 is placedfor use. Even when game device 10 is placed on a desk or the like foruse as shown in FIG. 14, it is easy for the user to operate touch panel13 because a live image is displayed on lower LCD 12.

In addition, the user can place lower housing 11 on a placement surfaceand adjust an angle between two housings 11 and 21 such that upperhousing 21 is set at a desired angle with respect to lower housing 11.Thus, even when the user places game device 10, the user can performphotographing with upper housing 21 (the photographing direction of thecamera) being set at any angle. Thus, even when game device 10 is placedfor use, it is extremely easy to perform an edition operation on a liveimage.

Since game device 10 includes two cameras 23 and 25, photographing indifferent directions can be performed by changing a photographing camerabetween inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 without moving game device10 placed on a stand. It is noted that the photographing direction canbe changed by adjusting the angle between two housings 11 and 21 inphotographing with either camera. In addition, game device 10 may have aself-timer function with which photographing is performed in aprescribed period of time after the timing of pressing of the shutterbutton. In photographing with the self-timer function, the user does nothold game device 10. Therefore, ability to set the photographingdirection of the camera to any direction as in the present embodiment isparticularly convenient.

Further, in the present embodiment, two cameras 23 and 25 for imagepick-up in different directions are both provided in upper housing 21.Therefore, even when game device 10 is placed for photographing, both oftwo cameras 23 and 25 can be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, since lower housing 11 is formed tohave a horizontally long shape, stability in placing game device 10 isincreased and game device 10 can be less likely to fall down.

In addition, in game device 10, an LCD for displaying a real-time image(a live image) picked-up by camera 23 or 25 may be switched betweenupper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12, for example, in accordance with a switchinstruction from the user. Here, for example, when game device 10 isplaced on a stand for use, switching may be made to display a real-timeimage on lower LCD 12. This is because, when game device 10 is placed ona stand for use, the angle of upper housing 21 should be changed inorder to adjust the photographing direction of the camera, and hence theuser can easily view a real-time image displayed on lower LCD 12 oflower housing 11 of which angle does not have to be changed.

In an alternative embodiment, a picked-up image may be displayed onupper LCD 22. Since an input device (touch panel 13 and buttons 14A to14I) for providing an operation input to game device 10 is provided inlower housing 11, in using game device 10, the user can provide an inputto the input device while viewing a picked-up image (an image picked upby a camera) displayed on upper LCD 22 and holding lower housing 11.

According to the feature above, game device 10 includes the buttons andthe touch panel as input devices. Thus, game device 10 can select anappropriate input device as an input device to be used for performing aninput operation depending on a type (characteristic) of an inputoperation. For example, regarding a shutter operation, preferably, theuser has actual feeling of the operation and the operation has aprescribed stroke. Thus, the shutter operation may be performed by usingthe button. Further, regarding an operation in edition processing whichwill be described later, an operation is preferably performed by usingthe touch panel.

In the present embodiment, game device 10 is structured to be foldableby pivotably connecting (coupling) lower housing 11 and upper housing 12to each other. In an alternative embodiment, lower housing 11 may becoupled to upper housing 12 with another feature or in another manner.

For example, two plate-like housings may be connected to each other suchthat one of the housings is slidable or pivotable with respect to theother housing with one being in parallel with the other. By doing so, asin the embodiment above, the two housings can be in an opened state andin a closed state.

Alternatively, in the embodiment above, upper housing 21 may bestructured such that shaft portion 21A and other portions thereof arepivotable around an axis in the up-down direction. According to thisstructure, only by providing one camera in upper housing 21, the cameracan easily be directed to the line-of-sight direction of the user or adirection opposite thereto.

An image pick-up device 110 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 is an image pick-updevice obtained by changing arrangement, the number, a shape, or thelike of some components of game device 10 according to the presentembodiment, and basic functions thereof are the same as those of gamedevice 10.

5. Internal Configuration of Game Device

An internal configuration of game device 10 will be describedhereinafter with reference to FIG. 18.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of gamedevice 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, gamedevice 10 includes such electronic parts as CPU 31, main memory 32, amemory control circuit 33, a data memory 34 for storage, a memory 35 forpreset data, memory card interfaces (memory card UF) 36 and 37, awireless communication module 38, a local communication module 39, areal time clock (RTC) 40, a power supply circuit 41, an interfacecircuit (I/F circuit) 42, and a folded position detection sensor 50.These electronic parts are mounted on an electronic circuit board andaccommodated in lower housing 11 (or may be accommodated in upperhousing 21).

Though various electronic circuits and a battery mounted on game device10 may be accommodated in either upper housing 21 or lower housing 11,game device 10 is preferably designed such that a weight of lowerhousing 11 is greater than that of upper housing 21. Specifically,preferably, the weight of lower housing 11 ranges from 100 to 200 g andthe weight of upper housing 21 ranges from 50 to 100 g. Further, morepreferably, the weight of lower housing 11 ranges from 130 to 150 g andthe weight of upper housing 21 ranges from 70 to 90 g.

In the present embodiment, the weight of lower housing 11 is about 150 gand the weight of the upper housing is about 75 g. Further, preferably,a ratio between the weight of lower housing 11 and the weight of upperhousing 21 (the weight of lower housing 11):(the weight of upper housing21) ranges from 1.5:1 to 3:1 (more preferably, 2:1). For example, thebattery, the circuit board on which the CPU is mounted, the cardconnector, and the like are preferably accommodated in lower housing 11.

Further, preferably, minimal parts such as an LCD unit (upper LCD 22 andthe like), an image pick-up unit (cameras 23 and 25 and the like), aspeaker unit, and the like are accommodated in upper housing 21.

By designing game device 10 such that the weight of lower housing 11 isgreater than that of upper housing 21, game device 10 is less likely tofall down when placed on a stand or the like. Further, by making lowerhousing 11 held by the user heavier than upper housing 21, stabilitywhen game device 10 is held is increased and hand movement inphotographing can be prevented.

CPU 31 is information processing means for executing various programs(including a launch program, a selected application program, or the likewhich will be described later). In game device 10 according to thepresent embodiment, various programs are stored in an embedded memory(for example, data memory 34 for storage) or in memory card 28 and/or29, and CPU 31 performs various types of processing which will bedescribed later by executing a necessary program. It is noted that theprogram executed by CPU 31 may be recorded in advance in a memory withingame device 10, may be obtained from memory card 28 and/or 29, or may beobtained from another instrument through communication with anotherinstrument.

In addition, the program according to the present invention may besupplied not only to a computer represented by game device 10 through anexternal storage medium such as memory card 29 but also to a computerthrough a wired or wireless communication line. Alternatively, theprogram according to the present invention may be stored in advance in anon-volatile storage device within the computer. A computer-readablestorage medium storing such a program is not limited to the non-volatilestorage device above, and an optical disc medium such as a CD-ROM, aDVD, or a similar medium may be employed.

Main memory 32, memory control circuit 33 and memory 35 for preset dataare connected to CPU 31. In addition, data memory 34 for storage isconnected to memory control circuit 33.

Main memory 32 is storage means used as a work area or a buffer area ofCPU 31. Namely, main memory 32 stores a program read from the outside(memory card 28, other equipment, and the like), holds a work memorynecessary for various types of processing in a non-volatile manner, orstore various types of data necessary for various types of informationprocessing. In the present embodiment, for example, a PSRAM(Pseudo-SRAM) is employed as main memory 32.

Data memory 34 for storage is storage means for storing a programexecuted by CPU 31, data of images picked up by camera 23 or 25, and thelike. Data memory 34 for storage is implemented, for example, by aNAND-type flash memory.

Memory control circuit 33 is a circuit controlling reading and writingof data from/to data memory 34 for storage in accordance with aninstruction from CPU 31. Memory 35 for preset data is storage means forstoring data such as various parameters set in advance in game device 10(preset data). A flash memory connected to CPU 31 through an SPI (SerialPeripheral Interface) bus may be employed as memory 35 for preset data.

It is noted that an image obtained as a result of image pick-up bycamera 23 or 25 can selectively be stored in data memory 34 for storage,memory card 28, memory card 29, or the like.

Memory card I/F 36 is connected to CPU 31. Memory card I/F 36 reads datafrom memory card 28 attached to the connector or writes data therein inaccordance with an instruction from CPU 31. In the present embodiment,data of images picked-up by cameras 23 and 25 is written in memory card28, and the image data stored in memory card 28 is read from memory card28 to be stored in data memory 34 for storage. In addition, in thepresent embodiment, a music file which is music data stored in memorycard 28 is read from memory card 28 and stored in main memory 32 or datamemory 34 for storage.

A cartridge I/F 37 is connected to CPU 31. Cartridge I/F 37 reads datafrom memory card 29 attached to the connector or writes data therein inaccordance with an instruction from CPU 31. In the present embodiment,an application program executable by game device 10 is read from memorycard 29 and executed by CPU 31, or data relating to the applicationprogram (including a selected application program which will bedescribed later) (for example, saved data of a game or the like in acase where the application program is a game program) is written inmemory card 29.

Wireless communication module 38 has a function to connect to wirelessLAN with a scheme complying with the standard of IEEE802.11.b/g. Inaddition, local communication module 39 has a function to establishwireless communication with game device 10 of the same type with aprescribed communication scheme. Wireless communication module 38 andlocal communication module 39 are connected to CPU 31. CPU 31 cantransmit and receive data to and from other equipment via the Internetthrough wireless communication module 38, and can transmit and receivedata to and from another image pick-up device of the same type throughlocal communication module 39.

In addition, RTC 40 and power supply circuit 41 are connected to CPU 31.RTC 40 counts a time and outputs the time to CPU 31. CPU 31 calculates acurrent time (date) based on the time counted by RTC 40. Power supplycircuit 41 controls electric power from a power supply (the battery;accommodated in lower housing 11) of game device 10 to supply electricpower to each part of game device 10.

In addition, folded position detection sensor 50 is connected to CPU 31.Folded position detection sensor 50 detects an angle between lowerhousing 11 and upper housing 21, and outputs a determination signalindicating the closed state or the opened state to CPU 31 based on aresult of detection. Specifically, when the angle between lower housing11 and upper housing 21 is smaller than a prescribed threshold value,determination as the closed state is made and the determination signalindicating the closed state is output. On the other hand, when the anglebetween lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 is not smaller than theprescribed threshold value, determination as the opened state is madeand the determination signal indicating the opened state is output. Forexample, when game device 1 is operating, that is, when music datareproduction processing is in progress, receiving input of thedetermination signal indicating the closed state output from foldedposition detection sensor 50, CPU 31 stops the operation of thereproduction processing depending on sensing of connection withprescribed external output equipment and sets what is called a sleepstate in which data of that state of operation is stored. Regardingprocessing other than the reproduction processing such as displayprocessing, such processing is stopped and the sleep state is setregardless of sensing of connection with prescribed external outputequipment. On the other hand, receiving input of the determinationsignal indicating the opened state output from folded position detectionsensor 50 after game device 1 enters the sleep state, CPU 31 performsprocessing for recovering from the sleep state to the original statebased on the stored data of the state of operation. As a result of thisprocessing, the function set to the sleep state can directly be set toan active state for operation.

In the present example, folded position detection sensor 50 of such atype as detecting an angle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21and outputting a determination signal has been described, however, theopened and closed state may be detected based on magnetic force. Forexample, magnetic force generated by the speaker provided in the upperhousing can be measured with a sensor measuring magnetic force providedin the lower housing and the opened and closed state may be detectedbased on strength of the magnetic force. Alternatively, such a type asoptically or electrically detecting the opened and closed state may beadopted as the folded position detection sensor.

Moreover, game device 10 includes microphone 43 and amplifiers 44 and46. Microphone 43 and amplifiers 44 and 46 are each connected to I/Fcircuit 42. Microphone 43 senses voice and sound of the user issuedtoward game device 10 and outputs an audio signal indicating the voiceand sound to I/F circuit 42. Amplifier 44 amplifies the audio signalfrom I/F circuit 42 and causes the audio signal to be output from aright speaker 45. Amplifier 46 amplifies the audio signal from I/Fcircuit 42 and causes the audio signal to be output from a left speaker47. I/F circuit 42 is connected to CPU 31. In addition, game device 10includes a headphone amplifier 48 and a jack 49. Headphone amplifier 48and jack 49 are each connected to I/F circuit 42. Headphone amplifier 48amplifies an audio signal from I/F circuit 42 for output from anot-shown headphone through a plug of the headphone connected to jack49. I/F circuit 42 senses insertion of the plug of the headphone intothe jack by sensing turn-on of a mechanical switch, for example,resulting from insertion of a plug of a headphone into jack 49.Alternatively, I/F circuit 42 senses insertion of the plug of theheadphone into the jack by sensing an electrically conducting stateresulting from insertion of the plug of the headphone into jack 49.

I/F circuit 42 includes an audio input control circuit 42 b receivinginput of an audio signal from microphone 43, an audio output controlcircuit 42 c controlling output of an audio signal to amplifiers 44 and46 (right speaker 45 and left speaker 47) or headphone amplifier 48, atouch panel control circuit 42 a controlling touch panel 13, an outputlevel sensing circuit 42 d sensing an output level of an audio signaloutput to amplifiers 44 and 46 (right speaker 45 and left speaker 47) orheadphone amplifier 48 (headphone) by audio output control circuit 42 c,and a headphone sensing circuit 42 e sensing attachment of theheadphone.

Audio input control circuit 42 b senses an input level of an audiosignal from microphone 43, and performs A/D conversion of the audiosignal and converts the audio signal to audio data in a prescribedformat.

Headphone sensing circuit 42 e senses insertion of the plug of theheadphone into the jack by sensing turn-on of the mechanical switchresulting from insertion of the plug of the headphone into jack 49 or anelectrically conducting state resulting from insertion of the plug ofthe headphone into jack 49. Then, the result of sensing is output to CPU31, and CPU 31 receives a signal indicating the result of sensing fromheadphone sensing circuit 42 e and determines that the headphone hasbeen attached. Here, insertion of the plug of the headphone should onlybe sensed, and a method of sensing is not limited.

When the plug of the headphone is inserted into the jack and headphonesensing circuit 42 e senses attachment of the headphone, audio outputcontrol circuit 42 c switches the output of the audio signal fromamplifiers 44, 46 to headphone amplifier 48 in response to aninstruction from CPU 31, and adjusts the audio signal to be output toheadphone amplifier 48 in accordance with whether the output signal isstereophonic or monaural. In the present example, though only a singleheadphone amplifier 48 is shown in FIG. 18, stereophonic sound can beheard through a headphone for both ears and hence it is assumed thatheadphone amplifiers are provided for respective ears.

Touch panel 13 is connected to I/F circuit 42. Touch panel controlcircuit 42 a generates touch position data in a prescribed format basedon a signal from touch panel 13 and outputs the data to CPU 31. Thetouch position data indicates a coordinate of a position where input toan input surface of touch panel 13 was made. Here, the touch panelcontrol circuit performs reading of a signal from touch panel 13 andgeneration of the touch position data once in a prescribed period oftime. CPU 31 can know a position at which an input to touch panel 13 wasmade by obtaining the touch position data.

Operation button group 14 is constituted of operation buttons 14A to 14Kabove and connected to CPU 31. Operation data indicating a state ofinput to each of operation buttons 14A to 14K (whether the button waspressed or not) is output from operation button group 14 to CPU 31. CPU31 performs processing in accordance with the input to operation buttongroup 14 by obtaining the operation data from operation button group 14.

Inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 are each connected to CPU 31. Innercamera 23 and outer camera 25 pick up an image in accordance with aninstruction from CPU 31, and output picked-up image data to CPU 31. Forexample, CPU 31 gives an image pick-up instruction to any one of innercamera 23 and outer camera 25 and the camera that received theinstruction picks up an image and sends image data to CPU 31.

In addition, lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 are each connected to CPU 31.Each of lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 displays an image thereon inaccordance with an instruction from CPU 31. For example, CPU 31 causesone of lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 to display an image obtained fromany of inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 and causes the other of lowerLCD 12 and upper LCD 22 to display an operation guidance picturegenerated through prescribed processing.

Though not shown, game device 10 has a vibration function to vibrateitself. The vibration function is used, for example, for giving somenotification to the user (for example, for notifying the user of errorin operation, excess of memory capacity, and the like). In the presentembodiment, since it is assumed that the user holds lower housing 11during use, a device for achieving the vibration function (for example,a vibrator such as a vibration motor or a solenoid) is preferablyaccommodated in lower housing 11. Thus, vibration can be conveyed to theuser's hand holding game device 10 (lower housing 11).

6. Launcher Processing and Photographing Function

<Overview>

Game device 100 according to the present embodiment can execute aplurality of application programs as will be described later. In orderto facilitate an operation for selection from such a plurality ofapplication programs by the user, game device 100 has a launcherfunction. In particular, game device 100 can provide a relatively simplephotographing function on a screen providing this launcher function.

Processing supporting selective launching of an application by the userwill be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 19.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for illustrating a method of launching eachapplication program in game device 10. Game device 10 selectivelylaunches an application program desired by the user among a plurality ofapplication programs 53 to 57. Application programs 53 to 57 toselectively be launched in game device 10 may also be referred to asselected application programs.

The plurality of selected application programs above include aphotographing application program 53. Photographing application program53 is an application program for performing photographing with camera 23or 25. Photographing application program 53 is typically stored inadvance (pre-installed) in game device 10.

Further, the plurality of selected application programs above includeapplication programs having various functions in addition tophotographing application program 53 above. In FIG. 19, for example, asetting application program 54 for making various settings of gamedevice 10, a communication application program 55 for game device 10 toestablish communication with external equipment, a game applicationprogram 56 for playing a prescribed game, and a sound applicationprogram 57 for reproducing music or recording voice and sound areincluded. In the present embodiment, photographing application program53 and communication application program 55 are implemented as oneintegrated program.

It is noted that various selected application programs in addition tofive selected application programs 53 to 57 shown in FIG. 19 may bestored.

Some or all of the selected application programs above do not have to bepre-installed in game device 10. When executed, for example, a selectedapplication program may be downloaded from another device via a networksuch as the Internet, or may be read from a removable storage mediumsuch as memory card 28 or memory card 29 into a memory within gamedevice 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, processing for selectively launchingselected application programs 53 to 57 is performed by a launch functionprogram 51. Launch function program 51 is a program for selecting aselected application program to be launched from among the plurality ofselected application programs 53 to 57. Namely, launch function program51 is what is called a launcher program. Launch function program 51 isone of programs included in launch programs (a launch program 61 shownin FIG. 20) according to the present embodiment.

Selected application programs 53 to 57 are subjected to a selectionoperation that can be performed by the user as a result of execution oflaunch function program 51, and they are executed by being selected inthe selection operation.

Detailed contents of processing in photographing application program 53,communication application program 55 and sound application program 57executed by launch function program 51 in response to a user's selectionoperation will be described later.

<Control Structure>

Game device 10 according to the present embodiment includes (a) firstlaunch operation acceptance means, (b) first launch means, (c)photographing processing means, (d) photographing enabling operationacceptance means, (e) photographing operation acceptance means, (f)second launch operation acceptance means, and (g) second launch means asthe control structure. In the present embodiment, each of these means isimplemented as a result that a program (launch program 61) executed by acomputer (CPU 31) of game device 10 causes the computer to function asthat means.

(a) First Launch Operation Acceptance Means

The first launch operation acceptance means accepts a first launchoperation for selectively launching the plurality of applicationprograms above (step SA6 and SA11 which will be described later). Thus,the user can select a selected application program that the user desiresto launch (execute) for execution. As the first launch operation is anoperation for selectively launching a selected application program, thefirst launch operation is also hereinafter referred to as a “selectionlaunch operation.” It is noted that a state of accepting the firstlaunch operation (a state where the first launch operation can beperformed) is referred to as a “launch acceptance state” (FIG. 19).

(b) First Launch Means

When the first launch operation above is performed, the first launchmeans launches an application program selected in the first launchoperation from among the plurality of application programs above (stepSA12 which will be described later). In other words, for example, whenphotographing application program 53 is selected in the first launchoperation, photographing application program 53 is launched.

In the present embodiment, the launch acceptance state corresponds to astate where what is called a menu screen is displayed, and game device10 is initially in the launch acceptance state after it is started up(power is turned on) (except for start-up for the first time). Thoughdetails will be described later, the menu screen (FIG. 23) showing iconsindicating selected application programs 53 to 57 is displayed on lowerLCD 12 in the launch acceptance state in the present embodiment. Theuser can launch a selected application program by performing anoperation to touch a position of the icon on touch panel 13 as the firstlaunch operation.

(c) Photographing Processing Means

The photographing processing means performs photographing processing(step SA10 which will be described later). The photographing processingis processing for storing an image picked-up by camera 23 or 25 instorage means in the information processing device in accordance with aprescribed photographing operation. In the present embodiment, thephotographing operation is an operation to press a prescribed button(more specifically, L button 14I or R button 14J). The photographingprocessing means above is means implemented by execution of launchprogram 61 according to the present invention by CPU 31 of game device10, and it is different from means implemented by photographingapplication program 53 above. It is noted that the photographingprocessing means has only to have at least a function to performphotographing processing (a function to store an image picked-up bycamera 23 or 25 in the storage means of game device 10), however, it mayhave other functions relating to photographing (for example, a functionto display or edit a stored image).

In the present embodiment, launch program 61 according to the presentinvention includes a photographing function program 52 shown in FIG. 19.The photographing processing means above is implemented by execution ofphotographing function program 52 by CPU 31 of game device 10. In otherwords, game device 10 according to the present embodiment stores twotypes of programs for executing photographing processing ofphotographing function program 52 and photographing application program53.

Further, in the present embodiment, though launch program 61 includesthe two types of programs of launch function program 51 andphotographing function program 52, launch function program 51 andphotographing function program 52 may be one integrated program. Launchprogram 61 (launch function program 51 and photographing functionprogram 52) is pre-installed in game device 10.

Here, a function attained by the photographing processing means isdifferent from a function enabled by execution of photographingapplication program 53 above. In the present embodiment, thephotographing processing means has only a part of functions attained byphotographing application program 53. In an alternative embodiment, thephotographing processing means may have a function not attained byphotographing application program 53.

(d) Photographing Enabling Operation Acceptance Means

In the launch acceptance state, the photographing enabling operationacceptance means accepts a photographing enabling operation for causing(a state of game device 10 to enter) a photographing enabled state(steps SA6 and SA9 which will be described later). The photographingenabled state is a state where photographing processing by thephotographing processing means above can be performed in accordance withthe photographing operation above (a state of accepting thephotographing enabling operation). In other words, in the launchacceptance state, the user can launch selected application programs 53to 57 with the first launch operation, and can also activate aphotographing function attained by the photographing processing meanswith the photographing enabling operation (FIG. 19). In the presentembodiment, the photographing enabling operation is an operation topress a prescribed button (more specifically, L button 14I or R button14J).

In the present embodiment, the photographing enabling operation is anoperation different from the first launch operation in a manner ofoperation. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first launchoperation is an input operation to touch panel 13 while thephotographing enabling operation is an operation to press a prescribedbutton (more specifically, L button 14I or R button 14J). It is notedthat the phrase “different in a manner of operation” naturally meansthat an input device to be operated is different and also means that anoperation performed on the same input device is different. In analternative embodiment, the first launch operation and the photographingenabling operation may be operations to touch different positions ontouch panel 13, may be operations to input different trails on touchpanel 13, or may be operations to press different buttons. In order toeasily and quickly activate the photographing function attained by thephotographing processing means (launch photographing function program52), the photographing enabling operation is preferably a simpleoperation such as an operation to press a prescribed button.

(e) Photographing Operation Acceptance Means

When the photographing enabling operation above is performed, thephotographing operation acceptance means accepts the photographingoperation (steps SA24 and SA25 which will be described later). In otherwords, when the photographing enabling operation is performed, the stateof game device 10 enters the photographing enabled state (FIG. 19).Thus, the user can take a photograph (cause game device 10 to performthe photographing processing) by performing the photographing operationafter the photographing enabling operation.

In the present embodiment, the launch acceptance state and thephotographing enabled state are mutually exclusive, and game device 10is alternatively in either the launch acceptance state or thephotographing enabled state. In other words, the photographing operation(in the photographing enabled state) is not accepted in the launchacceptance state while the first launch operation (in the launchacceptance state) is not accepted in the photographing enabled state. Inan alternative embodiment, however, the launch acceptance state and thephotographing enabled state do not have to be mutually exclusive, andgame device 10 can be in the launch acceptance state and thephotographing enabled state. For example, game device 10 may accept thefirst launch operation in the photographing enabled state.

(f) Second Launch Operation Acceptance Means

In the photographing enabled state above, the second launch operationacceptance means accepts a second launch operation for launchingphotographing application program 53 (steps SA24 and SA29 which will bedescribed later). Thus, in the photographing enabled state, the user canperform the second launch operation in addition to the photographingoperation. The second launch operation is an operation for launchingphotographing application program 53 directly from the photographingenabled state without returning to the launch acceptance state, and thusit is also hereinafter referred to as a “shortcut launch operation.”

In the present embodiment, in the photographing enabled state, an imagepicked-up by camera 23 or 24 is displayed on lower LCD 12 while a buttonimage (a button image 78 shown in FIG. 24) for performing the secondlaunch operation is displayed on lower LCD 12 (FIG. 24). The user canperform the second launch operation by performing an operation to touchthe button image. In order to easily and quickly launch photographingapplication program 53, the second launch operation is preferably asimple operation.

(g) Second Launch Means

When the second launch operation above is performed, the second launchmeans launches photographing application program 53 (step SA30 whichwill be described later). Thus, the user can launch photographingapplication program 53 in any of the launch acceptance state and thephotographing enabled state. Photographing application program 53 islaunched (executed) with any of the first launch operation in the launchacceptance state above and the second launch operation in thephotographing enabled state above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the launchacceptance state, the user can launch selected application programs 53to 57 with the selection launch operation (the first launch operation)and also can perform the photographing function attained by thephotographing processing means with the photographing enablingoperation. In addition, in the photographing enabled state wherephotographing based on the photographing function can be performed, theuser can launch photographing application program 53 with the shortcutlaunch operation (the second launch operation). Thus, even duringphotographing based on the photographing processing means, the user caneasily and quickly launch photographing application program 53 with theshortcut launch operation. In other words, according to the presentembodiment, even though the user desires to use a function (ofphotographing application program 53) not provided by the photographingprocessing means during photographing based on the photographingprocessing means, the user can easily and quickly use the function byperforming the shortcut launch operation.

<Data Structure>

Data used in the processing in game device 10 will now be described withreference to FIG. 20.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing main data stored in main memory 32 of gamedevice 10. As shown in FIG. 20, a program storage area 60 and a datastorage area 64 are provided in main memory 32.

In program storage area 60, various programs (application programs)executed by CPU 31 are stored. Specifically, launch program 61,photographing application program 53, other selected applicationprograms 62, and the like are stored. These programs are read from datamemory 34 for storage, memory card 28 or memory card 29 and stored inmain memory 32 at appropriate timing after start-up of game device 10(for example, at the timing of launch of a program).

Launch program 61 is a program for performing main processing in gamedevice 10. Launch program 61 is read into the main memory and executedafter start-up of game device 10. Launch program 61 includes launchfunction program 51 and photographing function program 52 above.

Launch function program 51 is a program for selecting a selectedapplication program to be launched as described above.

Photographing function program 52 is a program which is not a selectedapplication program, and it is a program for performing thephotographing processing. In the present embodiment, photographingfunction program 52 has only a part of functions attained byphotographing application program 53. In other words, in the presentembodiment, photographing function program 52 is a photographingprocessing program having a relatively simple function, andphotographing application program 53 is a relatively multifunctionalphotographing processing program. Further, photographing functionprogram 52 has a data size smaller than that of photographingapplication program 53. Since programs 52 and 53 have a common function,a part of data thereof may be stored in common. Hereinafter,photographing function program 52 having a relatively simple function isalso referred to as a “simplified photographing program 52,” andrelatively multifunctional photographing application program 53 is alsoreferred to as a “multifunctional photographing application program 53.”

The phrase “(relatively) simple function” herein encompasses bothmeaning of having (relatively) few functions and meaning of having a(relatively) low function. In other words, the phrase “(relatively)multifunctional” encompasses meaning of having (relatively) manyfunctions as well as meaning of having a (relatively) high function. Inother words, simplified photographing program 52 may have a relativelylow function (for example, photographing with a small number of pixels,a small number of types of stamps available in editing a picked-upimage, and the like) while multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 may have a relatively high function (for example,photographing with a large number of pixels, a large number of types ofstamps available in editing a picked-up image, and the like).

Further, simplified photographing program 52 may have relatively fewfunctions (for example, adjustment of exposure and white balance isimpossible, a prescribed edition operation on a picked-up image isimpossible, and the like) while multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 may have relatively many functions (for example,adjustment of exposure and white balance is possible, a prescribededition operation on a picked-up image is possible, and the like).

Further, other selected application programs 62 refer to selectedapplication programs other than multifunctional photographingapplication program 53, and include setting application program 54,communication application program 55, game application program 56, soundapplication program 57 for reproducing music or recording voice andsound described above, and the like.

The selected application programs (including multifunctionalphotographing application program 53) are stored in data memory 34 forstorage or memory card 28, and read into main memory 32 when launched.It is noted that the selected application programs may be obtained(downloaded) from external equipment through communication and stored indata memory 34 for storage.

Meanwhile, in data storage area 64, display image data 65, setting data66, and the like are stored. In addition to these data 65 and 66,various data used in the processing in game device 10 are stored in datastorage area 64.

Display image data 65 is data indicative of a display image. Here, inthe present embodiment, one of stored images taken in the past isdisplayed on the menu screen, and an image being displayed is referredto as a display image. Specifically, display image data 65 indicates afile name and the like of a display image. Though details of a method ofselecting a display image will be described later, a favorite imagewhich will be described later, an image immediately after photographing(storage) by means of simplified photographing program 52, or the likeis selected as a display image in the present embodiment.

Setting data 66 is data indicative of setting information used in eachprogram for photographing (simplified photographing program 52 andmultifunctional photographing application program 53). Setting data 66is passed as an argument to each of programs 52 and 53 at the time oflaunch of each of programs 52 and 53 for photographing. Setting data 66includes camera change data 67 and storage destination data 68.

Camera change data 67 indicates a camera for picking up an image, out ofinner camera 23 and outer camera 25. In other words, camera change data67 is data indicative of either inner camera 23 or outer camera 25.

Storage destination data 68 indicates a storage destination of apicked-up image stored as a result of the photographing operation(referred to as a stored image). In the present embodiment, a picked-upimage stored (saved) as a result of the photographing operation isstored in data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28. Thus, storagedestination data 68 indicates either data memory 34 for storage ormemory card 28.

It is noted that information such as a file name is attached to thestored image and information relating to favorite is also attached.Here, in the present embodiment, the user can set some of stored imagesas “favorite” (step SA46 which will be described later). A stored imageset as favorite is hereinafter referred to as a “favorite image”.Information indicative of “favorite” is added to data of a favoriteimage. In addition, in the present embodiment, information indicative ofany of first to third groups is added to the data of the favorite image.In other words, in the present embodiment, favorite images can bemanaged in three groups of first to third groups (FIG. 29).

<Processing Procedure>

With reference to FIGS. 21 to 30, a flow of the processing relating tothe launcher function in game device 10 will now be described. FIG. 21is a main flowchart showing the flow of the launch processing in gamedevice 10. When power of game device 10 is turned on by pressing powerbutton 14F, CPU 31 of game device 10 initializes main memory 32 or thelike, and then starts execution of launch program 61. Thus, processingin subsequent steps SA1 to SA13 is started.

In step SA1, CPU 31 determines whether game device 10 is started up forthe first time or not. Determination in step SA1 can be made, forexample, by storing time and date of previous start-up of game device10. In other words, if time and date of previous start-up have beenstored, it can be determined that the present start-up of game device 10is not start-up for the first time. On the other hand, if time and dateof the previous start-up have not been stored, it can be determined thatthe present start-up of game device 10 is start-up for the first time.

When a result of determination in step SA1 indicates Yes, the processingin step SA2 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA1 indicates No, the processing in step SA2 isskipped and the processing in step SA3 is performed.

In step SA2, CPU 31 performs photographing leading processing. Thephotographing leading processing is processing for leading the user toexperience a photographing operation with a simple function. In otherwords, in the photographing leading processing, the user is caused toselect whether or not to perform photographing processing usingsimplified photographing program 52 above. When the user selects toperform the photographing processing, the user is caused to experience asimple photographing operation based on simplified photographing program52 above. Details of the photographing leading processing will bedescribed later with reference to FIG. 27. CPU 31 performs theprocessing in step SA3 following step SA2.

In step SA3, CPU 31 selects a display image from among favorite imagesin a random manner. Specifically, CPU 31 selects one favorite image fromamong favorite images stored in data memory 34 for storage in a randommanner, and causes main memory 32 to store data indicative ofinformation (for example, a file name) identifying the selected favoriteimage as display image data 65. Subsequent to step SA3, the processingin step SA4 is performed.

In step SA4, CPU 31 launches launch function program 51. In other words,CPU 31 reads launch function program 51 from data memory 34 for storage,causes main memory 32 to store the program, and executes launch functionprogram 51. The processing in step SA5 and subsequent steps is performedas a result of execution of launch function program 51 by CPU 31.Further, in the present embodiment, CPU 31 reads simplifiedphotographing program 52 into main memory 32 together with launchfunction program 51 at the timing of reading of launch function program51. In an alternative embodiment, simplified photographing program 52may be read into main memory 32 at the timing of execution of simplifiedphotographing processing (step SA11) which will be described later.Subsequent to step SA4, the processing in step SA5 is performed.

In step SA5, CPU 31 has a menu screen displayed. The menu screen is ascreen (an image) for causing the user to select a selected applicationprogram to be launched from among the selected application programs. Thelaunch acceptance state shown in FIG. 19 is a state where the menuscreen is displayed. The menu screen in the present embodiment will bedescribed hereinafter with reference to FIG. 23.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the menu screen. As shown inFIG. 23, in step SA5, an image for causing the user to select a selectedapplication program to be executed is displayed on lower LCD 12.Specifically, icon images 71 a to 71 c, a scroll bar 72, a marker 73,and scroll buttons 74 a and 74 b are displayed on lower LCD 12.

Icon image 71 is an image representing a selected application program.Icon image 71 is an icon for launching an application program in memorycard 29. When memory card 29 is not attached, an icon indicating absenceof a card is displayed together with a message that “card is notattached.”

The user can launch a selected application program indicated by atouched icon image, by performing an operation to touch icon image 71displayed at a center of the screen (in the left-right direction) as thefirst launch operation above.

In the present embodiment, a prescribed number of icon images (four iconimages in FIG. 23) among icon images corresponding to a plurality ofapplication programs respectively are displayed on the screen. The(types of) icon images being displayed are changed in accordance with anoperation for scrolling the screen. In other words, though icon imagesindicating selected application programs other than the displayedselected application programs are not shown in FIG. 23, the icon imagesare displayed by scrolling the screen on lower LCD 12.

The screen of lower LCD 12 can be scrolled by an operation to touch anicon image other than the icon image displayed at the center of thescreen, or by an operation to touch marker 73 or scroll button 74 a or74 b. In other words, when the user touches the icon image (icon image71 a or 71 c in FIG. 23) other than the icon image displayed at thecenter of the screen, the screen of lower LCD 12 is scrolled and thetouched icon image is displayed at the center of the screen.Alternatively, the user can move marker 73 along scroll bar 72 byperforming an operation to move a touched position along scroll bar 72to the right and left while touching marker 73, thereby scrolling thescreen of lower LCD 12 in accordance with movement of marker 73.Alternatively, the screen of lower LCD 12 can be scrolled to the left byan operation to touch scroll button 74 a on the left of scroll bar 72,and the screen of lower LCD 12 can be scrolled to the right by anoperation to touch scroll button 74 b on the right of scroll bar 72.

As described above, in the state where the menu screen is displayed, theuser can change the icon image displayed at the center of the screen byperforming the operation to scroll the screen, and also can launch theselected application program indicated by the icon image with theoperation to touch the icon image displayed at the center of the screen.

In the present embodiment, all of the plurality of selected applicationprograms are not concurrently displayed but some of the plurality ofselected application programs are displayed in a list and replaced withthe rest by scrolling or the like so that the rest is in turn displayed.Here, in an alternative embodiment, all of the plurality of selectedapplication programs may concurrently be displayed. Alternatively, (iconimages of) selected application programs displayed in a list may bedisplayed in a line as in the present embodiment or may be displayed inmatrix of 2×2 or more.

Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 23, in step SA5, a display image 75 andphotographing button images 76 a and 76 b are displayed on upper LCD 22.Display image 75 is a stored image shown based on display image data 65stored in main memory 32 and selected in step SA3 or the like. In thismanner, in the present embodiment, an image taken in the past isdisplayed on the menu screen. Thus, a user using game device 10 for thefirst time is made aware that game device 10 has the photographingfunction. Further, as the menu screen of game device 10 is different foreach user (for each information processing device), the menu screen canhave individuality.

As display image 75 is randomly selected in step SA3, the user cannotdesignate as display image 75, an arbitrary image from among imagesstored in data memory 34 for storage. As will be described later, thoughmultifunctional photographing application program 53 has a function toset a favorite image, the launch function program and simplifiedphotographing program 52 do not have a function to set a favorite image.Further, photographing button images 76 a and 76 b are images indicatingan operation to make transition to a state where photographing based onsimplified photographing program 52 can be performed (the photographingenabled state shown in FIG. 19), that is, the photographing enablingoperation above. Thus, in the present embodiment, by displaying theoperation to make transition to the photographing enabled state on themenu screen (the launch acceptance state), it can clearly be presentedto the user that photographing based on simplified photographing program52 can be performed through the menu screen (without selecting aselected application program).

As shown in FIG. 23, the photographing enabling operation is typicallyan operation to press L button 14I or R button 14J. Therefore, the usercan set the state where photographing based on simplified photographingprogram 52 can be performed by pressing a button (L button 14I or Rbutton 14J) once in the launch acceptance state.

In the present embodiment, except for start-up for the first time (Yesin step SA1), the menu screen is initially displayed after the start-upof game device 10. In other words, in the present embodiment, gamedevice 10 sets a first state after the start-up of game device 10 to thelaunch acceptance state. Therefore, the user can launch simplifiedphotographing program 52 immediately after start-up.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 21, subsequentto step SA5, the processing in step SA6 is performed. In step SA6, CPU31 accepts an input to each input device. In other words, CPU 31 obtainsoperation data from operation button group 14 and obtains input positiondata from touch panel 13. The obtained operation data and input positiondata are stored in main memory 32. In the launch acceptance state, theprocessing in step SA6 is performed once in a prescribed time period(for example, one frame time ( 1/60 sec.)). Subsequent to step SA6,processing in step SA7 is performed.

In step SA7, CPU 31 determines whether an operation to scroll the screenof lower LCD 12 has been performed or not. Determination in step SA7 canbe made by referring to the input position data stored in main memory 32in step SA6. In other words, in the determination processing in stepSA7, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where marker 73or scroll button 74 a or 74 b is displayed has been provided or not.

When a result of determination in step SA7 indicates Yes, processing instep SA8 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA7 indicates No, processing in step SA9 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SA8, CPU 31 scrolls display of the icon images (the screen oflower LCD 12). In other words, when a touch input of scroll button 74 ais provided, the icon images are scrolled to the left, and when a touchinput of scroll button 74 b is provided, the icon images are scrolled tothe right. Thus, an icon image that has not been displayed on the screenof lower LCD 12 can be displayed. Subsequent to step SA8, the processingin step SA5 is performed again.

Meanwhile, in step SA9, CPU 31 determines whether the photographingenabling operation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA9can be made by referring to the operation data stored in main memory 32in step SA6. In other words, in the determination processing in stepSA9, CPU 31 determines whether L button 14I or R button 14J has beenpressed or not.

When a result of determination in step SA9 indicates Yes, processing instep SA10 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA9 indicates No, processing in step SA11 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SA10, CPU 31 performs the simplified photographing processing.The simplified photographing processing is processing for causing theuser to perform photographing with a simple function based on simplifiedphotographing program 52. Details of the simplified photographingprocessing will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 22.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a flow of the simplified photographingprocessing (step SA10) shown in FIG. 21. In input image generationprocessing, initially in step SA21, CPU 31 launches simplifiedphotographing program 52. In the present embodiment, since simplifiedphotographing program 52 has been read into main memory 32 together withlaunch function program 51, CPU 31 starts execution of simplifiedphotographing program 52. Here, data 67 and 68 included in setting data66 stored in main memory 32 are input (set) as arguments for simplifiedphotographing program 52. Processing in steps SA22 to SA28 subsequent tostep SA21 is performed by using simplified photographing program 52 (byexecuting simplified photographing program 52).

In step SA22, CPU 31 obtains data of an image picked-up by inner camera23 or outer camera 25. In the present embodiment, an image is picked-upby only any one of cameras 23 and 25, and CPU 31 obtains image data onlyfrom one camera. Which camera out of cameras 23 and 25 is used for imagepick-up is determined in accordance with content of camera change data67 that was passed as the argument at the time of launch of simplifiedphotographing program 52 (step SA21). Subsequent to step SA22,processing in step SA23 is performed.

In step SA23, CPU 31 performs display processing. In step SA23 in thephotographing enabled state, an image picked-up by camera 23 or 25 orthe like is displayed. An image displayed in the photographing enabledstate will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 24.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the image displayed in thephotographing enabled state. As shown in FIG. 24, in step SA23, an image77 picked-up by camera 23 or 24 that was obtained in step SA22 isdisplayed on lower LCD 12. The processing in steps SA22 and SA23 isrepeatedly performed once in a prescribed time period (for example, 1/60sec.). By repeatedly performing the processing in these steps SA22 andSA23, a real-time image picked-up by camera 23 or 24 is displayed onlower LCD 12. In an alternative embodiment, the real-time image may bedisplayed on upper LCD 22. Here, an image stored by performing thephotographing operation may also be displayed on lower LCD 12.

In addition, a button image 78 for performing an operation for executingmultifunctional photographing application program 53 (the second launchoperation above) is displayed on lower LCD 12. Unlike the icon imagesdisplayed on the menu screen, button image 78 is displayed in a fixedmanner at a prescribed position (at an upper right position in FIG. 24)on the screen. Though details will be described later, the user caneasily make transition from a state of execution of simplifiedphotographing program 52 to a state of execution of multifunctionalphotographing application program 53 by pressing button image 78.

Further, as in FIG. 23, display image 75 and photographing button images76 a and 76 b are displayed on upper LCD 22. In the present embodiment,as in the photographing enabling operation, the photographing operationis an operation to press L button 14I or R button 14J (see photographingbutton images 76 a and 76 b shown in FIG. 24). In an alternativeembodiment, the photographing operation may not be the same as thephotographing enabling operation. For example, a button image forperforming the photographing operation may be displayed on lower LCD 12and an operation to touch the button image may serve as thephotographing operation. Further, game device 10 may accept both theoperation to press L button 14I or R button 14J and the operation totouch the button image as the photographing operation.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 22, subsequentto step SA23, processing in step SA24 is performed. In step SA24, CPU 31accepts an input to each input device. The processing in step SA24 isthe same as the processing in step SA6 above. Subsequent to step SA24,processing in step SA25 is performed.

In step SA25, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing operation hasbeen performed or not. Determination in step SA25 can be made byreferring to operation data stored in main memory 32 in step SA24. Inthe present embodiment, since the first launch operation and thephotographing operation are performed by performing the same operation,the processing in step SA25 can be performed as in step SA9.

When a result of determination in step SA25 indicates Yes, processing instep SA26 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA25 indicates No, processing in step SA29 whichwill be described later is performed.

An image displayed subsequent to the photographing operation will bedescribed hereinafter with reference to FIG. 25.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed after thephotographing operation is performed. As shown in FIG. 25, when theresult of determination in step SA25 indicates Yes, the picked up imageobtained in step SA22 or image 77 picked up by camera 23 or 24 isdisplayed on lower LCD 12. In addition, a button image (“store”) forperforming an operation to store a taken, picked-up image and a buttonimage (“capture again”) for performing an operation for photographingagain are displayed in addition to button image 78 for performing anoperation to execute multifunctional photographing application program53 (the second launch operation above) on lower LCD 12.

In addition, as in FIG. 23, display image 75 as well as photographingbutton images 76 a and 76 b are displayed on upper LCD 22. Referringback to the description in connection with FIG. 22, in step SA26, CPU 31determines whether an operation for storage has been performed or not.Determination in step SA26 can be made by referring to operation datastored in main memory 32 in step SA24 as in step SA25.

When a result of determination in step SA26 indicates Yes (when “store”in FIG. 25 is touched), processing in step SA27 is performed. On theother hand, when the result of determination in step SA26 indicates No(when “capture again” in FIG. 25 is touched), processing in step SA22described above is performed again. It is noted that determination instep SA26 may be skipped so that the process may proceed to step SA27directly from step SA25.

In step SA27, CPU 31 has a picked-up image stored. In other words, CPU31 causes data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28 to store (save)the picked-up image obtained in step SA22. A storage destination of thepicked-up image is determined in accordance with content of storagedestination data 68 that was passed as the argument at the time oflaunch of simplified photographing program 52 (step SA21). It is notedthat the storage destination of the picked-up image can be changed bythe user in the multifunctional photographing processing based onmultifunctional photographing application program 53 which will bedescribed later. Subsequent to step SA27, processing in step SA28 isperformed.

In step SA28, CPU 31 selects the stored image stored in immediatelypreceding step SA27 as a display image. Specifically, CPU 31 causes mainmemory 32 to store as display image data 65, data indicative of thestored image that was stored in immediately preceding step SA27. Afterthe processing in step SA28, CPU 31 ends execution of simplifiedphotographing program 52 and ends the simplified photographingprocessing. Then, the processing in step SA4 shown in FIG. 21 isperformed again.

An image displayed subsequent to the simplified photographing processingwill be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 26.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed after thesimplified photographing processing. As shown in FIG. 26, after thesimplified photographing processing, the picked-up image obtained in thesimplified photographing processing is displayed on upper LCD 22 as newdisplay image 75. Namely, comparing the image shown in FIG. 22 with theimage shown in FIG. 26, it can be seen that the display image displayedon upper LCD 22 has been updated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in response to thephotographing operation performed in the photographing enabled state(the simplified photographing processing), the simplified photographingprocessing ends, and transition from the photographing enabled state tothe launch acceptance state is made. In other words, when the userstores one taken image in the simplified photographing processing, ascreen display on game device 10 returns to the menu screen, and thuseven a novice user who has not read an instruction manual or the likecan naturally return to the launch acceptance state (in an example wherethe process proceeds to step SA27 from step SA25, the screen returns tothe menu screen when the user performs one photographing operation inthe simplified photographing processing). Further, in the presentembodiment, since the photographing enabling operation and thephotographing operation are performed by performing the same operation,transition from the launch acceptance state to the photographing enabledstate and transition from the photographing enabled state to the launchacceptance state can be made by performing the same operation. Thus,even if the user accidentally presses L button 14I or R button 14J orpresses a button without fully understanding a manner of operation toresult in transition to the photographing enabled state, the user canreturn to the original state (the launch acceptance state) by pressingthe same button. Thus, game device 10 which is easy for the novice userto operate can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the state ofgame device 10 makes transition to the launch acceptance state after thephotographing operation. Thus, transition to the launch acceptance stateis made without display of the image stored in the processing in stepSA26 above based on simplified photographing program 52. Here, in thepresent embodiment, in the processing in step SA27, CPU 31 sets theimage stored in the processing in step SA26 as a display image aftertransition to the launch acceptance state. Thus, the stored image takenbased on simplified photographing program 52 is displayed as the displayimage immediately after transition to the launch acceptance state.Therefore, according to the present embodiment, though transition to thelaunch acceptance state is made as a result of the photographingoperation, the user can quickly check the image taken based onsimplified photographing program 52.

Meanwhile, in step SA29, CPU 31 determines whether the second launchoperation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA29 can bemade by referring to input position data stored in main memory 32 instep SA24. In other words, in the determination processing in step SA29,CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where button image78 for performing the second launch operation is displayed has beenprovided or not. When a result of determination in step SA29 indicatesYes, the multifunctional photographing processing which will bedescribed later (FIG. 30) is performed. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SA29 indicates No, the processing instep SA22 is performed again. This is the end of the description of thesimplified photographing processing shown in FIG. 22.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 21, in stepSA11, CPU 31 determines whether the first launch operation has beenperformed or not. Determination in step SA11 can be made by referring tothe input position data stored in main memory 32 in step SA6. In otherwords, in the determination processing in step SA11, CPU 31 determineswhether an input to touch an area where the icon image is displayed hasbeen provided or not. When a result of determination in step SA11indicates Yes, processing in step SA12 is performed. On the other hand,when the result of determination in step SA11 indicates No, processingin step SA13 which will be described later is performed.

In step SA12, CPU 31 performs processing for executing a selectedapplication program. In other words, CPU 31 reads a selected applicationprogram corresponding to the icon image selected in the first launchoperation into main memory 32, and executes the selected applicationprogram. Thus, the selected application program is started and the usercan utilize the selected application program. The processing in stepSA12 ends with the end of the selected application program, and theprocessing in step SA3 is performed again subsequent to step SA12.

Here, a case where multifunctional photographing application program 53is executed as the selected application program in step SA12 above willbe described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a flow ofprocessing based on multifunctional photographing application program 53(the multifunctional photographing processing).

In the multifunctional photographing processing, initially in step SA30,CPU 31 launches multifunctional photographing application program 53. Inother words, CPU 31 reads multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 into main memory 32 and starts execution thereof. Here, data67 and 68 included in setting data 66 stored in main memory 32 are input(set) as arguments for simplified photographing program 52. Subsequentto step SA30, processing in step SA31 is performed. Processing in stepsSA31 to SA39 subsequent to step SA30 is performed by usingmultifunctional photographing application program 53 (by executingmultifunctional photographing application program 53).

In step SA31, CPU 31 performs display processing. Here, in the presentembodiment, in the multifunctional photographing processing, there are aphotographing mode for performing photographing using the image pick-upmeans and a photograph display mode for displaying an image (a storedimage) taken in the past. In the display processing in step SA31, animage for causing the user to select either one of the two modes (thephotograph display mode and the photographing mode) in themultifunctional photographing processing, and an image for setting astorage destination of a picked-up image to be stored by performing thephotographing operation are displayed on at least one of LCDs 12 and 22.An image displayed in display processing in step SSA31 will be describedhereinafter with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in themultifunctional photographing processing. As shown in FIG. 31, in stepSA31, a button image 101 for indicating selection of the photographingmode and a button image 102 for indicating selection of the photographdisplay mode are displayed on lower LCD 12. In addition, button image101 includes indication of the number of shootings available (forexample, xx remaining) in accordance with a currently remaining capacityof the storage destination of taken images. Moreover, button image 102includes indication of the current number of picked up images (forexample, xx in total) that have already been stored in the storagedestination of taken images. Further, button images 103 and 104indicating change of the storage destination of picked up images arealso displayed on lower LCD 12. When button image 103 is touched, anon-volatile memory embedded in the main body (embedded memory; datamemory 34 for storage) is set to the selected state, and when buttonimage 104 is touched, a removable memory card (card memory; memory card28) is set to the selected state. When the embedded memory is selected,a manner of display of button image 103 is varied, and when the cardmemory is selected, a manner of display of button image 104 is varied.When button image 101 or 102 is touched, transition to the photographingmode or the photograph display mode is made at that timing of touching.

Namely, the present embodiment is configured such that the user canselect any of the embedded memory and the card memory at the time oflaunch of the multifunctional photographing application, and selectionis not yet fixed as of the timing of selection. The present embodimentis configured such that the user can select any of the photographingmode and the photograph display mode on the same screen. Then, selectionbetween the embedded memory and the card memory is fixed at the timingof selection between the photographing mode and the photograph displaymode. Namely, when the photographing mode is selected while the embeddedmemory is selected, the photographing mode is launched and images thatwill be taken in the subsequent photographing mode are stored in theembedded memory. Alternatively, when the photographing mode is selectedwhile the card memory is selected, the photographing mode is launchedand images that will be taken in the subsequent photographing mode arestored in the card memory. Alternatively, when the photograph displaymode is selected while the embedded memory is selected, the photographdisplay mode is launched and a taken image stored in the embedded memoryis displayed in the subsequent photograph display mode. Alternatively,when the photograph display mode is selected while the card memory isselected, the photograph display mode is launched and a taken imagestored in the card memory is displayed in the subsequent photographdisplay mode.

In addition, various button images 105 to 107 are displayed on the lowerLCD. An end button 105 is a button image for performing an operation toend the multifunctional photographing processing. Namely, when a touchinput of end button 105 is made, the multifunctional photographingprocessing ends and the processing by CPU 31 returns to the processingin step SA4.

A calendar button 106 is a button image for performing an operation tolaunch a calendar function which will be described later. Namely, when atouch input of calendar button 106 is made, the calendar function whichwill be described later is performed. An others button 107 is a buttonimage for performing an operation for making various types of setting orthe like.

In step SA32, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. Processingin step SA32 is the same as the processing in step SA6 above. Subsequentto step SA32, processing in step SA33 is performed.

In step SA33, CPU 31 determines whether the photograph display mode hasbeen selected or not. Determination in step SA33 can be made byreferring to input position data stored in main memory 32 in step SA32.In other words, in the determination processing in step SA33, CPU 31determines whether an input to touch an area where image 102 indicatingthe photograph display mode is displayed has been provided or not asshown in FIG. 31.

When a result of determination in step SA33 indicates Yes, processing instep SA34 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA33 indicates No, processing in step SA35 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SA34, CPU 31 performs processing to be performed in thephotograph display mode (photograph display mode processing). Details ofthe photograph display mode processing will be described hereinafterwith reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of the photograph display modeprocessing (step SA34) shown in FIG. 30. In the photograph display modeprocessing, initially in step SA41, CPU 31 performs display processing.In step SA41 in the photograph display mode, a stored image taken in thepast or the like is displayed. An image displayed in the photographdisplay mode will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in thephotograph display mode. As shown in FIG. 33, in step SA41, a pluralityof (three in the drawing) stored images 181 to 183, a cursor 184, scrollbuttons 185 and 186, a setting button 187, and an end button 188 aredisplayed on lower LCD 12.

In FIG. 33, stored images 181 to 183 are (some of) stored images thatare stored in data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28. Stored image182 surrounded by cursor 184 is an image currently selected by cursor184. Scroll buttons 185 and 186 are buttons for scrolling stored images181 to 183 to the right and left. In other words, when a touch input ofscroll button 185 on the right of the screen is made, stored images 181to 183 are scrolled to the right, and when a touch input of scrollbutton 186 on the left of the screen is made, stored images 181 to 183are scrolled to the left. As a result of scroll of the stored images tothe right or left, the stored image displayed on lower LCD 12 is changedand the stored image selected by cursor 184 is changed.

In the present embodiment, in the photograph display mode, a picked-upimage stored in any of the simplified photographing processing and themultifunctional photographing processing is displayed. In the presentembodiment, a stored image stored in the simplified photographingprocessing and a stored image stored in the multifunctionalphotographing processing are stored without distinction. Specifically, arule for attaching a file name to a data file of the stored image (forexample, attaching a file name using time and date of photographing, atotal number of images taken by game device 10, and the like) is thesame for any stored image. Since the stored images stored in anyphotographing processing are stored without distinction, stored imagesstored in any photographing processing can both be displayed in thephotograph display mode.

Setting button 187 is a button image for performing an operation fornewly setting the stored image selected by cursor 184 as a favoriteimage. In other words, when a touch input of setting button 187 is made,the stored image selected by cursor 184 is set as a favorite image.

End button 188 is a button image for performing an operation for endingthe photograph display mode. In other words, when a touch input of endbutton 188 is made, the photograph display mode ends and the processingby CPU 31 returns to the processing in step SA31.

In step SA41, some information may or may not be displayed on upper LCD22. In the present embodiment, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display thestored image selected with cursor 184.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 32, subsequentto step SA41, processing in step SA42 is performed. In step SA42, CPU 31accepts an input to each input device. The processing in step SA42 isthe same as the processing in step SA6 above. Subsequent to step SA42,processing in step SA43 is performed.

In step SA43, CPU 31 determines whether an operation to scroll thestored image displayed on lower LCD 12 has been performed or not.Determination in step SA43 can be made by referring to input positiondata stored in main memory 32 in step SA42. In other words, in thedetermination processing in step SA43, CPU 31 determines whether aninput to touch an area where scroll button 185 or 186 is displayed hasbeen provided or not.

When a result of determination in step SA43 indicates Yes, processing instep SA44 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA43 indicates No, processing in step SA45 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SA44, CPU 31 scrolls the stored image displayed on lower LCD 12.In other words, when a touch input of scroll button 185 is made, CPU 31scrolls the stored image to the right, and when a touch input of scrollbutton 186 is made, CPU 31 scrolls the stored image to the left. Thus, astored image that has not been displayed so far on the screen of lowerLCD 12 is displayed. Subsequent to step SA44, the processing in stepSA41 above is performed again.

Meanwhile, in step SA45, CPU 31 determines whether an operation forsetting a stored image as a favorite image has been performed or not.Determination in step SA45 can be made by referring to the inputposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SA42. In other words, inthe determination processing in step SA45, CPU 31 determines whether aninput to touch an area where setting button 187 is displayed has beenprovided or not. When a result of determination in step SA45 indicatesYes, processing in step SA46 is performed. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SA45 indicates No, the processing instep SA41 above is performed again.

In step SA46, CPU 31 sets a stored image currently selected with cursor184 as a favorite image. Specifically, CPU 31 adds informationindicative of the favorite image to data of the stored image stored indata memory 34 for storage or memory card 28. In addition, in thepresent embodiment, in step SA46, CPU 31 causes the user to select towhich of the first to third groups the stored image should belong.Therefore, information indicative of a group selected by the user amongthe first to third groups is added to the data of the stored imageabove. Subsequent to step SA46 above, processing in step SA47 isperformed.

In step SA47, CPU 31 determines whether to end the photograph displaymode or not. Determination in step SA47 can be made by referring to theinput position data stored in main memory 32 in step SA42. In otherwords, in the determination processing in step SA47, CPU 31 determineswhether an input to touch an area where end button 188 is displayed hasbeen provided or not. When a result of determination in step SA47indicates Yes, CPU 31 ends the photograph display mode processing shownin FIG. 32. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSA47 indicates No, the processing in step SA41 above is performed again.

In the photograph display mode described above, the user can view thestored images taken in the past and also can set the stored image as afavorite image. As described above, in step SA3 above, the display imagedisplayed on the menu screen (display image 75 shown in FIG. 23) isselected from among favorite images. Therefore, the user can select animage to be displayed as a display image by himself or herself.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 30, when theprocessing in step SA34 above ends, the processing in step SA31 isperformed again. Therefore, when the photograph display mode ends, thescreen for causing the user to select any of the photograph display modeand the photographing mode is displayed again (step SA31).

Meanwhile, in step SA35, CPU 31 determines whether the photographingmode has been selected or not. Determination in step SA35 can be made byreferring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in stepSA32. In other words, in the determination processing in step SA35, CPU31 determines whether an input to touch an area where image 101indicating the photographing mode is displayed has been provided or not.When a result of determination in step SA35 indicates Yes, processing instep SA36 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SA35 indicates No, processing in step SA37 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SA36, CPU 31 performs processing to be performed in thephotographing mode (photographing mode processing). Details of thephotographing mode processing will be described hereinafter withreference to FIG. 34.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a flow of the photographing modeprocessing (step SA36) shown in FIG. 32. In the photographing modeprocessing, initially in step SA50, CPU 31 obtains data of an imagepicked-up by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. Processing in step SA50is the same as the processing in step SA22 above (FIG. 22). Subsequentto step SA50, processing in step SA51 is performed.

In step SA51, CPU 31 performs display processing. In step SA51 in thephotographing mode, the image picked-up by camera 23 or 24 or the likeis displayed. An image displayed in the photographing mode will bedescribed hereinafter with reference to FIG. 35( a).

FIG. 35( a) is a diagram showing an example of the image displayed inthe photographing mode. As shown in FIG. 35( a), in step SA51, inaddition to picked-up image 77 as in FIG. 24, various buttons 91 to 99are displayed on lower LCD 12. Each of buttons 91 to 99 is an image forgiving an instruction to game device 10 in response to the user's touchinput to a position on the image. Buttons 91 to 99 will be describedhereinafter.

A photographing button 91 is a button image for performing thephotographing operation. In other words, when a touch input ofphotographing button 91 is made, processing for storing a picked-upimage is performed. It is noted that photographing button 91 ispreferably displayed substantially at a center of lower housing 11 (inthe left-right direction) such that the user can easily operatephotographing button 91 with either a right hand or a left hand.

A camera change button 92 is an image for performing a camera changeoperation. In other words, when a touch input of camera change button 92is made, a camera for picking up an image is changed between innercamera 23 and outer camera 25.

An end button 93 is a button image for performing an operation forending the photographing mode. In other words, when a touch input of endbutton 93 is made, the photographing mode ends and the processing by CPU31 returns to the processing in step SA31.

Each of buttons 94 to 99 is a button image for giving an instruction inedition processing. A pen mode button 94, an eraser mode button 95, anda stamp mode button 96 are button images for performing an operation forchanging an edition mode. Here, in the present embodiment, three modesof a pen mode, a stamp mode and an eraser mode are prepared in advance.In the pen mode, an image of an input trail input to touch panel 13 canbe added to a picked-up image. In the stamp mode, a stamp image preparedin advance can be added to a picked-up image. In the eraser mode, animage added in the pen mode or the stamp mode can be erased. Pen modebutton 94 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editionmode to the pen mode. Eraser mode button 95 is an image for giving aninstruction to change the edition mode to the eraser mode. Stamp modebutton 96 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editionmode to the stamp mode.

A thickness change button 97 is an image for giving an instruction tochange a thickness of a line to be input in the pen mode. A color changebutton 98 is an image for giving an instruction to change a color of aline to be input in the pen mode. An all erase button 99 is an image forgiving an instruction to erase all images added in the pen mode or thestamp mode.

By giving an instruction using each of buttons 94 to 99 above, the usercan input an image over the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12(in a manner superimposed on the picked-up image). It is noted that FIG.35( a) shows an image in the case where there is no image input by theuser in the edition processing which will be described later. Further,in the present embodiment, an image for explaining a manner of operationin the photographing mode to the user is displayed on upper LCD 22.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 34, in stepSA52, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. Processing in stepSA52 is the same as the processing in step SA6 above. Subsequent to stepSA52, processing in step SA33 is performed.

In step SA53, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing operation hasbeen performed or not. Determination in step SA53 can be made byreferring to operation data and input position data stored in mainmemory 32 in step SA52. In other words, in the determination processingin step SA53, CPU 31 determines whether L button 14I or R button 14J hasbeen pressed or not or whether an input to touch an area wherephotographing button 91 is displayed has been provided or not.

Thus, in the multifunctional photographing processing, the user canperform an operation the same as the photographing operation in thesimplified photographing processing (the operation of pressing L button14I or R button 14J) as the photographing operation and can perform anoperation to touch photographing button 91 as the photographingoperation. When a result of determination in step SA53 indicates Yes,processing in step SA54 is performed. On the other hand, when the resultof determination in step SA53 indicates No, processing in step SA55which will be described later is performed.

As described in connection with step SA53 above, in the presentembodiment, the photographing processing function attained in common bysimplified photographing program 52 and multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 is performed by performing the same operation(the operation of pressing L button 14I or R button 14J). Since the samefunction is attained by the same operation in spite of change of aprogram, a user-friendly operation system can be provided.

It is noted that the phrase “the function attained in common isperformed by performing the same operation” means that a certainidentical function should only be performed by performing a certainoperation in both of simplified photographing program 52 andmultifunctional photographing application program 53, and it does notintend to exclude such meaning that the function is attained also byperforming an operation different from the certain operation in any oneof simplified photographing program 52 and multifunctional photographingapplication program 53. In other words, as in the present embodiment, inmultifunctional photographing application program 53, the photographingprocessing may be performed by performing the operation to touchphotographing button 91 other than the operation to press L button 14Ior R button 14J.

In step SA54, CPU 31 has a picked-up image stored. Processing in stepSA54 is the same as the processing in step SA26 in the simplifiedphotographing processing above. Therefore, in the present embodiment,processing for storing a picked-up image is similarly performed in thesimplified photographing processing and the multifunctionalphotographing processing. Specifically, a method of deciding a cameraused for image pick-up and a method of deciding a storage destination inthe simplified photographing processing are the same as those in themultifunctional photographing processing. Subsequent to step SA54,processing in step SA59 which will be described later is performed.

In step SA55, CPU 31 determines whether the camera change operation hasbeen performed or not. Determination in step SA55 can be made byreferring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in stepSA52. In other words, in the determination processing in step SA55, CPU31 determines whether an input to touch an area where camera changebutton 92 is displayed has been provided or not. When a result ofdetermination in step SA55 indicates Yes, processing in step SA56 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSA55 indicates No, processing in step SA57 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SA56, CPU 31 changes the camera for picking up an image. Inother words, when the camera for picking up an image is inner camera 23,CPU 31 changes the camera for picking up an image to outer camera 25.When the camera for picking up an image is outer camera 25, CPU 31changes the camera for picking up an image to inner camera 23.Specifically, CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop an operation to one ofcameras 23 and 25 that is picking up an image, and gives an instructionto perform image pick-up to the other camera. If the processing in stepSA56 above is performed, in step SA50 that will subsequently beperformed, data of an image picked-up by the camera after the change isobtained by CPU 31, and in subsequent step SA51, the image picked-up bythe camera after the change is displayed on lower LCD 12. Further, instep SA56, CPU 31 causes main memory 32 to store data indicative of thecamera after the change as camera change data 67. Thus, when themultifunctional photographing processing is performed next time and whenthe simplified photographing processing is performed next time, imagepick-up will be performed by the camera after the change. Subsequent tostep SA56, processing in step SA59 which will be described later isperformed.

In step SA57, CPU 31 determines whether an edition operation has beenperformed or not. Determination in step SA57 can be made by referring tothe input position data stored in main memory 32 in step SA52. In otherwords, in the determination processing in step SA57, CPU 31 determineswhether an input to touch an area where any of buttons 94 to 99 isdisplayed or an area where picked-up image 77 is displayed has beenprovided or not. When a result of determination in step SA57 indicatesYes, processing in step SA58 is performed. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SA57 indicates No, the processing instep SA59 which will be described later is performed.

In step SA58, CPU 31 performs various types of edition processing inaccordance with a touch input made by the user. For example, when any ofbuttons 94 to 98 is touched, CPU 31 changes setting (the edition modeand the setting relating to a thickness or a color of a line) inaccordance with a touched button. When the area of picked-up image 77 istouched, CPU 31 performs processing in accordance with the edition modewith respect to a touched position. In other words, when the editionmode is set to the pen mode, an image of trail of touch input is addedto picked-up image 77. When the edition mode is set to the stamp mode, astamp image prepared in advance is added to picked-up image 77 at thetouched position. When the edition mode is set to the eraser mode, theimage added at the touched position in the pen mode or the stamp mode iserased. When all erase button 99 is touched, all images added topicked-up image 77 in the pen mode or the stamp mode are erased. Detailsof the processing in accordance with the edition mode in step SA58 willbe described later.

Subsequent to step SA58 above, the processing in step SA59 is performed.

In step SA59, CPU 31 determines whether to end the photographing mode ornot. Determination in step SA59 can be made by referring to the inputposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SA452. In other words, inthe determination processing in step SA59, CPU 31 determines whether aninput to touch an area where end button 93 is displayed has beenprovided or not. When a result in step SA59 indicates Yes, CPU 31 endsthe photographing mode processing shown in FIG. 34. On the other hand,when the result of determination in step SA59 indicates No, theprocessing in step SA50 above is performed again. This is the end of thedescription of the photographing mode processing shown in FIG. 34.

Multifunctional photographing application program 53 described above mayhave a function to subject picked-up image 77 to other types of editionoperations or an operation for providing effect, in addition to theedition function described above. In such a case, the menu screen forallowing the user to select a desired function is preferably displayedprior to the display processing in step SA51. An example of the menuscreen displayed in the photographing mode will be described hereinafterwith reference to FIG. 35( b).

FIG. 35( b) is a diagram showing an example of the menu screen displayedin the photographing mode. As shown in FIG. 35( b), the menu screenincluding a button group 150 and various buttons 152, 154, 156, and 158in addition to picked-up image 77 as in FIG. 24 is displayed on lowerLCD 12. Each icon image included in button group 150 is an image forinstructing game device 10 to select a corresponding function includedin multifunctional photographing application program 53. Each button152, 154, 156, and 158 will be described hereinafter.

Scroll buttons 152 and 154 are button images for selecting each iconimage included in button group 150. Namely, when a touch input of scrollbutton 152 or 154 is made, an icon image in a selected (active) stateamong the icon images included in button group 150 is successivelychanged.

An end button 156 is a button image for performing an operation to endthe photographing mode. Namely, when a touch input of end button 152 ismade, the photographing mode ends and the processing by CPU 31 returnsto the processing in step SA31.

A start button 158 is a button image for performing an operation toindicate execution of a function selected from among the functionsincluded in the multifunctional photographing application program.Namely, when a touch input of start button 158 subsequent to selectionof any icon image included in button group 150 is made, the functioncorresponding to the selected icon image is performed.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 30, when theprocessing in step SA36 above ends, the processing in step SA31 isperformed again. Therefore, when the photographing mode ends, the screenfor causing the user to select any of the photograph display mode andthe photographing mode is displayed again (step SA31).

Meanwhile, in step SA37, CPU 31 determines whether an operation forchanging a storage destination of a stored image has been performed ornot. Determination in step SA37 can be made by referring to the inputposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SA32. In other words, inthe determination processing in step SA37, CPU 31 determines whether aninput to touch an area where the image indicating change of a storagedestination of a picked-up image has been provided or not. When a resultof determination in step SA37 indicates Yes, processing in step SA38 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSA37 indicates No, processing in step SA39 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SA38, CPU 31 changes a storage destination of a picked-up image.In other words, when a current storage destination is set to data memory34 for storage, the storage destination is changed to memory card 28,and when the current storage destination is set to memory card 28, thestorage destination is changed to data memory 34 for storage.Specifically, CPU 31 causes main memory 32 to store data indicative ofthe storage destination after the change as storage destination data 68.Subsequent to step SA38, the processing in step SA31 is performed again.

In step SA39, CPU 31 determines whether to end the multifunctionalphotographing processing or not. Determination is made based on whetheror not an instruction to end the multifunctional photographingprocessing has been given by the user. For example, the instruction toend the multifunctional photographing processing may be given in such amanner that a button image for performing an operation to end themultifunctional photographing processing is displayed in the displayprocessing in step SA31 and that button image is touched. Alternatively,the instruction may be given also by pressing a predetermined prescribedbutton. When a result of determination in step SA39 indicates No, theprocessing in step SA31 is performed again. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SA39 indicates Yes, CPU 31 endsexecution of multifunctional photographing application program 53 andends the multifunctional photographing processing. Thereafter, theprocessing in step SA3 shown in FIG. 21 is performed again.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 21, in stepSA13, CPU 31 determines whether to end the processing in game device 10or not. Determination in step SA13 is made, for example, based onwhether a prescribed end instruction operation (specifically, anoperation to press power button 14F or the like) has been performed bythe user or not. When a result of determination in step SA13 indicatesNo, the processing in step SA5 is performed again. On the other hand,when the result of determination in step SA13 indicates Yes, CPU 31 endsthe processing shown in FIG. 21.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the statewhere the menu screen is displayed (in the launch acceptance state; instep SA5), game device 10 accepts the first launch operation forlaunching a selected application program (steps SA11 and SA12) and thephotographing enabling operation for launching simplified photographingprogram 52 (steps SA9 and SA10). Therefore, since simplifiedphotographing program 52 can immediately be launched by performing thephotographing enabling operation from the state where the menu screen isdisplayed, the user can easily launch simplified photographing program52. Particularly, in the present embodiment, in order to launch adesired selected application program, the user has to perform the firstlaunch operation after a scrolling operation as necessary, while theuser has only to perform the photographing enabling operation in orderto launch simplified photographing program 52. Therefore, in the presentembodiment, simplified photographing program 52 can more easily belaunched than the selected application program.

In addition, according to the embodiment above, during execution ofsimplified photographing program 52 (in the photographing enabled state;in steps SA22 to SA29), CPU 31 accepts the second launch operation forlaunching photographing application program 53 (step SA29). Thus, theuser can launch multifunctional photographing application program 53 byperforming the second launch operation even during photographing basedon simplified photographing program 52. Therefore, even when the userdesires to use a function of multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 not attained by simplified photographing program 52 duringphotographing based on simplified photographing program 52, the user caneasily and quickly use the function by performing the second launchoperation.

Further, in the present embodiment, simplified photographing program 52having a relatively simple function can quickly be launched from themenu screen, and multifunctional photographing application program 53having more functions can immediately be launched during execution ofsimplified photographing program 52.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the user can be causedto use game device 10 in such a manner of use that “game device 10 isinitially operated based on a photographing program having a simplefunction and then various photographing functions of game device 10 areutilized based on a photographing program having more functions,” andthe user can be caused to use game device 10 in such a manner thathe/she gradually gets used to an operation of game device 10.

Further, simplified photographing program 52 can be assumed as anintroduction (a trial version) for multifunctional photographingapplication program 53, and from the viewpoint of a supplier of gamedevice 10, the user can be prompted to use multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 by allowing quick launch of simplifiedphotographing program 52 from the menu screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the function of simplifiedphotographing program 52 is a part of the functions of multifunctionalphotographing application program 53, the data size of simplifiedphotographing program 52 is smaller than that of multifunctionalphotographing application program 53. Therefore, by setting a programlaunched with the photographing enabling operation above from the menuscreen to simplified photographing program 52 having the smaller datasize, a program for photographing can quickly be launched from the menuscreen.

<Photographing Leading Processing>

Details of the photographing leading processing in step SA2 above willnow be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of thephotographing leading processing (step SA2) shown in FIG. 21. In thephotographing leading processing, initially in step SA61, CPU 31 has aselection screen displayed for causing the user to select whether toperform photographing or not (that is, whether to make transition of thestate of game device 10 to the photographing enabled state or not). Forexample, together with a message that “Why don't you take a picture,” abutton image for giving an instruction to perform photographing and abutton image for giving an instruction not to perform photographing aredisplayed on lower LCD 12. Subsequent to step SA61, processing in stepSA62 is performed.

In step SA62, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. Theprocessing in step SA62 is the same as the processing in step SA6 above.Subsequent to step SA62, processing in step SA63 is performed.

In step SA63, CPU 31 determines whether the instruction to performphotographing has been selected or not. Determination in step SA63 canbe made by referring to input position data stored in main memory 32 instep SA62. In other words, in the determination processing in step SA63,CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where the buttonimage for giving the instruction to perform photographing has beenprovided or not. When a result of determination in step SA63 indicatesYes, processing in step SA64 is performed. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SA63 indicates No, processing in stepSA65 which will be described later is performed.

In step SA64, CPU 31 performs the simplified photographing processing.As this simplified photographing processing is the same as in step SA10above, detailed description thereof will not be provided. Since thephotographing enabled state can be set as a result of the simplifiedphotographing processing, the user can perform the photographingoperation. After the simplified photographing processing in step SA64ends, CPU 31 ends the photographing leading processing shown in FIG. 27.In the present embodiment, since the processing in step SA64 is the sameas the processing in step SA10, multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 can also be launched during the simplifiedphotographing processing in step SA64, as in step SA10. In analternative embodiment, however, in the simplified photographingprocessing in step SA64, button image 78 for performing the secondlaunch operation may not be displayed such that launch ofmultifunctional photographing application program 53 is not permitted.

On the other hand, in step SA65, CPU 31 has an image for introducing aphotographing function displayed. For example, an image or the like forexplaining functions relating to simplified photographing program 52 andmultifunctional photographing application program 53 is displayed onLCDs 12 and 22. After step SA65, CPU 31 ends the photographing leadingprocessing shown in FIG. 27.

As described above, in the present embodiment, game device 10 determineswhether game device 10 is started up for the first time or not (stepSA1). When game device 10 is started up for the first time (Yes in stepSA1), game device 10 provides display for causing the user to selectwhether to make transition of the state of game device 10 to thephotographing enabled state or not (step SA61). Then, when the userselects to perform photographing (Yes in step SA63), game device 10causes the user to actually experience the photographing operation (stepSA64).

Thus, the user can be led to initially experience the photographingoperation in game device 10. In other words, through the photographingleading processing, a user using game device 10 for the first time canbe caused to initially perform the photographing operation to get usedto the photographing operation. Further, in the present embodiment,since the user is caused to experience the simple photographingoperation based on simplified photographing program 52 above in stepSA64, the user can perform the photographing operation more easily thanin an example where the user is caused to initially experience thephotographing operation based on multifunctional photographingapplication program 53.

Further, from the viewpoint of a manufacturer of game device 10, thephotographing function of game device 10 can be introduced to the userin a manner easy to understand, by having the user initially actuallyexperience the simple photographing operation.

In the present embodiment, the user is caused to select whether or notto make transition to the photographing enabled state in step SA61. Inan alternative embodiment, however, in the photographing leadingprocessing, transition to the photographing enabled state may be madewithout user's selection. In other words, the photographing processingbased on photographing program 52 or 53 may be performed without user'sselection.

<As to Change of Display Screen>

In the present embodiment, game device 10 changes content of the displayimage on the menu screen at prescribed timing (automatically without aninstruction from the user), which produces variation in the menu screenand the user can be prevented from getting bored.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prescribed timing above includestiming of start-up of game device 10 and timing of end of the selectedapplication program. Namely, as described above, when game device 10 isstarted up and when a selected application program ends, the displayprocessing in step SA5 is performed after the processing in step SA3 andthus the display image on the menu screen is changed. In other words,each time game device 10 is started up and each time a selectedapplication program is executed, the display image is changed.

According to this feature, as the user can have things to look forwardto (regarding “which image will be displayed”) at the time of start-upand end of execution of the selected application program, from theviewpoint of the supplier of game device 10, an effect to prompt theuser to start up game device 10 and to execute a selected applicationprogram (that is, to use game device 10) is achieved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the prescribed timing aboveincludes timing of opening foldable information processing device 10. Inthe present embodiment, since game device 10 in the closed state is in asleep mode state, “timing of start-up of game device 10” above may wellbe said to include “timing of opening of game device 10 from the closedstate (sleep mode) (re-start of game device 10 from the sleep mode).”When game device 10 is opened again after game device 10 in the openedstate is once closed, CPU 31 changes the display image between beforeand after closing.

Thus, as the user has things to look forward to in opening game device10, from the viewpoint of the supplier of game device 10, an effect toprompt the user to use game device 10 is achieved by making the useropen game device 10. In the present embodiment, at the timing of openingof game device 10 from the closed state, the display image is changednot in a random manner but in a prescribed order. Details of processingfor changing the display image in response to opening and closing willbe described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 28.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of processing (processing at thetime of opening and closing) performed when game device 10 is opened andclosed. The processing shown in FIG. 28 is started in response toclosing of game device 10 at any timing during the processing shown inFIG. 21.

In the processing at the time of opening and closing, initially in stepSA71, CPU 31 causes game device 10 to make transition to the sleep mode.Specifically, CPU 31 stops image display on each of LCDs 12 and 22 ortemporarily stops processing in an application program being executed.Subsequent to step SA71, processing in step SA72 is performed.

In step SA72, CPU 31 determines whether game device 10 has been openedor not. When a result of determination in step SA72 indicates Yes,processing in step SA73 is performed. On the other hand, when the resultof determination in step SA72 indicates No, the processing in step SA72is performed again. In other words, CPU 31 waits until game device 10 isopened.

In step SA73, CPU 31 changes the display image from a state before theprocessing at the time of opening and closing is started. Here, in stepSA73, the display image is changed by successively selecting a displayimage from among the favorite images in a prescribed order. A method ofchanging the display image will be described hereinafter with referenceto FIG. 29.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the method of changing the display image instep SA73. FIG. 29 shows a case where the first group includes threefavorite images, the second group includes two favorite images, and thethird group includes four favorite images by way of example. In thepresent embodiment, the favorite images included in each group aremanaged with the favorite images being arranged in a prescribed order.For example, the prescribed order may be an order of time and date ofphotographing (storage), an order of time and date of setting as afavorite image, or an order set by the user. In step SA73, a favoriteimage is successively changed in this order. In other words, CPU 31 setsa favorite image immediately following a display image before change (inthe state before the processing at the time of opening and closing isstarted) as a display image after change. Further, when a display imagebefore change is the last favorite image in a group, a first favoriteimage in a next group is set as a display image after change. Further,when a display image before change is the last favorite image in thethird group, a first favorite image in the first group is set as adisplay image after change. As described above, in step SA73, thedisplay image is changed in an order indicated by an arrow in FIG. 29.Subsequent to step SA73, CPU 31 ends the processing at the time ofopening and closing, and returns to a state immediately before theprocessing at the time of opening and closing is started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each time game device 10is opened, the display image is changed in the prescribed order. Thus,the user can enjoy change of display images one after another byperforming an operation to open and close game device 10. For example,the user can create a four-panel cartoon of which picture (displayimage) changes every time game device 10 is opened, or can successivelyview a series of photographs arranged in chronological order byrepeatedly opening and closing game device 10. Here, in step SA3 above,CPU 31 may select a display image from among first favorite images inrespective groups in a random manner. Thus, all images included in thesegroups can successively be displayed in a prescribed order.

In an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may change the displayimage in a prescribed order in accordance with a prescribed operation(for example, an operation to press a prescribed button). In otherwords, the prescribed timing above may be the timing of a prescribedoperation.

<Variation>

In the embodiment above, prescribed information (data) is commonly usedin simplified photographing program 52 and multifunctional photographingapplication program 53. Specifically, two programs 52 and 53 commonlyuse information on the camera for image pick-up and information on astorage destination of a stored image. Here, in an alternativeembodiment, two programs 52 and 53 may commonly use other information.For example, in the case where a file name of a stored image isdetermined based on a total number of images taken by game device 10,information on the total number of images may commonly be used.

Further, in an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may cause contentof an argument to be passed to multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 to be different between when multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 is launched in the photographing enabled state(Yes in step SA29) and when multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 is launched in the launch acceptance state (Yes in stepSA11).

For example, the argument above may be set as information indicative ofa mode at the time of start of execution of multifunctionalphotographing application program 53. In other words, the mode at thetime of start of execution of multifunctional photographing applicationprogram 53 may be different between when multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 is launched in the photographing enabled stateand when multifunctional photographing application program 53 islaunched in the launch acceptance state.

Specifically, when multifunctional photographing application program 53is launched in the launch acceptance state, the mode at the time ofstart of execution thereof may be set to a mode for causing the user toselect between the photographing mode and the photograph display mode asin the embodiment above. On the other hand, when multifunctionalphotographing application program 53 is launched in the photographingenabled state, a mode at the time of start of execution thereof may beset to the photographing mode.

This is because, when multifunctional photographing application program53 is launched in the photographing enabled state, it can be assumedthat the user launched multifunctional photographing application program53 for performing photographing with a function not attained bysimplified photographing program 52.

Further, in an alternative embodiment, when multifunctionalphotographing application program 53 is launched in the photographingenabled state, the mode at the time of start of execution ofmultifunctional photographing application program 53 may be set to thephotograph display mode, and in addition, an image relating to a displayimage that has been displayed in the photographing enabled state (forexample, a favorite image in the same group as the display image, animage taken on the same day as the display image, and the like) may bedisplayed.

Further, in the embodiment above, a single button image for launchingmultifunctional photographing application program 53 in thephotographing enabled state (button image 78 shown in FIG. 24) isprovided. In an alternative embodiment, however, two button images maybe displayed. Here, one of the two button images is a button forlaunching multifunctional photographing application program 53 with themode at the time of start of execution thereof being set to thephotographing mode, and the other button image is a button for launchingmultifunctional photographing application program 53 with the mode atthe time of start of execution thereof being set to the photographdisplay mode. Thus, in an alternative embodiment, game device 10 mayprepare a plurality of types of second launch operations, so that themode at the time of start of execution (of multifunctional photographingapplication program 53) is different depending on a type of a performedsecond launch operation.

Further, in the embodiment above, simplified photographing program 52 isdifferent from launch function program 51 and it is launched by a launchprogram separately from launch function program 51. Here, in analternative embodiment, simplified photographing program 52 may beimplemented as a part of launch function program 51 (that is, launchfunction program 51 and simplified photographing program 52 mayimplement one program in launch program 61). In an alternativeembodiment, launch function program 51 may launch simplifiedphotographing program 52.

In other words, an instruction (an operation) for launching simplifiedphotographing program 52 should only be different from that forlaunching multifunctional photographing application program 53, andsimplified photographing program 52 and multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 may be launched by the same program or bydifferent programs.

7. Details of Function in Multifunctional Photographing Application

<Overview>

As described above, as a result of execution of multifunctionalphotographing application program 53, a large number of functions notattained by simplified photographing program 52 are provided. Details oftwo typical functions provided by multifunctional photographingapplication program 53 according to the present embodiment will bedescribed hereinafter.

<Processing Procedure (First Example)>

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing processing(No. 1) in the multifunctional photographing application in game device10. It is noted that a processing loop of steps SB1 to SB11 shown inFIG. 36 (except for a case where processing in steps SB8 to SB10 areperformed) is performed once in a prescribed time period (for example,1/60 sec.).

In step SB1 shown in FIG. 36, CPU 31 obtains data of an image picked-upby inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. In the present embodiment, animage is picked-up by any one of cameras 23 and 25. In step SB1, CPU 31obtains image data only from one camera. In the present embodiment, atthe time of start of the photographing processing, a camera for pickingup an image is set to outer camera 25. Subsequent to step SB1,processing in step SB2 is performed.

The image data obtained from camera 23 or 25 in step SB1 above isdisplayed on lower LCD 12. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of animage displayed on each of LCDs 12 and 22. FIG. 37 shows an image in thecase where there is no image input by the user in input image generationprocessing which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 37, CPU 31causes lower LCD 12 to display a real-time image (a picked-up image) 52picked-up by camera 23 or 25. It is noted that an image 252 forexplaining a manner of operation to the user is displayed on upper LCD22. In the present embodiment, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to displayvarious button images 253 to 261 together with picked-up image 252. Eachof button images 253 to 261 is an image for giving an instruction togame device 10 by the user's touch input onto a position of the image.Button images 253 to 261 will be described hereinafter.

A pen mode image 253, an eraser mode image 254, and a seal mode image255 are images for changing an edition mode. Here, in the presentembodiment, three modes of a pen mode, a seal mode and an eraser modeare prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image of an input trailinput to touch panel 13 can be added to the picked-up image. In the sealmode, a seal image prepared in advance can be added to the picked-upimage. In the eraser mode, an image added in the pen mode or the sealmode can be erased. Pen mode image 253 is an image for giving aninstruction to change the edition mode to the pen mode. Eraser modeimage 254 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editionmode to the eraser mode. Seal mode image 255 is an image for giving aninstruction to change the edition mode to the seal mode.

A thickness change image 256 is an image for giving an instruction tochange a thickness of a line input in the pen mode. A color change image257 is an image for giving an instruction to change a color of a lineinput in the pen mode. An all erase image 258 is an image for giving aninstruction to erase all images added in the pen mode or the seal mode.

By giving instructions using button images 253 to 258 above, the usercan input an image over the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12(in a manner superimposed on the picked-up image). Processing forgenerating an input image (input image generation processing) will bedescribed in detail later.

An end image 259 is an image for giving an instruction to end thephotographing processing. A photographing instruction image 260 is animage for giving a photographing instruction. In the present embodiment,the photographing instruction is an instruction to store (record) animage displayed on lower LCD 12 (an image obtained by superimposing aninput image on a picked-up image). It is noted that photographinginstruction image 260 is preferably displayed substantially at thecenter of lower housing 11 (in the left-right direction) forfacilitating a user's operation with either a right hand or a left hand.Therefore, if lower LCD 12 is not arranged substantially at the centerof lower housing 11, CPU 31 preferably has photographing instructionimage 260 displayed such that it is arranged substantially at the centerof lower housing 11, not at the center of lower LCD 12. A camera changeimage 261 is an image for giving a camera change instruction. The camerachange instruction is an instruction to change a camera for imagepick-up between inner camera 223 and outer camera 225.

In step SB2, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. In otherwords, CPU 31 obtains operation data from operation button group 14 andobtains touch position data from touch panel 13. The obtained operationdata and touch position data are stored in main memory 32. Subsequent tostep SB2, processing in step SB3 is performed.

In step SB3, CPU 31 determines whether the camera change instruction hasbeen given or not. In the present embodiment, the camera changeinstruction is given by pressing a prescribed button (for example,button 14B, button 14C, button 14D, or button 14E) or by providing aninput to touch panel 13 by touching an area where camera change image261 is displayed. Therefore, in the determination processing in stepSB3, CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed button above hasbeen pressed or whether or not an input to touch the area where camerachange image 261 is displayed has been performed. Determination in stepSB3 can be made by referring to the operation data and the touchposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SB2. When a result ofdetermination in step SB3 indicates Yes, processing in step SB4 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB3 indicates No, processing in step SB5 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SB4, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up. In otherwords, when the camera for image pick-up is set to inner camera 23, CPU31 changes the camera for image pick-up to outer camera 25. When thecamera for image pick-up is set to outer camera 25, CPU 31 changes thecamera for image pick-up to inner camera 23. Specifically, CPU 31 givesan instruction to stop an operation to one of cameras 23 and 25 pickingup an image, and gives an instruction to perform image pick-up (an imagepick-up execution instruction) to the other camera. If the processing instep SB4 above is performed, in step SB 1 that will subsequently beperformed, data of an image picked-up by the camera after the change isobtained by CPU 31, and in subsequent step SB6, the image (live image)picked-up by the camera after the change is displayed on lower LCD 12.Subsequent to step SB4, the processing in step SB1 is performed again.

In step SB5, CPU 31 performs the input image generation processing. Theinput image generation processing is processing for generating an inputimage based on user's input. The input image generation processing willbe described hereinafter in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a flow of the input image generationprocessing (step SB5) shown in FIG. 36. In the input image generationprocessing, initially in step SB20, CPU 31 determines whether anoperation for generating an input image has been performed or not. Inother words, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area wherethe picked-up image is displayed in the input surface of touch panel 13has been provided or not. Determination in step SB20 can be made bydetermining whether or not the touch position data obtained in step SB2indicates a position in the area where the picked-up image is displayed.When a result of determination in step SB20 indicates Yes, processing instep SB21 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SB20 indicates No, processing in step SB26 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SB21, CPU 31 determines whether or not a current edition mode isset to the pen mode. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that theedition mode has been set to the pen mode at the time of start of theedition processing. When a result of determination in step SB21indicates Yes, processing in step SB22 is performed. On the other hand,when the result of determination in step SB21 indicates No, processingin step SB23 which will be described later is performed.

In step SB22, processing in the pen mode is performed. In other words,CPU 31 draws an image of a trail of touch input provided on thepicked-up image. Specifically, an image of a line connecting positionsindicated by the touch position data that has been obtained in step SB2by now is drawn in a memory (a frame buffer) storing image data to bedisplayed on LCDs 12 and 22. It is noted that a thickness and a color ofa drawn line are determined in accordance with contents set in step SB29which will be described later. The processing in step SB22 may be anyprocessing so long as the processing is processing for generating anddrawing an image representing a trail of positions of user's input totouch panel 13. An example of such processing is shown in steps SB52 andSB53 which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing anexample of an image displayed on each of LCDs 12 and 22 in the pen mode.When the processing in step SB22 is performed, in display processingwhich will be described later (step SB6), an input image 262 showing atrail drawn by the user is displayed in a manner superimposed on thepicked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12 (see FIG. 39). Subsequent tostep SB22, processing in step SB26 which will be described later isperformed.

On the other hand, in step SB23, CPU 31 determines whether the currentedition mode is set to the seal mode or not. When a result ofdetermination in step SB23 indicates Yes (namely, when the currentedition mode is set to the seal mode), processing in step SB24 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB23 indicates No (namely, when the current edition mode is set to theeraser mode), processing in step SB25 which will be described later isperformed.

In step SB24, processing in the seal mode is performed. In other words,CPU 31 draws a prescribed seal image at a position of touch input on thepicked-up image. Specifically, CPU 31 draws the prescribed seal image ata position indicated by the touch position data obtained in step SB2. Itis noted that the processing in step SB24 may be any processing so longas the processing is processing for generating and drawing theprescribed seal image at a position of user's input to touch panel 13.An example of such processing is shown in steps SB60 and SB61 which willbe described later. When the processing in step SB24 is performed, indisplay processing which will be described later (step SB6), an inputimage which is the prescribed seal image is displayed in a mannersuperimposed on the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12. It isnoted that CPU 31 may prepare a plurality of seal images in advance andcause the user to select a seal image to be drawn from among theplurality of seal images. Subsequent to step SB24, the processing instep SB26 which will be described later is performed.

On the other hand, in step SB25, processing in the eraser mode isperformed. In other words, CPU 31 erases the input image (the image ofthe trail or the seal image) on an edited image in accordance with aninput to touch panel 13. Specifically, the input image drawn at theposition indicated by the touch position data obtained in step SB2 iserased. Subsequent to step SB25, the processing in step SB26 isperformed.

In step SB26, CPU 31 determines whether an instruction to erase allinput images has been given or not. Specifically, CPU 31 determineswhether an input to touch an area where all erase image 258 above isdisplayed has been provided or not. When a result of determination instep SB26 indicates Yes, processing in step SB27 is performed. On theother hand, when the result of determination in step SB26 indicates No,the processing in step SB27 is skipped and processing in step SB28 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SB27, CPU 31 erases all input images that have been generatedand drawn by now. Thus, the user can start again an operation fordrawing an input image by touching all erase image 258. Subsequent tostep SB27, processing in step SB28 is performed.

In step SB28, CPU 31 determines whether an instruction to change settingrelating to the operation for generating an input image has been givenor not. Specifically, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch anarea where each of button images 253 to 257 above is displayed has beenprovided or not. When a result of determination in step SB28 indicatesYes, processing in step SB29 is performed. On the other hand, when theresult of determination in step SB28 indicates No, the processing instep SB28 is skipped and CPU 31 ends the input image generationprocessing.

In step SB29, CPU 31 changes the setting in accordance with the providedinstruction. In other words, when a touch input to any of mode images253 to 255 is provided, CPU 31 changes the edition mode to a modecorresponding to a mode image indicated by the touch input. When a touchinput to thickness change image 256 is made, CPU 31 changes setting of athickness of a line (trail) generated in the pen mode. Specifically, CPU31 displays a plurality of images of lines different in thickness,causes the user to select a line of a desired thickness from among theplurality of lines different in thickness, and changes the setting of athickness of a line to the selected thickness. When a touch input tocolor change image 257 is made, CPU 31 changes a color of a line (trail)generated in the pen mode. Specifically, CPU 31 displays a plurality ofimages of a plurality of colors, causes the user to select a desiredcolor from among the plurality of colors, and changes the setting of acolor of a line to the selected color. After the end of step SB29, CPU31 ends the input image generation processing.

As a result of step SB5 above, addition to the real-time image (the liveimage) based on an input to the touch panel is made. In other words, theuser can input an image over the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD12 (in a manner superimposed on the picked-up image). In the presentembodiment, though the processing for adding an image drawn by the useror a seal image prepared in advance to the picked-up image has beendescribed by way of example, in an alternative embodiment, CPU 31 shouldonly perform processing for modifying a real-time image, and it mayperform processing for distorting the picked-up image, processing foraltering expression of a face (processing for detecting a feature pointof the face through image recognition processing and changing a positionof the feature point) when a face of a person is included in thepicked-up image, processing for converting a picked-up image into animage symmetrical about a line, and the like.

Referring back to the description of step SB20, in step SB6 subsequentto step SB5, CPU 31 performs the display processing for displaying aprescribed image on LCDs 12 and 22. Specifically, an image such as image252 shown in FIG. 37 for explaining a manner of operation to the user isdisplayed on upper LCD 22. The picked-up image obtained in step SB1 andbutton images 253 to 261 are displayed on lower LCD 12 (see FIG. 37).Further, when an input image is generated and drawn in the input imagegeneration processing, the input image is displayed over the picked-upimage (see FIG. 39). In the present embodiment, since the processing insteps SB1 to SB6 is repeatedly performed, the picked-up image isdifferent each time. Therefore, the user can add an input image onto animage picked up by camera 23 or 25 in real time. Subsequent to step SB6,processing in step SB7 is performed.

In step SB7, CPU 31 determines whether a photographing instruction hasbeen given or not. In the present embodiment, the photographinginstruction is given by pressing a prescribed button (for example,button 14I or button 14J) or by providing to touch panel 13, an input totouch an area where photographing instruction image 260 is displayed. Itis noted that photographing may automatically be performed at prescribedtiming by program processing. Therefore, in the determination processingin step SB7, CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed buttonabove has been pressed or whether or not the input to touch the areawhere photographing instruction image 260 is displayed has beenprovided. Determination in step SB7 can be made by referring to theoperation data and the touch position data stored in main memory 32 instep SB2. When a result of determination in step SB7 indicates Yes,processing in step SB8 is performed. On the other hand, when the resultof determination in step SB7 indicates No, processing in step SB11 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SB8, CPU 31 holds (freezes) a display content (the picked-upimage and the input image) currently displayed on lower LCD 12. In otherwords, display on lower LCD 12 of a still image (the picked-up image andthe input image displayed in step SB5) which is a live image at the timewhen a photographing instruction was given is continued. A period forwhich the still image is displayed may be a predetermined prescribedperiod or a period until display processing in step SB6 is performednext time. In an alternative embodiment, the processing in step SB8 maynot be performed. In other words, a moving image of a live image mayalways be displayed on lower LCD 12, instead of display of a still imageon lower LCD 12 in accordance with an image pick-up instruction.Subsequent to step SB8, processing in step SB9 is performed.

In step SB9, CPU 31 causes storage of a picked-up image currentlydisplayed on lower LCD 12 and the input image. In other words, data ofthe picked-up image and the input image displayed in step SB5 is stored,for example, in data memory 34 for storage. Thus, the user can store thepicked-up image and the input image added onto the picked-up image. Itis noted that CPU 31 may cause storage of data of an image obtained bycombining the picked-up image and the input image, or may cause separatestorage but in association with each other, of image data of thepicked-up image and image data of the input image. Subsequent to stepSB9, processing in step SB 10 is performed.

In step SB10, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display the image stored instep SB9. It is noted that the image displayed on upper LCD 22 iscontinuously displayed until another photographing instruction is given(Yes in step SB7 again) and another stored image is displayed in step SB10. In a variation, the image displayed on upper LCD 22 may be displayedfor a predetermined prescribed period, or may be displayed until displayprocessing in step SB6 is performed next time. Further, after display ofthe stored image ends, an image for explaining a manner of operation tothe user (an operation guidance image as described previously withreference to FIG. 37) may be displayed on upper LCD 22. Though thedisplay processing is performed in step SB 10 following the storageprocessing in step SB9 in the present embodiment, any of the storageprocessing and the display processing may be performed first.Specifically, in response to a photographing instruction, CPU 31 maycause upper LCD 22 to display an image stored in response to thephotographing instruction. CPU 31 may not only display an image storedin response to a photographing instruction but also may display an imagewhich is to be stored in response to a photographing instruction.Subsequent to step SB10, processing in step SB11 is performed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on LCDs 12and 22 when step SB10 is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, in the presentembodiment, in accordance with a photographing instruction (aphotographing operation), an image 263 stored in response to thephotographing instruction is displayed on upper LCD 22 (step SB10).Thus, an image representing a result of photographing can be displayedon upper LCD 22 having a display screen that faces in a displaydirection corresponding to the photographing direction of camera 23 or25 (in a direction the same as the photographing direction or in adirection opposite to the photographing direction). By displaying theimage representing the result of photographing on upper LCD 22, theimage representing the result of photographing can be presented to theuser in a manner easy for the user to recognize the photographingdirection. In the present embodiment, since a real-time image picked-upby camera 23 or 25 is displayed on lower LCD 12 of which displaydirection does not correspond to the photographing direction of camera23 or 25, it is particularly effective to present the image representingthe result of photographing to the user in a manner easy for the user torecognize the photographing direction.

In the present embodiment, an edition result obtained before aphotographing instruction is given is maintained also after thephotographing instruction was given (after an image is stored). Namely,as shown in FIG. 40, input image 262 input prior to a photographinginstruction is displayed on lower LCD 12 in a manner superimposed on alive image even after the photographing instruction was given. In analternative embodiment, an edition result obtained before aphotographing instruction is given may be erased in accordance with thephotographing instruction, and only a live image may be displayed onlower LCD 12 after the photographing instruction was given.

In an alternative embodiment, an image representing a result ofphotographing (a stored image) may be displayed on upper LCD 22 at anytiming, without limited to the timing in accordance with a photographinginstruction. For example, CPU 31 may cause upper LCD 22 to display animage representing a result of photographing in accordance with a user'sinstruction to view an image (the number of images may be one or more)or may always display an image representing a result of photographing onupper LCD 22 instead of the image for explaining a manner of operation.

In step SB11, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editionprocessing. Determination is made based on whether or not an instructionto end the edition processing has been given by the user. Specifically,determination in step SB11 is made based on whether a touch input to anarea of end image 259 displayed on lower LCD 12 has been provided ornot. When a result of determination in step SB11 indicates No, CPU 31performs the processing in step SB1 again. Thereafter, the processingloop of steps SB1 to SB11 is repeatedly performed until determination toend the photographing processing is made in step SB 11. On the otherhand, when the result of determination in step SB11 indicates Yes, CPU31 ends the photographing processing shown in FIG. 36.

Through the photographing processing described above, the user can storean image picked-up by the camera in accordance with the photographinginstruction. Here, in the present embodiment, two display devices areincluded, an image being currently taken is displayed on one of thedisplay devices, and a picture for explaining an operation is displayedon the other display device. Thus, since the user can perform thephotographing operation while looking at the picture for explaining theoperation in addition to the currently picked-up image, user-friendlygame device 10 can be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, byproviding touch panel 13 in lower LCD 12, an operation can more easilybe performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the user can provide thephotographing instruction by pressing button 14I or button 14J. By usingbutton 14I or button 14J as the shutter button, the user can press theshutter button while holding lower housing 11 with both hands. Thus, thephotographing operation can more easily be performed. In an alternativeembodiment, some of buttons 14B to 14E may be used as the shutterbutton. In this case as well, the user can press the shutter buttonwhile holding lower housing 11 with both hands as in the presentembodiment. Alternatively, some buttons of direction input button A (forexample, one direction input; for example, a left input) and one ofbuttons 14B to E (for example, button 14D) may both have a function ofthe shutter button. By doing so, either a left-handed user or aright-handed user can easily operate the shutter button.

<Processing Procedure (Second Example)>

In the processing procedure above, in the photographing processing, thecase where the user adds an input image to an image obtained in realtime has been described by way of example, however, in the photographingprocessing, the user may add an input image to an image (a still image)picked-up by game device 10. A second example of the photographingprocessing will be described hereinafter with reference to FIGS. 41 to45.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing processing (No.2) in the multifunctional photographing application in game device 10.When power of game device 10 is turned on by pressing of power button14F, CPU 31 of game device 10 initializes main memory 32 and the like,and then starts execution of a program for performing the photographingprocessing shown in FIG. 41. It is noted that a processing loop of stepsSB31 to SB44 shown in FIG. 41 is performed once in a prescribed timeperiod (for example, 1/60 sec.) except for a period when editionprocessing (step SB43) is performed.

In step SB31 shown in FIG. 41, CPU 31 obtains data of an image picked-upby inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. In the present second example, animage is picked-up by only any one of cameras 23 and 25. In step SB31,CPU 31 obtains image data only from one camera. In the presentvariation, at the time of start of the photographing processing, acamera for image pick-up is set to outer camera 25. Subsequent to stepSB31, processing in step SB32 is performed.

In step SB32, CPU 31 performs display processing for displayingprescribed images on LCDs 12 and 22. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing anexample of an image displayed on LCDs 12 and 22 in step SB32. As shownin FIG. 42, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display a real-time image (apicked-up image) 51 taken by camera 23 or 25. In other words, CPU 31outputs the image data obtained in step SB31 to upper LCD 22. Further,in the present variation, an image 272 showing a current date isdisplayed on upper LCD 22 in a manner superimposed on picked-up image271.

In the present variation, magnification data indicative of amagnification of the picked-up image displayed on upper LCD 22 is storedin main memory 32. In step SB32, the picked-up image is displayed onupper LCD 22 at a magnification indicated by the magnification data. Inother words, CPU 31 determines an area in the picked-up image to bedisplayed in accordance with the magnification above, zooms in an imageof the determined area to have a size of upper LCD 22 as necessary, andcauses upper LCD 22 to display that image. It is noted that, at the timeof start of the photographing processing, the magnification data is setso as to indicate a predetermined prescribed magnification (for example,a magnification with which an entirety of the picked-up image isdisplayed on upper LCD 22 (one time)). Content of the magnification datais changed when a zoom change instruction which will be described lateris given. Therefore, when the picked-up image is zoomed in and displayedon upper LCD 22, not the entirety but only a part of the picked-up imagemay be displayed.

On the other hand, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display an operationscreen for operating game device 10. As shown in FIG. 42, the operationscreen displayed in step SB32 includes stored images 273A to 273D andinstruction images 274 to 278 for giving various instructions to gamedevice 10 using touch panel 13.

Stored images 273A to 273D are images previously taken by game device 10and stored in game device 10 (or alternatively in memory card 28)(referred to as stored images). In the present variation, among thestored images, a prescribed number of images (four in FIG. 42) aredisplayed on lower LCD 12. It is noted that, in main memory 32, dataindicative of stored images to be displayed on lower LCD 12 (displayedstored images) is stored as displayed stored image data. The displayedstored image data is, for example, data indicative of an ID assigned toa stored image. In FIG. 42, stored images 273A to 273D are aligned anddisplayed in order of date (time and date) of photographing. Here,leftmost stored image 273A is an image taken at the earliest time, andthe time of photographing is earlier in order of stored image 273B whichis second from the left, stored image 273C which is second from theright, and rightmost stored image 273D. In the present variation, aninstruction to perform edition processing for editing a stored image (anedition instruction) can be given by providing a touch input todisplayed stored images 273A to 273D through touch panel 13.

Further, as the instruction images above, a photographing instructionimage 274, a camera change image 275, a zoom bar 276, a zoom cursor 277,and display change images 278A and 278B are displayed on lower LCD 12.Photographing instruction image 274 is an image for giving aphotographing instruction using touch panel 13. The photographinginstruction is an instruction for causing camera 23 or 25 of game device10 to perform photographing. Camera change image 275 is an image forgiving a camera change instruction using touch panel 13. The camerachange instruction is an instruction to change the camera for imagepick-up between inner camera 23 and outer camera 25. Zoom bar 276 andzoom cursor 277 are images for giving a zoom change instruction usingtouch panel 13. The zoom change instruction is an instruction to zoomin/out the picked-up image displayed on upper LCD 22. Display changeimages 278A and 278B are images for giving a display change instruction.The display change instruction is an instruction for changing storedimages to be displayed as stored images 273A to 273D on lower LCD 12among the stored images stored in game device 10. A manner of givingeach of these instructions and processing performed by game device 10 inaccordance with each of the instructions will be described later.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 41, subsequentto step SB32, processing in step SB33 is performed. In step SB33, CPU 31accepts an input to each input device. In other words, CPU 31 obtainsoperation data from operation button group 14 and obtains touch positiondata from touch panel 13. The obtained operation data and touch positiondata are stored in main memory 32. Subsequent to step SB33, processingin step SB34 is performed.

In step SB34, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing instructionhas been given or not. In the present variation, the photographinginstruction is given by pressing a prescribed button (for example,button 14I or button 14J) or by providing to touch panel 13, an input totouch an area where photographing instruction image 274 is displayed.Therefore, in the determination processing in step SB34, CPU 31determines whether or not the prescribed button above has been pressedor whether or not the input to touch the area where photographinginstruction image 274 is displayed has been provided. Determination instep SB34 can be made by referring to the operation data and the touchposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result ofdetermination in step SB34 indicates Yes, processing in step SB35 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB34 indicates No, processing in step SB36 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SB35, CPU 31 performs the photographing processing. In otherwords, CPU 31 causes data memory 34 for storage to store (save) theimage data obtained from the camera in step SB31. In an alternativeembodiment, CPU 31 may cause any of LCDs 12 and 22 to display the imagedata obtained from the camera in step SB31, and inquire of the userwhether or not to store the image data. Only when the user provides aninstruction to store the image data, CPU 31 may cause data memory 34 forstorage to store (save) the image data. Further, in an alternativeembodiment, CPU 31 may cause memory card 28 to store data of thepicked-up image, or may cause the user to indicate whether the imagedata should be stored in a device main body (data memory 34 for storage)or in memory card 28. Subsequent to step SB35, processing in step SB42which will be described later is performed.

On the other hand, in step SB36, CPU 31 determines whether the camerachange instruction has been given or not. In the present variation, thecamera change instruction is given by pressing a prescribed button (forexample, button 14B, button 14C, button 14D, or button 14E) or byproviding to touch panel 13, an input to touch an area where camerachange image 275 is displayed. Thus, in the determination processing instep SB36, CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed button abovehas been pressed or whether or not the input to touch the area wherecamera change image 275 is displayed has been provided. Determination instep SB36 can be made by referring to the operation data and the touchposition data stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result ofdetermination in step SB36 indicates Yes, processing in step SB37 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB36 indicates No, processing in step SB38 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SB37, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up. In otherwords, when the camera for image pick-up is set to inner camera 23, CPU31 changes the camera for image pick-up to outer camera 25. When thecamera for image pick-up is set to outer camera 25, CPU 31 changes thecamera for image pick-up to inner camera 23. Specifically, CPU 31 givesan instruction to stop an operation to one of cameras 23 and 25 pickingup an image and gives an instruction to perform image pick-up (an imagepick-up execution instruction) to the other camera. If the processing instep SB37 above is performed, in step SB31 that will subsequently beperformed, data of an image picked-up by the camera after the change isobtained by CPU 31, and in subsequent step SB32, the image picked-up bythe camera after the change is displayed on upper LCD 22. Subsequent tostep SB37, processing in step SB42 which will be described later isperformed.

On the other hand, in step SB38, CPU 31 determines whether the zoomchange instruction has been given or not. In the present variation, thezoom change instruction is given by moving zoom cursor 277 on zoom bar276 upward or downward by using a prescribed button (for example, an upbutton or a down button of direction input button 14A) or by providingan input to touch panel 13. Specifically, zoom cursor 277 is movedupward by a prescribed distance in accordance with pressing of the upbutton of direction input button 14A and moved downward by a prescribeddistance in accordance with pressing of the down button of directioninput button 14A. In addition, the user can move zoom cursor 277 upwardor downward by initially touching a screen area where zoom cursor 277 isdisplayed and performing an operation with respect to touch panel 13 toslide a touch position upward or downward while touching the screenarea. Therefore, in the determination processing in step SB38, CPU 31determines whether or not the prescribed button above has been pressedor whether or not the operation with respect to touch panel 13 formoving zoom cursor 277 has been performed. Determination in step SB38can be made by referring to the operation data and the touch positiondata stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result ofdetermination in step SB38 indicates Yes, processing in step SB39 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB38 indicates No, processing in step SB40 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SB39, CPU 31 zooms in/out the picked-up image displayed on upperLCD 22 in accordance with the zoom change instruction. In other words,when an instruction for moving zoom cursor 277 upward is given, CPU 31changes the content of the magnification data stored in main memory 32such that the magnification is lowered. Thus, in step SB32 that willsubsequently be performed, a picked-up image is displayed with the imagebeing zoomed out as compared to preceding step SB32. On the other hand,when an instruction for moving zoom cursor 277 downward is given, CPU 31changes the content of the magnification data stored in main memory 32such the magnification is increased. Thus, in step SB32 that willsubsequently be performed, a picked-up image is displayed with the imagebeing zoomed in as compared to preceding step SB32. Subsequent to stepSB39, processing in step SB42 which will be described later isperformed.

On the other hand, in step SB40, CPU 31 determines whether the displaychange instruction has been given or not. In the present variation, thedisplay change instruction is given by pressing a prescribed button (forexample, a left button or a right button of direction input button 14A)or by providing to touch panel 13, an input to touch an area wheredisplay change image 278A is displayed or an area where display changeimage 278B is displayed. Therefore, in the determination processing instep SB40, CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed button abovehas been pressed or whether or not the input to touch the area wheredisplay change image 278A is displayed or the area where display changeimage 278B is displayed has been provided. Determination in step SB40can be made by referring to the operation data and the touch positiondata stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result ofdetermination in step SB40 indicates Yes, processing in step SB41 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB40 indicates No, processing in step SB42 which will be described lateris performed.

In step SB41, CPU 31 changes stored images to be displayed on lower LCD12 (displayed stored images) among the stored images. Specifically, whenthe right button of direction input button 14A is pressed or whendisplay change image 278B is touched, the displayed stored images areshifted by one image toward recent images. In other words, among thefour currently displayed stored images, the image taken at the earliesttime is removed from the displayed stored images. In addition, a storedimage taken subsequent to the image taken most recently among the fourcurrently displayed stored images is added as a new displayed storedimage. On the other hand, when the left button of direction input button14A is pressed or when display change image 278A is touched, thedisplayed stored images are shifted by one image toward old images. Inother words, among the four currently displayed stored images, the imagetaken most recently is removed from the displayed stored images. Inaddition, a stored image taken immediately before the image taken at theearliest time among the four currently displayed stored images is addedas a new displayed stored image. In main memory 32, data indicative ofthe displayed stored images after the change in step SB40 is stored asnew displayed stored image data. Subsequent to step SB41, processing instep SB42 which will be described later is performed.

In step SB42, CPU 31 determines whether an edition instruction has beengiven or not. In the present variation, the edition instruction is givenby providing through touch panel 13, a touch input to a display area ofa stored image of which edition is desired among displayed stored images273A to 273D. Thus, in the determination processing in step SB42, CPU 31determines whether the input to touch any of the areas where storedimages 273A to 273D are displayed respectively has been provided or not.Determination in step SB42 can be made by referring to the operationdata and the touch position data stored in main memory 32 in step SB33.When a result of determination in step SB42 indicates Yes, processing instep SB43 is performed. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SB42 indicates No, processing in step SB44 whichwill be described later is performed.

In step SB43, CPU 31 performs the edition processing. The editionprocessing is processing for editing a stored image. Hereinafter, astored image to be edited is referred to as an edited image. The editionprocessing will be described hereinafter in detail with reference toFIGS. 43 to 45.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a flow of the edition processing (stepSB43) shown in FIG. 41. In the edition processing, initially in stepSB51, CPU 31 determines whether or not the current edition mode is setto the pen mode. Here, in the present variation, in the editionprocessing, three modes of the pen mode, the seal mode and the erasermode are prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image of an inputtrail input through touch panel 13 can be added to an edited image. Inthe seal mode, a seal image prepared in advance can be added to anedited image. In the eraser mode, an image added in the pen mode or theseal mode can be erased. In the present variation, it is assumed thatthe edition mode has been set to the pen mode at the time of start ofthe edition processing. When a result of determination in step SB51indicates Yes, processing in step SB52 is performed. On the other hand,when the result of determination in step SB51 indicates No, processingin step SB58 which will be described later is performed.

In steps SB52 to SB57, processing in the pen mode is performed. FIG. 44is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on LCDs 12 and 22in the pen mode in the edition processing. As shown in FIG. 44, duringthe edition processing, an operation screen for edition (an editionscreen) is displayed on lower LCD 12. Specifically, a part or anentirety of an edited image 281 is displayed on lower LCD 12. Editedimage 281 is a stored image to be edited, that is, a stored imagedesignated with a touch input from among stored images 273A to 273Dshown in FIG. 42. Further, images 284 to 290 for performing variousoperations are displayed on lower LCD 12. Operations using these images284 to 290 will be described in detail later. On the other hand, duringthe edition processing, as shown in FIG. 44, entire edited image 281 isdisplayed on upper LCD 22. It is noted that a dotted-line area 282 shownin FIG. 44 shows an area in edited image 281 being displayed on lowerLCD 12. An image of such a dotted-line area 282 may or may not bedisplayed on upper LCD 22. Since a real-time image picked-up by camera23 or 25 is not displayed during the edition processing, CPU 31 may givean instruction not to perform an image pick-up operation to each ofcameras 23 and 25. The processing in the pen mode (the steps SB52 toSB57) will be described hereinafter in detail with reference to FIG. 44.

In step SB52, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. In other words,CPU 31 obtains touch position data from touch panel 13. The obtainedtouch position data is stored in main memory 32. Subsequent to stepSB52, processing in step SB53 is performed.

In step SB53, CPU 31 has an image of an input trail 283 displayed inaccordance with an input to touch panel 13. In other words, when a touchinput through touch panel 13 to an area of edited image 281 is provided,the image of input trail 283 is displayed. Input trail 283 is an imageshowing a trail of positions of touch input to touch panel 13.Specifically, when the touch position data obtained in step SB52indicates a position in an area where edited image 281 is displayed, CPU31 adds the image of input trail 283 at the position in edited image281. Edited image 281 to which the image has been added is displayed onLCDs 12 and 22. Since a processing loop of steps SB51 to SB56 isrepeated once in a prescribed time period (one frame time ( 1/60 sec.))during the pen mode, the processing in steps SB52 and SB53 is repeatedduring the pen mode. Therefore, when the user continuously providesinput to touch panel 13 to draw a trail, the image of input trail 283 isgenerated and displayed in a manner showing the trail. It is noted thatgeneration and display processing of input trail 283 in step SB53 isperformed only when a touch input to the area of edited image 281 isprovided, and it is not performed when a touch input is not provided orwhen a touch input to an area other than the area of edited image 281 isprovided. Subsequent to step SB53, processing in step SB54 is performed.

In step SB54, CPU 31 performs zoom in/out processing of edited image 281displayed on lower LCD 12. The zoom in/out processing is performed whena magnification change instruction is given, that is, when an input toan area of a magnification change instruction image 289 displayed onlower LCD 12 is provided through touch panel 13. Magnification changeinstruction image 289 is an image for giving an instruction to zoom inor out edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB54, CPU 31changes a magnification for displaying edited image 281 displayed onlower LCD 12 when the touch position data obtained in step SB52indicates a position in the area where magnification change instructionimage 289 is displayed. In the present variation, the magnification fordisplaying edited image 281 has, for example, three levels, and CPU 31changes the magnification in order of a low magnification, anintermediate magnification, and a high magnification each time themagnification change instruction is given. When the magnification changeinstruction is given in the case of high magnification, CPU 31 changesthe magnification to the low magnification. Thus, when the magnificationchange instruction is given by the user, the magnification for editedimage 281 displayed on lower LCD 12 is changed. It is noted that themagnification change processing in step SB54 is performed only when atouch input to the area of magnification change instruction image 289 isprovided, and it is not performed when an input to touch panel 13 is notprovided or when a touch input to an area other than the area ofmagnification change instruction image 289 is provided. Subsequent tostep SB54, processing in step SB55 is performed.

In step SB55, CPU 31 performs movement processing of edited image 281displayed on lower LCD 12. The movement processing is performed when amovement instruction is given, that is, when a touch input to an area ofa movement instruction image 290 displayed on lower LCD 12 is provided.Movement instruction image 290 is an image for giving an instruction tomove (scroll) edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB55,CPU 31 scrolls for display, edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12when the touch position data obtained in step SB52 indicates a positionin the area where movement instruction image 290 is displayed. In thepresent variation, as shown in FIG. 44, movement instruction image 290includes images indicating four directions of an upward direction, adownward direction, a left direction, and a right direction (triangleimages in FIG. 44). When a touch input to any of areas of these imagesis provided, CPU 31 scrolls edited image 281 in a directioncorresponding to the image to which the touch input was provided. It isnoted that the movement processing in step SB55 is performed only when atouch input to the area of movement instruction image 290 is provided,and it is not performed when an input to touch panel 13 is not providedor when a touch input to an area other than the area of movementinstruction image 290 is provided. Subsequent to step SB55, processingin step SB56 is performed.

In step SB56, CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the editionmode. Determination is made based on whether or not a mode changeinstruction has been given by the user. Specifically, determination instep SB56 is made by determining whether a touch input to any of areasof a pen mode image 284, an eraser mode image 285, and a seal mode image286 displayed on lower LCD 12 has been provided or not. Pen mode image284 is an image for giving an instruction to change the edition mode tothe pen mode. Eraser mode image 285 is an image for giving aninstruction to change the edition mode to the eraser mode. Seal modeimage 286 is an image for giving an instruction to change the editionmode to the seal mode. In step SB56, when the position indicated by thetouch position data obtained in step SB52 is within the area where anyof pen mode image 284, eraser mode image 285, and seal mode image 286 isdisplayed, CPU 31 determines that a determination result indicates Yes.Then, CPU 31 changes the edition mode to a mode corresponding to theimage to which input was provided. On the other hand, when the positionindicated by the touch position data is not within the area where any ofpen mode image 284, eraser mode image 285, and seal mode image 286 isdisplayed, CPU 31 determines that the determination result indicates No.In this case, the edition mode is not changed. When the result ofdetermination in step SB56 indicates Yes, the processing in step SB51 isperformed again. On the other hand, when the result of determination instep SB56 indicates No, processing in step SB57 is performed.

In step SB57, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editionprocessing. Determination is made based on whether an instruction to endthe edition processing has been given by the user or not. Specifically,determination in step SB57 is made based on whether a touch input to anyof areas of a stop instruction image 287 and a completion instructionimage 288 displayed on lower LCD 12 has been provided or not. Stopinstruction image 287 is an image for giving an instruction to stop theedition processing. Completion instruction image 288 is an image forgiving an instruction to complete the edition processing. In step SB57,when the position indicated by the touch position data obtained in stepSB52 is within the area where any of stop instruction image 287 andcompletion instruction image 288 is displayed, CPU 31 determines that adetermination result indicates Yes. On the other hand, when the positionindicated by the touch position data obtained in step SB52 is not withinthe area where any of stop instruction image 287 and completioninstruction image 288 is displayed, CPU 31 determines that thedetermination result indicates No. When the result of determination instep SB57 indicates Yes, processing in step SB72 which will be describedlater is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determinationin step SB57 indicates No, the processing in step SB52 is performedagain.

As described above, the processing in the pen mode (steps SB52 and SB57)is repeated until the result of determination in step SB56 indicates Yesor until the result of determination in step SB57 indicates No. Further,when the user inputs a trail to touch panel 13 in the pen mode, theimage of input trail 283 is added to the edited image (see FIG. 44).

On the other hand, in step SB58, CPU 31 determines whether the currentedition mode is set to the seal mode or not. When a result ofdetermination in step SB58 indicates Yes (that is, when the currentedition mode is set to the seal mode), processing in step SB59 isperformed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in stepSB58 indicates No (that is, when the current edition mode is set to theeraser mode), processing in step SB66 which will be described later isperformed.

In steps SB59 to SB65, processing in the seal mode is performed. FIG. 45is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on LCDs 12 and 22in the seal mode of the edition processing. As shown in FIG. 45, in theseal mode as well, as in the pen mode, edited image 281 is displayed onLCDs 12 and 22, and images 264 to 270 for performing various operationsare displayed on lower LCD 12. The processing in the seal mode (stepsSB59 to SB65) will be described hereinafter in detail with reference toFIG. 45.

In step SB59, CPU 31 selects a seal image to be added to edited image281. Selection of the seal image is made by user's designation of adesired seal image from among seal images stored in advance in mainmemory 32, data memory 34 for storage, or memory card 28. When a sealimage is selected in step SB59, the selected seal image is added at aprescribed position (for example, at a center position) in edited image281. Thus, a seal image 291 is added to edited image 281 and displayedon LCDs 12 and 22 (FIG. 45). Subsequent to step SB59 above, processingin step SB60 is performed.

In step SB60, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. The processingin step SB60 is the same as in step SB52 above. In the following stepSB61, CPU 31 moves seal image 291 on edited image 281 in accordance withthe input to touch panel 13. An operation for moving seal image 291 isperformed by performing the same operation as that for theaforementioned zoom change instruction (step SB38). In other words, theuser can move seal image 291 by initially touching an area where sealimage 291 is displayed and performing an operation to slide a touchposition on touch panel 13 while touching the area. CPU 31 can detectthe operation for moving seal image 291 by referring to touch positiondata stored in main memory 32 in step SB60. It is noted that theprocessing for moving seal image 291 in step SB61 is performed only whenthe operation for moving seal image 291 above is performed, and it isnot performed when an input to touch panel 13 is not provided or when anoperation other than such an operation is performed. Subsequent to stepSB61, processing in step SB62 is performed.

In step SB62, CPU 31 performs processing for zoom-in/out of edited image281 displayed on lower LCD 12. The processing in step SB62 is the sameas in step SB54 above. In the seal mode, when the magnification foredited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12 is changed, seal image 291 isalso zoomed in or out in accordance with zoom in or out of edited image281, and a ratio between a size of edited image 281 and a size of sealimage 291 is not changed. In the following step SB63, CPU 31 performsprocessing for moving edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. Theprocessing in step SB63 is the same as in step SB55 above. Subsequent tostep SB63, processing in step SB64 is performed.

In step SB64, CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the editionmode. The processing in step SB64 is the same as in step SB56 above.When a result of determination in step SB64 indicates Yes, theprocessing in step SB51 is performed again. On the other hand, when theresult in step SB64 indicates No, processing in step SB65 is performed.

In step SB65, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editionprocessing. The processing in step SB65 is the same as in step SB57above. When a result of determination in step SB65 indicates Yes,processing in step SB72 which will be described later is performed. Onthe other hand, when the result of determination in step SB65 indicatesNo, the processing in step SB60 is performed again.

As described above, the processing in the seal mode (steps SB60 to SB65)is repeated until the result of determination in step SB64 indicates Yesor until the result of determination in step SB65 indicates No. Sealimage 291 is added to edited image 281 in the seal mode, and the usercan arrange a seal image at a desired position by providing an input totouch panel 13.

On the other hand, when the result of determination in step SB58indicates No, that is, when the current edition mode is set to theeraser mode, processing in steps SB66 to SB71 is performed. In theeraser mode as well, as in the pen mode and the seal mode, edited image281 is displayed on LCDs 12 and 22, and images 264 to 270 for performingvarious operations are displayed on lower LCD 12. Further, in the erasermode, input trail 283 and seal image 291 added during a period from thetime of start of the edition processing to the time of transition to theeraser mode are displayed together with edited image 281 on LCDs 12 and22.

In step SB66, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. The processingin step SB66 is the same as in step SB52 above. In the following stepSB67, CPU 31 erases the image of input trail 283 or seal image 291 onedited image 281 in accordance with the input to touch panel 13.Specifically, when touch position data obtained in step SB66 indicates aposition in an area where input trail 283 or seal image 291 added toedited image 281 is displayed, CPU 31 erases the image added at theposition in edited image 281. Then, CPU 31 causes LCDs 12 and 22 todisplay edited image 281 from which the image has been erased. It isnoted that the processing for erasing an image in step SB67 is performedonly when a touch input to the area of input trail 283 or the area ofseal image 291 is provided, and it is not performed when an input totouch panel 13 is not performed or when a touch input to an area otherthan the area of input trail 283 and seal image 291 is provided.Subsequent to step SB67, processing in step SB68 is performed.

In step SB68, CPU 31 performs processing for zooming in/out edited image281 displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB69, CPU 31 performs processingfor moving edited image 281. The processing in steps SB68 and SB69 isthe same as in steps SB54 and SB55 above, respectively.

In the following step SB70, CPU 31 determines whether or not to changethe edition mode. The processing in step SB70 is the same as in stepSB56 above. When a result of determination in step SB70 indicates Yes,the processing in step SB51 is performed again. On the other hand, whenthe result of determination in step SB70 indicates No, processing instep SB71 is performed.

In step SB71, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the editionprocessing. The processing in step SB71 is the same as in step SB57above. When a result of determination in step SB71 indicates Yes,processing in step SB72 is performed. On the other hand, when the resultof determination in step SB71 indicates No, the processing in step SB66is performed again.

As described above, the processing in the eraser mode (steps SB66 toSB71) is repeated until the result of determination in step SB640indicates Yes or until the result of determination in step SB71indicates No. In the eraser mode, the image of input trail 283 and sealimage 291 is erased in accordance with an input to touch panel 13.

When end of the edition processing is determined in step SB57, SB65, orSB71 above, the processing in step SB72 is performed. In step SB72, CPU31 determines whether or not to store edited image 281 edited in theedition processing. Determination is made by determining whether a touchinput to any of stop instruction image 287 and completion instructionimage 288 has been provided or not based on the touch position dataobtained in step SB52, SB60 or SB66. In other words, when a touch inputto the area of stop instruction image 287 has been provided, CPU 31stops the edition processing, that is, determines not to store theedited image. On the other hand, when a touch input to the area ofcompletion instruction image 288 has been provided, CPU 31 completes theedition processing, that is, determines to store the edited image. Whena result of determination in step SB72 indicates Yes, processing in stepSB73 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determinationin step SB72 indicates No, CPU 31 skips the processing in step SB73 andends the edition processing shown in FIG. 43.

In step SB73, CPU 31 stores (saves) edited image 281 in data memory 34for storage. It is noted that edited image 281 may be written over thestored image before the edition processing or stored separately from thestored image before the edition processing, or the user may be caused toselect between writing of edited image 281 over the stored image beforethe edition processing or storage of edited image 281 separatelytherefrom. Further, edited image 281 may be stored in memory card 28instead of in data memory 34 for storage. Subsequent to step SB73, CPU31 ends the edition processing shown in FIG. 43.

According to the edition processing described above, the user can add acharacter and a drawing to an edited image by providing an input to drawa trail on touch panel 13. Further, the user can add a seal image at adesired position on the edited image.

Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 41, subsequentto the edition processing (step SB43) above, processing in step SB44 isperformed. In step SB44, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end thephotographing processing. Specifically, CPU 31 determines whether powerbutton 14F has been pressed or not. When a result of determination instep SB44 indicates No, CPU 31 performs the processing in step SB31again. Thereafter, the processing loop of steps SB31 to SB44 isrepeatedly performed until end of the photographing processing isdetermined in step SB44. On the other hand, when the result ofdetermination in step SB44 is affirmative, CPU 31 ends the photographingprocessing shown in FIG. 41.

Through the photographing processing described above, the user can storethe image picked-up by the camera in accordance with the photographinginstruction. In the present variation, two display devices are included,a currently picked-up image is displayed on one of the display devices,and an operation screen and a previously taken image are displayed onthe other display device. Thus, as the user can perform a photographingoperation while looking at the currently taken image displayed on upperLCD 22 as well as the operation screen and the previously taken image,user-friendly game device 10 can be provided. Further, in the presentvariation, by providing touch panel 13 on lower LCD 12, an operation ismore easily performed.

<Calendar Function>

A calendar function launched when a touch input of calendar button 106is made in the image displayed in the multifunctional photographingprocessing shown in FIG. 31 will now be described with reference to FIG.46.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed in calendar processingaccording to the present embodiment. It is noted that the image shown inFIG. 46 is displayed on upper LCD 22 while the image displayed in themultifunctional photographing processing shown in FIG. 31 is displayedon lower LCD 12. When a touch input of calendar button 106 is then made,the image shown in FIG. 46 is now displayed on lower LCD 12 with adisplay effect as if the image moved from upper LCD 22 to lower LCD 12.

As shown in FIG. 46, various buttons 302, 303, 304, and 305 in additionto a calendar image 306 of one month are displayed on lower LCD 12. Whena touch input of any date included in calendar image 306 is made and ifa picked-up image taken on the date indicated with the touch input, amemo input on that date or the like has been stored in any of mainmemory 32, data memory 34 for storage, and memory card 28, acorresponding picked-up image and/or memo is read and the contentthereof is displayed on upper LCD 22.

Scroll buttons 304 and 305 are button images for selecting displayedcalendar image 306. Namely, when a touch input of scroll button 304 or305 is made, month and year displayed as calendar image 306 issuccessively changed.

A memo button 303 is a button image for performing an operation to storea memo input by the user in data memory 34 for storage or the like incorrespondence with the designated date. Namely, when a touch input ofmemo button 303 is made, switching to a not-shown memo content acceptingscreen is made so that the user can input any character or graphic byusing touch pen 27 etc. on the memo content accepting screen.

An end button 302 is a button image for performing an operation to endthe calendar processing. Namely, when a touch input of end button 302 ismade, the calendar processing ends and the image shown in FIG. 46 isdisplayed on upper LCD 22 with a display effect as if the image movedfrom lower LCD 12 to upper LCD 22, and substantially at the same time,the image shown in FIG. 46 is again displayed on lower LCD 12.

8. Image Communication Function

<Overview>

Processing provided by an image communication program executed as aresult of launch of communication application program 55 will now bedescribed with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55. Prior to description of aspecific processing operation, an exemplary display manner on lower LCD12 and/or upper LCD 22 through execution of the image communicationprocessing, exemplary connection to another device, and the like willinitially be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary image communicationsystem in which a plurality of game devices 10 are connected to eachother. FIGS. 48 and 49 are diagrams showing exemplary screen displayprovided on lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 of game device 10 beforedetermination as to whether game device 10 should serve as atransmission-end device or a reception-end device. FIGS. 50 to 54 arediagrams showing exemplary screen display provided in the first stage tothe fifth stage of a communication application program respectively, onlower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 of each of transmission-end game device 10t 1 and reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3. FIG. 55 is adiagram showing exemplary screen display provided on lower LCD 12 andupper LCD 22 of each of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 andreception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 when communication isdisconnected.

In FIG. 47, a plurality of game devices 10 transmit and receive imagedata such as a photograph (picked-up image) and the like throughwireless communication. As described above, game device 10 can establishwireless communication with another game device 10 through wirelesscommunication module 38 or local communication module 39, however, anexample in which game device 10 establishes wireless communication togame devices of the same type through local communication module 39based on a prescribed communication scheme will be described here. Inorder to make the description specific, it is assumed that each of gamedevices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3 shown in FIG. 47 is a transmission-end gamedevice 10 t serving to transmit image data and each of game devices 10 r1 to 10 r 3 is a reception-end game device 10 r serving to receive imagedata.

In the present embodiment, a user is allowed to select whether his/hergame device is to serve to transmit image data or to serve to receiveimage data when the image communication program is executed. Namely,whether game device 10 serves as a transmission-end game device or areception-end game device is determined based on user's selection. It isnoted, however, that a transmission-end device for executing only atransmission-end program may be different from a reception-end devicefor executing only a reception-end program.

Transmission-end game device 10 t includes game device 10 t 1 used by auser “Ichiro”, game device 10 t 2 used by a user “Taro”, and game device10 t 3 used by a user “Hanako”. On the other hand, reception-end gamedevice 10 r includes game device 10 r 1 used by a user “Jiro”, gamedevice 10 r 2 used by a user “Saburo”, and game device 10 r 3 used by auser “Shiro”. Here, transmission-end game devices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3perform broadcast transmission of signals (transmitter data) indicatingthat transmission-end game devices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3 are transmitters ofimage data. An example in which the users “Jiro”, “Saburo” and “Shiro”receive image data from game device 10 t 1 serving as a transmitter usedby the user “Ichiro” among transmission-end game devices 10 t will bedescribed. “Ichiro”, “Taro” and the like represent a user name stored ina main body of game device 10, and a user may set any user name. Theuser name is stored in preset data memory 35, data memory 34 for storageor the like in the main body of game device 10.

Initially, for example on lower LCD 12 of each game device 10,information for inquiring of a user whether a storage memory in the mainbody (for example, data memory 34 for storage) or a memory card (forexample, memory card 28) is to be used is displayed (FIG. 48). The userof game device 10 can select a storage medium to be used by performing atouch operation for selection from among options displayed on lower LCD12 through touch panel 13.

Next, for example on lower LCD 12 of each game device 10, informationfor inquiring of a user whether a photograph is to be transmitted toanother game device or to be received from another game device isdisplayed (FIG. 49). When the user of game device 10 performs a touchoperation for selection from among options displayed on lower LCD 12through touch panel 13, the user can determine whether his/her gamedevice is to serve as a transmitter (for example, transmission-end gamedevice 10 t 1, 10 t 2 or 10 t 3) or as a receiver (for example,reception-end game device 10 rl, 10 r 2 or 10 r 3).

For example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r3, a message that it is searching for game device 10 t to serve as atransmitter (for example, character information indicating that“searching for transmitter from which you receive photograph”) isdisplayed until the transmitter data is received from transmission-endgame device 10 t (the right drawing in FIG. 50). On the other hand, forexample on lower LCD 12 of transmission-end game device 10 t 1, amessage that it is searching for game device 10 r to serve as a receiver(for example, character information indicating that “searching forreceiver to which you transmit photograph”) is displayed while itinvites a request for image data reception from reception-end gamedevice 10 by transmitting the transmitter data above (the left drawingin FIG. 50).

Next, when reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 receive thetransmitter data from transmission-end game devices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3,for example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r3, information indicating a user name of transmitter game device 10 tfrom which the transmitter data has been received is displayed. Forexample, user names Nt1 to Nt3 of respective transmission-end gamedevices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3 are displayed on lower LCD 12 of reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 in an example in the right drawing in FIG.51. A user of each of reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3performs through touch panel 13, a touch operation to touch one of usernames Nt1 to Nt3 displayed on lower LCD 12, so that the user can selectone of transmission-end game devices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3 as a transmitter.When the user of each of reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3performs the operation to select a transmitter, reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 transmit receiver data representing a receptionrequest to any selected transmission-end game devices 10 t 1 to 10 t 3.

On the other hand, when transmission-end game device 10 t 1 receives thereceiver data from reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3,information indicating a user name of game device 10 r serving as areceiver from which the receiver data has been received is displayed,for example on lower LCD 12. In the example shown in the left drawing inFIG. 51, on lower LCD 12 of transmission-end game device 10 t 1, usernames Nr1 to Nr3 of respective reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r3 that have issued a reception request are displayed. In the presentembodiment, transmission-end game device 10 t 1 has no right to select areception-end device from among a plurality of displayed reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 and it is only allowed to determinewhether to transmit image data to all displayed reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 or to stop transmission. For example, when auser of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 performs through touch panel13, a touch operation to touch an operation button icon Bs representing“start” displayed on lower LCD 12, transition to image transmissionprocessing can be made.

Next, transmission-end game device 10 t 1 performs processing forselecting an image to be transmitted, from among images stored in amemory (for example, data memory 34 for storage) in the main body ofgame device 10 t 1 or in a memory card (for example, memory card 28).Though an image taken by game device 10 t 1 is typically transmitted,another image (for example, an image received from another device or astored image other than a taken image) may be transmitted. For example,in an example shown in the left drawing in FIG. 52, thumbnail images ofimages stored in data memory 34 for storage of game device 10 t 1 ormemory card 28 are displayed in a thumbnail display area At on lower LCD12. Further, the thumbnail images displayed in thumbnail display area Atare scrolled to the right or left by performing a touch operation totouch a scroll button icon Bl or Br through touch panel 13 for display.A user of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 can select a thumbnailimage surrounded by a cursor C displayed on lower LCD 12 as an image tobe transmitted. Here, a thumbnail image IM (that is, an image to betransmitted) surrounded by cursor C is displayed on upper LCD 22. Whenthe user of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 performs through touchpanel 13, a touch operation to touch an operation button icon Btrepresenting “transmit” displayed on lower LCD 12, image data of imageIM currently selected as an image to be transmitted can be transmitted.When the user of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 performs a touchoperation through touch panel 13 to touch an operation button icon Bfrepresenting “end” displayed on lower LCD 12, the image transmissionprocessing itself can end.

On the other hand, for example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, a message that a user of transmission-end gamedevice 10 t 1 is selecting an image (for example, character informationindicating that “waiting for selection of photograph by transmitter”) isdisplayed while the user of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 isselecting an image to be transmitted (the right drawing in FIG. 52).

Next, transmission-end game device 10 t 1 outputs to each ofreception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, image data of image IMselected as an image to be transmitted from among images stored in thememory in the main body of game device 10 t 1 or in the memory card.Here, on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 of transmission-end gamedevice 10 t 1, a message that selected image IM is being transmittedfrom game device 10 t 1 to reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3is displayed. For example, as shown in the left drawing in FIG. 53,image IM being transmitted is displayed on upper LCD 22 and characterinformation indicating that “transmitting photograph” is displayed onlower LCD 12.

On the other hand, for example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, a message indicating that the image data isbeing received from transmission-end game device 10 t 1 (for example,character information indicating that “receiving photograph”) isdisplayed while the image data is being transmitted fromtransmission-end game device 10 t 1 (the right drawing in FIG. 53).

Next, when reception of the image data transmitted from transmission-endgame device 10 t 1 ends, for example on upper LCD 22 of reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, image IM represented by the image datareceived from transmitter game device 10 t 1 is displayed, and a user isurged to determine whether or not to further receive image data fromgame device 10 t 1. For example, as shown in the right drawing in FIG.54, received image IM is displayed on upper LCD 22 and characterinformation indicating that “photograph has been received. Do you wantmore?” is displayed on lower LCD 12. When a user of each ofreception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 performs through touch panel13, a touch operation to touch an operation button icon By of “YES”displayed on lower LCD 12, the user can request further reception ofimage data from transmitter game device 10 t 1. Here, the screendescribed in connection with the right drawing in FIG. 52 is displayedon reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, and reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 wait until a user of transmission-end gamedevice 10 t 1 selects again an image to be transmitted. Further, whenthe user of each of reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 performsthrough touch panel 13, a touch operation to touch an operation buttonicon Bn of “NO” displayed on lower LCD 12, subsequent reception of imagedata can be stopped to disconnect communication with transmission-endgame device 10 t 1.

On the other hand, when transmission of the image data to reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 ends, transmitted image IM is displayed,for example, on upper LCD 22 of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 anda message that reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 aredetermining whether or not to further receive image data is displayed.For example, as shown in the left drawing in FIG. 54, transmitted imageIM is displayed on upper LCD 22 and character information indicatingthat “receiver is still thinking whether or not to receive more” isdisplayed on lower LCD 12. When information indicating whether or not tofurther receive image data is obtained from all reception-end gamedevices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 and a reception request for requesting furtherreception of image data is received from at least one of reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, the screen described in connection withthe left drawing in FIG. 52 is displayed and the user oftransmission-end game device 10 t 1 selects again an image to betransmitted.

When users of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 and/or reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 perform an operation for ending the imagetransmission processing, information inquiring of a user whether or nota photograph is to be transmitted to another game device or to bereceived from another game device as shown in FIG. 49 is displayed, forexample on lower LCD 12 of each game device 10, and the processdescribed above is repeated. When all reception-end game devices 10 r 1to 10 r 3 end reception from transmission-end game device 10 t 1 or whentransmission-end game device 10 t 1 ends transmission to reception-endgame devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3, a message that communication wasdisconnected is displayed. For example, as shown in the left drawing andthe right drawing in FIG. 55, when communication is disconnected,character information indicating that “communication was disconnected”is displayed, for example, on lower LCD 12 of each of transmission-endgame device 10 t 1 and reception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3. Whenthe user of each of transmission-end game device 10 t 1 andreception-end game devices 10 r 1 to 10 r 3 performs through touch panel13, a touch operation to touch operation button icon By of “YES”displayed on lower LCD 12, the process returns to an initial stage ofthe image transmission processing and new image transmission processingis started.

<Data Structure>

Next, various data to be used for executing the image communicationapplication program will now be described with reference to FIG. 56.FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example of various data stored inmain memory 32 in accordance with execution of the image communicationapplication program.

In FIG. 56, main memory 32 stores programs read from memory cards 28 and29 and data memory 34 for storage and temporary data generated inprocessing. In FIG. 56, operation data Da, identification data Db, userdata Dc, transmitter data Dd, receiver data De, image data Df, and thelike are stored in a data storage area of main memory 32. Further,various programs Pa including the image communication applicationprogram and the like are stored in a program storage area of main memory32.

Operation data Da includes data of a touch coordinate representing atouch position TP in a screen coordinate system of touch panel 13touched by a player (touch coordinate point data) and data representinga state of operation of operation button group 14 by a player (operationbutton data). For example, the touch coordinate data and the operationbutton data are acquired every unit time (for example, 1/60 sec.) inwhich game device 10 performs game processing, and they are updated andstored as operation data Da when acquired.

Identification data Db includes data representing a uniqueidentification number for identifying game device 10. For example, datarepresenting an own device ID set in advance in preset data memory 35 orthe like of game device 10 is stored as identification data Db. The owndevice ID may be stored as a unique serial number assigned in amanufacturing plant or as identification information generated at randomin game device 10.

User data Dc includes data representing a user name set in advance by auser of game device 10. For example, in preset data memory 35 or thelike of game device 10, a user name input by a user is described anddata representing the user name is stored therein as user data Dc.

Transmitter data Dd includes data representing the identification numberand the user name of game device 10 serving as a transmitter when imagedata is transmitted and received. Receiver data De includes datarepresenting the identification number and the user name of game device10 serving as a receiver when image data is transmitted and received.

Image data Df includes transmitted image data Df1, received image dataDf2, operation image data Df3, and the like. As transmitted image dataDf1, image data of an image to be transmitted to another game device 10is temporarily stored. As received image data Df2, image data of animage received from another game device 10 is temporarily stored.Operation image data Df3 is image data representing operation buttonsfor operating game device 10 and information of which the user is to beinformed.

<Processing Procedure>

A specific processing operation based on the image communicationapplication program executed by game device 10 will now be descried withreference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an examplein which game device 10 performs image communication processing byexecuting the image communication application program. FIG. 58illustrates sub routine showing in detail an operation in imagetransmission processing performed in step SC52 in FIG. 57. FIG. 59illustrates sub routine showing in detail an operation in imagereception processing performed in step SC53 in FIG. 57. FIG. 60 is adiagram showing exemplary signals transmitted and received between gamedevice 10 t serving as a transmitter and game device 10 r serving as areceiver. A program for performing the processing is included in aprogram stored in data memory 34 for storage, and when power of gamedevice 10 is turned on, the program is read from data memory 34 forstorage into main memory 32 through memory control circuit 33 andexecuted by CPU 31. Though the image communication application programis stored in advance in data memory 34 for storage in the presentembodiment, the program may be downloaded to game device 10 through theInternet or the like. Further, the program stored in memory card 28 ormemory card 29 may be read and executed.

Initially, when power of game device 10 (power button 14F) is turned on,CPU 31 executes a boot program (not shown) so that a launcher programstored in data memory 34 for storage for selectively executing aplurality of application programs is loaded to main memory 32 andexecuted by CPU 31. Thereafter, an image communication application isselected and executed on the launcher program, so that the imagecommunication application program is loaded to main memory 32. Theloaded image communication application program is executed by CPU 31.

The image communication application program in the present embodimentincludes not only an image communication function but also aphotographing function and a taken image display function to display ataken image. A user can selectively perform a function through anoperation of the touch panel and the buttons. When the photographingfunction is selected here, a video image picked-up by the cameracurrently selected from inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 is displayedon lower LCD 12 in real time. When L button 14I or R button 14J isoperated in this state, the photographing processing is performed tostore the taken image in a storage medium selected from the storagememory in the main body (for example, data memory 34 for storage) and amemory card (for example, memory card 28). The taken image may bedisplayed on lower LCD 12 immediately after photographing. Further, whenthe taken image display function is selected, images desired by a userfrom among the taken images stored in the storage medium selected fromthe storage memory in the main body and the memory card may be displayedone by one or in a list. Further, before selection of each function, auser selects whether the storage memory in the main body or the memorycard is to be used, so that storage means selected here serves to storethe taken image in the photographing function and serves as a source ofreading of an image to be displayed in the taken image display function.An image to be transmitted from the transmission-end device in the imagecommunication function is read from this selected storage means, and animage received by the reception-end device is also stored in thisselected storage means. When a user selects and performs the imagecommunication function, processing in step SC51 and subsequent stepsshown in FIG. 57 is performed.

In FIG. 57, CPU 31 determines whether a memory in the main body (forexample, data memory 34 for storage) or a memory card (for example,memory card 28) is to be used in subsequent processing based onoperation data Da (step SC50). For example, an indication urging a userto select whether to use the storage memory in the main body or thememory card is provided on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 of gamedevice 10 (see FIG. 48). CPU 31 then determines which storage medium isto be used in accordance with the user's operation for selection fromamong the options. When the memory card is to be used, the processproceeds to next step SC57. On the other hand, when the storage memoryin the main body is to be used, the process proceeds to next step SC51.

In step SC57, CPU 31 determines whether the memory card (for example,memory card 28) for storing an image in game device 10 is attached to aconnector of game device 10 or not. When the memory card above isattached to the connector of game device 10, the process proceeds tostep SC51. On the other hand, when the memory card above is not attachedto the connector of game device 10, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 and/orupper LCD 22 to display notification for urging a user to attach thememory card (step SC58), and the process returns to step SC50 and theprocessing is repeated.

In step SC51, CPU 31 determines whether an image is to be transmitted toanother game device 10 r or received from another game device 10 t insubsequent processing based on operation data Da. For example, anindication urging a user to select whether or not a photograph is to betransmitted to another game device 10 r or to be received from anothergame device 10 t is provided on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 of gamedevice 10 (see FIG. 49). CPU 31 then determines whether an image is tobe transmitted to another game device 10 r or to be received fromanother game device 10 t in accordance with the user's operation forselection from among the options. When an image is to be transmitted toanother game device 10 r, the process proceeds to next step SC52. On theother hand, when an image is to be received from another game device 10t, the process proceeds to next step SC53.

In step SC52, CPU 31 performs image transmission processing and theprocess proceeds to next step SC54. Detailed operation in the imagetransmission processing performed in step SC52 above will be describedhereinafter with reference to FIG. 58.

In FIG. 58, CPU 31 performs broadcast transmission of transmitter dataindicating that the own device is a transmitter of image data, forexample through local communication module 39 (step SC63), and theprocess proceeds to next step SC. For example, CPU 31 generates thetransmitter data by using data representing the identification numberand the user name stored as identification data Db and user data Dcrespectively, and has the generated data stored as transmitter data Dd.Then, broadcast transmission of the transmitter data stored astransmitter data Dd is performed, so that another game device 10 r thatcan receive the transmitter data is informed of presence of game device10 to serve as a transmitter (see FIG. 60).

Next, CPU 31 searches for another game device 10 r to serve as areceiver (step SC64) and the process to a next step. As will beclarified in the description below, another game device 10 r to serve asthe receiver selects game device 10 t to serve as a transmitter fromwhich reception is desired, based on the received transmitter data. Thereceiver data indicating that another game device 10 r serves as thereceiver of image data is transmitted to selected game device 10 tserving as the transmitter (see FIG. 60). In step SC64 above, CPU 31waits until the receiver data is received, for example through localcommunication module 39. When the receiver data is received, CPU 31 thendescribes the identification number and the user name of another gamedevice 10 r to serve as the receiver, that are represented by thereceiver data, as receiver data De. While another game device 10 r toserve as the receiver is being searched for, CPU 31 causes, for example,lower LCD 12 to display notification that game device 10 r to serve asthe receiver is currently being searched for (see the left drawing inFIG. 50). Further, when the receiver data is received from another gamedevice 10 r serving as the receiver, CPU 31 causes, for example, lowerLCD 12 to display information indicating the user name of another gamedevice 10 r serving as the receiver that is represented by the receiverdata (see user names Nr1 to Nr3 in the left drawing in FIG. 51).

Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not to start processing fortransmitting an image to another game device 10 r serving as thereceiver as a result of search based on operation data Da (step SC65).For example, CPU 31 provides an indication (operation button icon Bs) onlower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 urging a user to perform an operationfor starting the image transmission processing. In response to theuser's operation for starting the image transmission processing, it isdetermined that the processing is to be started, and the processproceeds to next step SC66. On the other hand, when the processing fortransmitting an image is not to be started, the process returns to stepSC64 above, and search for another game device 10 r to serve as thereceiver is continued.

In a period from determination of start of the image transmissionprocessing to determination of an image to be transmitted, game device10 t serving as the transmitter transmits transmission ready dataindicating that transmission to game device 10 r serving as the receiveris ready. On the other hand, when game device 10 r serving as thereceiver is ready to receive image data, game device 10 r serving as thereceiver transmits reception ready data indicating that reception ofimage data is ready to game device 10 t serving as the transmitter, inresponse to reception of the transmission ready data (see FIG. 60).

In step SC66, CPU 31 determines, based on operation data Da, whether animage to be transmitted to another game device 10 r has been selected ornot. For example, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 todisplay a screen for allowing a user to select an image to betransmitted to another game device 10 r (see the left drawing in FIG.52), so as to urge the user to select an image to be transmitted. Then,the process proceeds to next step SC69 in response to the user'soperation to determine an image to be transmitted (for example, anoperation to touch operation button icon Bt). On the other hand, whenthe user does not perform the operation to determine an image to betransmitted (No in step SC66), the process proceeds to next step SC67.

In step SC69, CPU 31 transmits image data representing a transmittedimage selected in step SC66 above to another game device 10 r serving asthe receiver, and the process proceeds to a next step. For example, CPU31 extracts the image data corresponding to the transmitted imageselected in step SC66 from the storage medium selected in step SC50above, and has the extracted image data stored as transmitted image dataDf1. CPU 31 then identifies another game device 10 r currently servingas the receiver by referring to receiver data De, and transmits theimage data stored as transmitted image data Df1 to identified anothergame device 10 r, for example, through local communication module 39(see FIG. 60). While the image data is transmitted to another gamedevice 10 r serving as the receiver, CPU 31 provides an indication, forexample on lower LCD 12, that the image data is being transmitted togame device 10 r currently serving as the receiver (see the left drawingin FIG. 53).

Next, CPU 31 waits for a receiver response transmitted from each gamedevice 10 r serving as the receiver (step SC70). The receiver responseincludes a response indicating further reception of image data(reception request) or a response indicating end of reception (end ofreception). After receiving the image data, each game device 10 rserving as the receiver transmits any response to game device 10 tserving as the transmitter (see FIG. 60). CPU 31 waits for a responsefrom all game devices 10 r currently serving as the receiver. When thereception request is received from at least one game device 10 r servingas the receiver (Yes in step SC71), the process returns to step SC66above and the processing is repeated. On the other hand, when CPU 31waits for a response from all game devices 10 r currently serving as thereceiver and the end of reception is received from all game devices 10 rserving as the receiver (No in step SC71), CPU 31 ends the processing inthe sub routine. When CPU 31 receives the end of reception from gamedevice 10 r serving as the receiver, CPU 31 erases data of game device10 r serving as the receiver from receiver data De. Further, while CPU31 waits for the response from another game device 10 r serving as thereceiver, CPU 31 provides an indication, for example on lower LCD 12,that the response from game device 10 r currently serving as thereceiver is awaited (see the left drawing in FIG. 54).

On the other hand, when the user has not yet performed the operation todetermine a transmitted image in step SC66 above, CPU 31 determineswhether or not to end the processing for transmitting an image based onoperation data Da (step SC67). For example, CPU 31 determines whether ornot to end the processing for transmitting an image in accordance with auser's operation (for example, an operation to touch operation buttonicon Bf). When the processing for transmitting an image should end, CPU31 transmits data indicating that transmission should end (end oftransmission; see FIG. 60) to each game device 10 r currently serving asthe receiver (step SC68), and the processing in the sub routine ends. Onthe other hand, when the processing for transmitting an image should notend, the process returns to step SC66 above and the processing isrepeated.

Referring back to FIG. 57, following the image transmission processingin step SC52 above, CPU 31 determines whether or not a receiver isabsent (step SC54). For example, when determination in step SC71 aboveindicates No (that is, end of reception is received from all gamedevices 10 r serving as the receiver), CPU 31 determines that noreceiver exists. When no receiver exists, the process proceeds to nextstep SC56. On the other hand, when determination in step SC67 aboveindicates Yes (that is, when the user selects end of transmission), CPU31 disconnects communication with game device 10 r serving as thereceiver. The process returns to step SC51 above and the processing isrepeated.

CPU 31 performs the image reception processing in step SC53 and theprocess proceeds to next step SC55. Detailed operation in the imagereception processing performed in step SC53 above will be describedhereinafter with reference to FIG. 59.

In FIG. 59, CPU 31 receives the transmitter data indicating atransmitter of image data (step SC84) and the process proceeds to a nextstep. Here, as described above, game device 10 t serving as atransmitter performs broadcast transmission of the transmitter dataindicating that game device 10 t is a transmitter of image data, forexample, through local communication module 39 (see FIG. 60). In stepSC84 above, when CPU 31 receives the transmitter data transmittedthrough broadcast transmission, CPU 31 can know presence of another gamedevice 10 t serving as a transmitter. When CPU 31 receives thetransmitter data, CPU 31 acquires the identification number and the username of game device 10 t serving as the transmitter that are representedby the transmitter data and describes the identification number and theuser name as transmitter data Dd.

While another game device 10 t serving as a transmitter is beingsearched for, CPU 31 provides an indication, for example on lower LCD12, that game device 10 t serving as a transmitter is currently beingsearched for (see the right drawing in FIG. 50). Further, when thetransmitter data is received from another game device 10 t serving asthe transmitter, CPU 31 causes, for example, lower LCD 12 to displayinformation indicating the user name of another game device 10 t servingas the transmitter, that is represented by the transmitter data (see theright drawing in FIG. 51).

Next, CPU 31 determines, based on operation data Da, whether or not atransmitter has been determined from among game devices 10 t serving asthe transmitter that have been searched for (step SC85). For example,CPU 31 provides an indication urging selection from informationindicating the user name of another game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter, on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 (see user names Nt1 toNt3 in the right drawing in FIG. 51). In accordance with a user'soperation to select any of the user names, the selected user isdetermined as a transmitter from which an image is to be received, andthe process proceeds to next step SC86. On the other hand, when atransmitter from which an image is to be received is not determined, theprocess returns to step SC84 above, and search for another game device10 t serving as the transmitter is continued.

In step SC86, CPU 31 transmits receiver data indicating that the owndevice is a receiver of image data to another game device 10 t to serveas the transmitter, for example, through local communication module 39,and the process proceeds to a next step. For example, CPU 31 generatesthe receiver data by using the identification number and the user namestored as identification data Db and user data Dc respectively, and hasthe generated data stored as receiver data De. When the receiver datastored as receiver data De is transmitted to another game device 10 tserving as the transmitter, another game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter that has received the receiver data is informed of presenceand the user name of game device 10 serving as a receiver (see FIG. 60).

In a period from determination of start of the image transmissionprocessing to determination of an image to be transmitted in anothergame device 10 t serving as the transmitter, transmission ready dataindicating that transmission to game device 10 r serving as the receiveris ready is transmitted. Here, when game device 10 r serving as thereceiver is ready to receive image data, game device 10 r serving as thereceiver transmits reception ready data indicating that reception of theimage data is ready to another game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter, in response to reception of the transmission ready data(see FIG. 60).

Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not data indicating end oftransmission has been received from another game device 10 t serving asthe transmitter (step SC87), determines whether or not the user hasperformed an operation to end reception (step SC88) based on operationdata Da, and determines whether or not the image data has been receivedfrom another game device 10 t serving as the transmitter (step SC89).For example, when another game device 10 t serving as the transmitter isselecting an image to be transmitted, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 and/orupper LCD 22 to display a screen indicating that the receiver is waitingfor selection of a photograph by the transmitter (see the right drawingin FIG. 52) and informs a user of a current state. In accordance withthe user's operation to stop reception of an image (for example, anoperation to touch operation button icon Bf), CPU 31 determines that auser has performed an operation to cancel reception (Yes in step SC88)and the process proceeds to next step SC93. Further, when end oftransmission is received from another game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter (see step SC68 in FIG. 58, and FIG. 60) (Yes in step SC87),CPU 31 ends the processing in the sub routine. Further, when receptionof image data from another game device 10 t serving as the transmitteris started (see step SC69 in FIG. 58, and FIG. 60) (Yes in step SC89),the process proceeds to next step SC90. On the other hand, when eachdetermination indicates No (that is, when determination in each of stepsSC87 to SC89 indicates No), CPU 31 repeats determination in steps SC87to SC89.

In step SC90, CPU 31 has the image data received from another gamedevice 10 t (see FIG. 60) stored as received image data Df2. CPU 31 thencauses the storage medium selected in step SC50 above to store the imagedata stored as received image data Df2, and the process proceeds to anext step. Here, when reception of the image data from another gamedevice 10 t is started, CPU 31 causes, for example, lower LCD 12 todisplay a message that the image data is currently being received fromgame device 10 t serving as the transmitter while the image data isreceived (see the right drawing in FIG. 53).

Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not to further receive an image fromanother game device 10 t serving as the transmitter based on operationdata Da. For example, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 todisplay a screen for having a user determine whether or not to furtherreceive an image from another game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter (see the right drawing in FIG. 54) and urges the user tomake selection. The process proceeds to next step SC92 in accordancewith the user's operation to request further reception of an image (forexample, an operation to touch operation button icon By). On the otherhand, the process proceeds to next step SC93 in accordance with theuser's operation to end reception of an image (for example, an operationto touch operation button icon Bn).

In step SC92, CPU 31 transmits to another game device 10 t serving asthe transmitter, data indicating further reception of image data(reception request; see FIG. 60), and the process returns to step SC87and the processing is repeated.

On the other hand, in step SC93, CPU 31 transmits to another game device10 t serving as the transmitter, data indicating that reception shouldend (end of reception: see FIG. 60), and the processing in the subroutine ends. In determination in step SC88, reception may automaticallybe canceled regardless of a user's operation. For example, a remainingstorage capacity of the storage medium selected in step SC50 above ismonitored, and when the remaining capacity indicates an amount equal toor lower than a prescribed amount, a user may be informed that storagecapacity for 0 image is available, and the processing in step SC93 maybe performed.

Referring back to FIG. 57, after the image reception processing in stepSC53, CPU 31 determines whether or not end of transmission has beenreceived (step SC55). For example, when determination in step SC87 aboveindicates Yes (that is, when end of transmission is received from gamedevice 10 t serving as the transmitter), the process proceeds to nextstep SC56. On the other hand, when determination in step SC91 aboveindicates No (that is, when the user selects end of reception),communication with game device 10 t serving as the transmitter isdisconnected, and the process returns to step SC51 and the processing isrepeated.

In step SC56, CPU 31 performs communication disconnection processing,and the processing in the flowchart ends. For example, CPU 31 ends(disconnects) communication with another game device 10 with whichcommunication is currently established, and causes lower LCD 12 and/orupper LCD 22 to display a screen indicating that communication wasdisconnected (see the left drawing or the right drawing in FIG. 55), soas to inform a user of a current state.

Thus, when game device 10 according to the present embodiment serves asa receiver of image data, game device 10 serving as the receiver canselect a transmitter from which the image data is to be received.Therefore, when images are transmitted and received among devices, gamedevice 10 can select a transmission-end device desired by a user toreceive an image from the transmission-end device.

In the description above, though game device 10 r serving as a receiverthat receives image data has the right to select game device 10 tserving as a transmitter that transmits the image data, game device 10 tserving as the transmitter may also have the right to select game device10 r serving as the receiver that receives image data. For example, inthe processing in step SC65 above for determining start of transmission,when the user determines start of transmission after the user selectsgame device 10 r to serve as a receiver, the transmitter can also selectthe receiver. For example, when game device 10 r serving as a receiverselects a user to serve as a transmitter, a check box is provided (forexample, next to each of user names Nr1 to Nr3) for each user nameserving as the receiver displayed on a display screen of game device 10t serving as the transmitter. When a user of game device 10 t serving asthe transmitter checks the user name by performing an operation to touchthe check box provided for the user name of the receiver, image data istransmitted only to the checked user to serve as the receiver.

In the processing operation described above, game device 10 r serving asa receiver can leave a group in which images are transmitted andreceived at the time desired by a user. Further, even when game device10 r serving as the receiver leaves the group, so long as at least onegame device 10 r serving as the receiver remains, game device 10 tserving as a transmitter can continue transmission of image data. Thus,even when game device 10 r serving as the receiver leaves the group dueto lack of the remaining storage capacity, game device 10 t serving asthe transmitter and other game devices 10 r serving as the receiver arenot affected. On the other hand, transmission of image data may becontinued only when all game devices 10 r serving as the receiverrequest to continue image communication, and when at least one of gamedevices 10 r serving as the receiver leaves the group, any communicationin the group above may end.

Further, in the processing operation described above, though game device10 t to initially serve as a transmitter transmits the transmitter datathrough broadcast transmission in which data is transmitted to anunspecified large number of receivers, communication may be started inanother manner. For example, game device 10 r to initially serve as areceiver may transmit the receiver data to an unspecified large numberof transmitters, and game device 10 t to serve as the transmitter thathas received the receiver data may send back the transmitter data. Here,it is not necessary to describe as the receiver data to initially betransmitted, the user name of game device 10 r that transmits thereceiver data.

Further, in the processing procedure described above, game device 10 rto serve as a receiver that communicates with game device 10 t servingas a transmitter is determined first, and thereafter an image to betransmitted from game device 10 t to game device 10 r is selected. Thus,game device 10 t serving as the transmitter can sequentially transmitselected transmitted images to determined game device 10 r serving asthe receiver, so that various images can readily be transmitted. Whensuch an effect is not expected, however, an image to be transmitted maybe determined in another procedure. For example, game device 10 tserving as a transmitter determines an image to be transmitted toanother game device 10, and thereafter determines game device 10 r toserve as a receiver. In this case, when game device 10 t to initiallyserve as the transmitter transmits the transmitter data to anunspecified large number of receivers, and such data is transmittedtogether with data representing the image determined as an image to betransmitted. Thus, a user of game device 10 r serving as the receivercan select a transmitter from which the image data is to be receivedafter reviewing the user name of the transmitter and an image to betransmitted, so that information for selection is increased and thetransmitter that better matches expectations can be selected.

Further, in the processing procedure described above, when an operationto touch button Bt is performed, a thumbnail image surrounded by cursorC is selected as an image to be transmitted, that is, the image isselected and transmitted one by one. On the other hand, a plurality ofimages may be selected and transmitted. For example, in the left drawingin FIG. 52, in a selection operation for selecting a thumbnail imagedisplayed in thumbnail display area At (for example, an operation todirectly touch a thumbnail image), the thumbnail image is highlightedand an image corresponding to the thumbnail image is selected. Further,the selection operation is performed multiple times, so that a pluralityof images are in the selected state. The operation to touch button Btmay be performed in this state, so that the plurality of images in theselected state are transmitted.

In the former case, as an image is selected and transmitted one by one,the number of images transmitted at a time is accordingly limited toone. On the other hand, in the latter case, by limiting the number ofselectable images, the number of images transmitted at a time is limitedto the number of selectable images. Specifically, in the latter case, aprescribed number of images or more may not be selected at a time, orfurther selection of images at a time may be prohibited when the totalcapacity of selected images is equal to or greater than a prescribedcapacity. Further alternatively, the number of images transmitted at atime may be limited separately from the number of selectable images. Inthis case, the number of selectable images may be greater than thenumber of images transmitted at a time. Here, for a single imageselection operation, the image transmission processing for transmittingthe limited number of images is repeated multiple times for completingthe processing for transmitting the selected images. In any imageselection manner/image transmission limitation manner, a user ofreception-end game device 10 can cancel further reception of an imagewhile an image is being received, and can determine whether or not tocontinue reception based on the number of received images.

Further, when game device 10 t to initially serve as a transmittertransmits the transmitter data to an unspecified large number ofreceivers, the transmitter data may be transmitted together withadditional information to game device 10 r to serve as a receiver. Forexample, information indicating a title of an image or the number ofimages to be transmitted from game device 10 t serving as thetransmitter may be included in the transmitter data above andtransmitted. Thus, game device 10 r serving as the receiver can displayinformation representing a title of an image and the number of imagesincluded in the received transmitter data together with the user name ofthe transmitter, so that information for helping a user of the receiverselect a transmitter is increased and selection of a transmitter thatbetter matches expectations can be made. A user of game device 10 tserving as the transmitter may select a title of an image to be includedin the transmitter data from among predetermined typical titles, or theuser may freely input a title thereof. Further, the number of images tobe transmitted by a user of game device 10 t serving as the transmittermay be input as the number of images to be included in the transmitterdata, or the number of photographs stored in game device 10 t may beincluded as the number of images to be included in the transmitter data.

Further, screen display as described above is only by way of example,and another screen display may naturally be employed. For example,though notification that image data is being transmitted or received isdisplayed in the exemplary screen display shown in FIG. 53, notificationmay not be displayed when a time period for transmitting or receivingthe image data is extremely short.

Though a still image taken by game device 10 or the like is transmittedand received among game devices 10 in the description above, a movingimage may be transmitted and received. In this case, a moving image tobe transmitted may be a moving image taken by game device 10, a movingimage received from another device, or a stored moving image other thana taken moving image.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the processreturns to step SC51 when a user himself/herself selects end oftransmission or end of reception. Specifically, though an exemplaryoperation in which the process returns to processing for urging a userto determine whether an image is to be transmitted to another gamedevice 10 r or to be received from another game device 10 t isdescribed, the process may not return to that processing. For example,even when a user himself/herself selects end of transmission or end ofreception, the processing in step SC56 may be performed. That is,communication with another game device 10 with which communication hasbeen established may be disconnected and a screen indicating thatcommunication was disconnected may be displayed (see the left drawing orthe right drawing in FIG. 55) and the processing in the flowchart mayend.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, lower LCD 12 andupper LCD 22 physically separated from each other and disposedvertically are described by way of example of a liquid crystal displayportion having two screens (two screens of an upper screen and a lowerscreen), however, the display screen including two screens maydifferently be structured. For example, lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22may be arranged side-by-side on one main surface of lower housing 11.Alternatively, a vertically long LCD having a width equal to lower LCD12 and a length twice as large as lower LCD 12 (that is, a physicallysingle LCD having a vertical length equivalent to two display screens)may be disposed on one main surface of lower housing 11 and two imagesmay vertically be displayed (that is, two images are displayedvertically adjacent to each other, with no boundary portion beinginterposed therebetween). Alternatively, a horizontally long LCD havinga length equal to lower LCD 12 and having a width twice as large aslower LCD 12 may be disposed on one main surface of lower housing 11 andtwo game images may horizontally be displayed side-by-side (that is, twogame images may be displayed horizontally adjacent to each other, withno boundary portion being interposed therebetween). That is, aphysically single screen may be divided in two parts to display twoimages respectively. For any form of images, the present invention cansimilarly be implemented by disposing touch panel 13 on the screen fordisplaying a display image displayed on lower LCD 12 described above.Further, in a case where a physically single screen is divided into twoparts to display two images above, touch panel 13 may be disposed overthe entire screen.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, touch panel 13is integrally provided in game device 10, however, the present inventioncan also be implemented in such a manner that the game device and thetouch panel are separately provided. Further, touch panel 13 may beprovided on the upper surface of upper LCD 22 to display thereon adisplay image that has been displayed on lower LCD 12 described above.Furthermore, though two display screens (lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22)are provided in the present embodiment, a single display screen may beprovided. That is, in the present embodiment, only lower LCD 12 mayserve as a display screen and touch panel 13 may be provided thereonwithout providing upper LCD 22. In addition, in the present embodiment,touch panel 13 may be provided on the upper surface of upper LCD 22without providing lower LCD 12, and a display image that has beendisplayed on lower LCD 12 described above may be displayed on upper LCD22.

In addition, in the present embodiment, though touch panel 13 is used asinput means in game device 10 for providing a coordinate input, anotherpointing device may be used. Here, the pointing device is an inputdevice for designating an input position or a coordinate on a screen.For example, the present invention can similarly be implemented byemploying a mouse, a track pad, a track ball, or the like as input meansand by using positional information based on a screen coordinate systemcalculated from an output value output from the input means.

Furthermore, in such a stationary game device that a player enjoys agame while holding a game controller, another type of a pointing devicemay also be employed. For example, a camera securely fixed to a housingof a game controller may be used as the pointing device. In this case,an image picked-up by the camera varies depending on variation of aposition indicated by the housing of the game controller. Therefore, byanalyzing the picked-up image, a coordinate on a display screenindicated by the housing above can be calculated. The present inventioncan naturally be implemented even though game device 10 does not includea pointing device itself such as touch panel 13.

Moreover, in the present embodiment described above, though portablegame device 10 or a stationary game device is described by way ofexample, an information processing device such as a general personalcomputer may execute the image communication application program of thepresent invention so as to implement the present invention.

The shape of game device 10 described above as well as a shape, thenumber, a setting position, or the like of operation button 14 group andtouch panel 13 provided in game device 10 are only by way of example,and the present invention can naturally be implemented even though theshape, the number, and the setting position thereof may be different. Anorder of performing the steps, a screen display example, or the likeused in the image communication processing described above is only byway of example, and the present invention can naturally be implementedeven though the order of performing the steps or screen display may bedifferent.

9. Sound Function

Processing provided by the sound program executed as a result of launchof sound application program 57 will now be described with reference toFIGS. 61 to 101.

<Exemplary Usage of Game Device>

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an exemplary sound selection screen 400 ina sound function in game device 10 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 61, game device 10 according to the present embodimentincludes a plurality of functions including a function for reproductionof a recording data file freely recorded by the user through themicrophone in the main body or reproduction of a music file which ismusic data stored in an SD card, and the user can arbitrarily select adesired function on sound selection screen 400 shown in FIG. 61.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of icons 402 and 404corresponding to respective functions incorporated in game device 10 aredisplayed on the screen of lower LCD 12.

Here, when a “play with sound recorded through microphone” icon 402 isselected, transition to a microphone recording and reproduction mode ofa function allowing the user to create a recording data file by freelyrecording sound through the microphone in the main body or to reproducethe created recording data file or to edit the created recording datafile is made.

On the other hand, when a “play with music in SD card” icon 404 isselected, transition to a music reproduction mode of a function toreproduce a music file which is music data stored in the SD card ismade. In the present embodiment, for example, the music file is storedin the SD card as appropriate through a personal computer or the like,however, wireless communication module 38 described above may be used totransmit and receive data to and from a server storing music filesthrough the Internet, and a downloaded music file may be stored in theSD card.

Alternatively, when the user selects a “setting” icon 408 here, the usercan freely select a function relating to setting processing.

Alternatively, when a “quit” icon 406 is selected, a sound function endsand the screen returns to a not-shown menu screen.

In addition, in FIG. 61, an object 410 in a bird shape is displayed in alower portion of the screen of lower LCD 12. While object 410 in a birdshape is being displayed, it is assumed that an automatic recording andreproduction function which will be described later is being performed.

The music reproduction mode, which is a function to perform processingor the like for reproducing a music file which is music data stored inthe SD card, will initially be described hereinafter.

Specifically, when “play with music in SD card” icon 404 is selected,transition to the music reproduction mode is made and a musicreproduction folder list selection screen 500 is displayed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating music reproduction folder listselection screen 500 according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 62( a) shows a case where music reproduction folder list selectionscreen 500 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12.

In addition, in FIG. 62( b), a list screen 500# of music files includedin a currently selected folder is displayed on the screen of upper LCD22.

Referring to FIG. 62( a), the user can select any folder in a folderlist display range 530 in music reproduction folder list selectionscreen 500 by touching the screen of lower LCD 12 with touch pen 27 etc.For example, a case in which folders are diagonally displayed along thecircumference of a disc in folder list display range 530 is shown.

For example, it is assumed that a cursor 520 selects the folderdisplayed at the top of folder list display range 530. Processing forscroll display of the folder list in accordance with a trail of movementof the touch pen is performed by touching a position where anotherfolder is displayed in folder list display range 530 on the screen oflower LCD 12 with touch pen 27 etc. or by touching the screen and movingtouch pen 27 etc. while maintaining the touched state. In the presentexample, for example, it is assumed that the position of cursor 520 isnot changed and a folder at the top in the folder list currentlydisplayed in folder list display range 530 is set to a selected state.Therefore, processing for scroll display of the folder list is performedsuch that the disc turns in accordance with the trail of movement of thetouch pen.

In the present example, though the description is given by way ofexample, assuming that the position of cursor 520 is not changed, theposition of cursor 520 may be moved to a position in accordance with atouch position which is a position touched with touch pen 27.Specifically, when the screen is touched and thereafter an operation toreset the touched state without changing the touch position from theoriginally touched position is performed (off the screen), only cursor520 moves in accordance with the touch position. Here, the processingfor scroll display of the folder list is not performed. Specifically,when a “random” folder is touched in FIG. 62( a), only cursor 520 movesto the position of the “random” folder.

Meanwhile, when an operation to touch the screen and move touch pen 27etc. while maintaining the touched state, that is, an operation tochange the touch position from the originally touched position whilemaintaining the touched state (drag operation), is performed, theprocessing for scroll display of the folder list is performed inaccordance with the trail of movement (travel distance) of the touchpen. Here, cursor 520 can be maintained at the position of cursor 520before scroll display processing or the folder at the top of the folderlist can be set in a selected state.

In addition, when the position of cursor 520 is varied and the selectedfolder is changed, FIG. 62( b) is updated to list screen 500# of musicfiles included in the folder selected by cursor 520. Specifically, whena favorite folder which will be described later is touched, a list ofmusic files registered in the favorite folder is displayed.Alternatively, when the random folder is touched, random reproduction aswill be described later is carried out and a list of music files to bereproduced in random reproduction is displayed. In random reproduction,a file name of an already reproduced music file may be displayed, but afile name of a music file which has not yet been reproduced may bedisplayed with its name being replaced with a different symbol or thelike. Through this processing, in random reproduction, the user cannotknow a music file to be reproduced next until this music file isreproduced. Thus, the user can have expectation and enjoy reproductionof music data.

Even when the position of cursor 520 is not varied, the folder selectedby cursor 520 is changed in accordance with the processing for scrolldisplay of the folder list. Therefore, in list screen 500# displayed onthe screen of upper LCD 22, update to the list of music files in theselected folder is made.

In addition, the user can move a slider 518 on a folder list scroll bar510 displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12, by using touch pen 27 etc.

By moving slider 518 on folder list scroll bar 510, the folder listdisplayed in folder list display range 530 is updated and a folder listin accordance with the cursor position is displayed.

Moreover, the user can set a volume at which output from the speaker orthe like is provided, by designating a volume setting icon 550 withtouch pen 27 etc.

Further, the user can return to sound selection screen 400, which is apreceding screen, by selecting a “back” icon 512.

In addition, by selecting an “open” icon 514, a music file selectionscreen is displayed.

Moreover, by selecting a selection function icon 516 in FIG. 62( a), theuser can perform the function corresponding to the selection functionicon. It is assumed that display and setting of the selection functionicon are switched in correspondence with the folder currently selectedby cursor 520. Here, for example, a case where a “best 10” folder whichis one of the favorite folder is selected is shown, and selectionfunction icon 516 of “all erase” is provided in correspondence with thisfolder. When selection function icon 516 of “all erase” is selected,processing for erasing all music files registered in the best 10 folderis performed. The favorite folder which will be described later may bedisplayed when a music file is registered in the folder but it may notbe displayed when no music file is registered.

The “random” folder is displayed as a folder next to the “best 10”folder. It is assumed that, when this “random” folder is selected andexecuted, reproduction of all music files is started such that the orderof reproduction from the first file to the last file is randomlydesignated. It is then assumed that, when reproduction of the lastdesignated music file ends, reproduction is continued in such a mannerthat the order of reproduction is again randomly designated. When the“random” folder is selected, random reproduction is carried out but theorder of reproduction is designated. Therefore, reproduction can berepeated from a music file that was once reproduced. In addition, in anexample where reproduction of the last designated music file ends andthen the order of next reproduction is randomly designated, in case thatthe last designated music file happens to be the same as the first musicfile in subsequent reproduction, processing for setting the order ofreproduction again is performed. As a result of this processing,successive reproduction of the same music piece can be suppressed andstress imposed on the user can be suppressed. In addition, it is assumedthat, when the “random” folder is selected, reproduction processing isautomatically started and hence a reproduction operation selectionscreen 503 which will be described later is displayed.

Here, for example, subsequent to “best 10”, the “random” folder, a“memories” folder and a “collection” folder that are other favoritefolders are sequentially displayed, however, the order of display is notparticularly limited as such and a manner of display can freely be set.For example, the “random” folder and “best 10” may be displayed withtheir positions being interchanged. For example, when an initialposition of cursor 520 is on the “random” folder, the reproductionprocessing above is automatically started. Therefore, music data can bereproduced without any selection by the user.

FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating another music reproduction folder listselection screen 501 according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 63( a) shows a case where music reproduction folder list selectionscreen 501 is displayed on lower LCD 12.

In addition, in FIG. 63( b), a list screen 501# of music files includedin the currently selected folder is displayed on the screen of lower LCD12.

For example, a case where the user uses touch pen 27 etc. to attainscroll display of the folder list in folder list display range 530 inFIG. 62( a) is shown.

Specifically, for example, the touch pen is moved while it keepstouching the screen in folder list display range 530 (slide operation),so that the folder list is updated in accordance with the trail ofmovement.

Therefore, FIG. 63( a) shows a case where the position of cursor 518# onfolder list scroll bar 510 has moved from the initial position.

In addition, list screen 501# in FIG. 63( b) shows that a music folderFA is selected with cursor 520 and a plurality of music files are storedin this music folder FA. As other features are as described inconnection with FIG. 62, detailed description thereof will not berepeated.

As the favorite folder such as “best 10”, the “random” folder and thelike and the music folders are displayed in parallel in the same folderlist display range 230, a folder to be designated can be grasped at aglance and user's operability in selection from the folder list isimproved.

FIG. 62( a) shows by way of example a case that “best 10”, “memories”and “collection” are provided as the favorite folders. In addition tothe folders above, though not shown, a “practice” folder and a folderthat can be displayed in a special manner in accordance with user'spreference can also be provided. For example, such a “secret” folderthat only first several characters of a music file included in thefolder are displayed and remaining characters are not shown (hidden) maybe provided. Registration of this folder will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a music file selection screen 502according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 64( a), a music file list 540 is displayed on thescreen of lower LCD 12.

When “open” icon 514 is selected in the preceding music reproductionfolder list selection screen, the list of music files included in theselected music folder is displayed.

In addition, the user can move a slider 518# on a file list scroll bar510# on the screen of lower LCD 12, by using touch pen 27 etc.

By moving the slider on file list scroll bar 510#, the file listdisplayed in the file list selection screen is scrolled and the list ofmusic files in accordance with the cursor position is displayed.

Moreover, by selecting the selection function icon in FIG. 64( a), theuser can perform the function corresponding to the selection functionicon. It is assumed that display and setting of the selection functionicon are switched in correspondence with the folder currently selectedby cursor 520. Here, a selection function icon 515 of “favorite” isprovided. When selection function icon 515 of “favorite” is selected, afavorite folder selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a favorite folder selection screen509 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 102, a case where a “best 10” registration icon 700, a“memories” registration icon 702, a “collection” registration icon 704,a “practice” registration icon 706, and a “secret” registration icon 708that are favorite folders are provided on the screen of lower LCD 12 isshown.

The user selects any of the registration icons above in favorite folderselection screen 509, so that a music file selected with a cursor 520#in FIG. 64( a) above is registered in the selected folder and displayed.

When a “back” icon 710 is selected, music file selection screen 502which is the preceding screen is displayed.

Referring again to FIG. 64( a), a reproduction mode switching icon 517is provided in music file selection screen 502.

In addition, the user can make switching among reproduction modes in thefolder based on selection of reproduction mode switching icon 517.Specifically, switching among a reproduction mode in which a music filebeing reproduced is repeatedly reproduced, a reproduction mode in whichmusic files are sequentially reproduced and reproduction is repeatedfrom the beginning when reproduction is completed, a reproduction modein which music files are sequentially reproduced and reproduction isstopped when reproduction is completed, a reproduction mode in whichrandom reproduction is performed, and a reproduction mode in which onlya set section is repeatedly reproduced can sequentially be made forexecution.

In addition, information on the selected music folder is displayed onupper LCD 22 in FIG. 64( b).

In FIG. 64( a), the user selects a “start” icon 516 to perform theoperation of reproducing the music file selected with cursor 520#, andthe reproduction operation selection screen is displayed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating reproduction operation selectionscreen 503 according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 65( a) shows a case where reproduction operation selection screen503 for allowing an operation with music being modified in thereproduction operation or the like is displayed on lower LCD 12.

Specifically, for example, the user can switch between sound effectsoutput from a speaker or the like by operating R button 14J and L button14I after selection of a sound effect selection icon 532, 534 with thetouch pen etc.

In addition, the user can perform the function to vary a reproductionspeed or a key of a reproduction signal by selecting a speed and keyadjustment icon 541.

Moreover, the user can perform the function of change to another tone bymodulating a frequency of the reproduction signal or performingfiltering processing or the like, by selecting a tone adjustment icon542.

Further, the user can perform the function to output as sound effectfrom the speaker, a recording data file created by recording voice andsound which will be described later, by selecting a recording dataselection icon 544.

In addition, it is assumed that a slider 519 moves in accordance with areproduction position in a total duration of the music file within thedisplay range of a reproduction time bar 511. When the user touches aposition within the display range of reproduction time bar 511 withtouch pen 27 etc., processing for reproducing the music file can bestarted from the time corresponding to the touch position. Here, it isassumed that slider 519 moves to the position where the reproductionprocessing is started. By selecting slider 519 with touch pen 27 etc.and performing the slide operation, the reproduction processing may bestarted from the position resulting from the slide operation.

In addition, the user can cause the music file being reproduced topause, by selecting a pause command icon 522. Moreover, the user canselect a next music file included in the folder to perform thereproduction operation thereof, by selecting a next music selectioncommand icon 524. Further, the user can select a previous music fileincluded in the folder to perform the reproduction operation thereof, byselecting a previous music selection command icon 520.

In addition, the user can perform visualizer processing which will bedescribed later, by pressing a visualizer switching icon 531.

In addition, the user can make switching among reproduction modes in thefolder by pressing reproduction mode switching icon 517. Specifically,switching among the reproduction mode in which a music file beingreproduced is repeatedly reproduced, the reproduction mode in whichmusic files are sequentially reproduced and reproduction is repeatedfrom the beginning when reproduction is completed, the reproduction modein which music files are sequentially reproduced and reproduction isstopped when reproduction is completed, the reproduction mode in whichrandom reproduction is performed, and the reproduction mode in whichonly a set section is repeatedly reproduced can sequentially be made forexecution.

In addition, by pressing “favorite” icon 515, the user can have favoritefolder selection screen 509 as described in connection with FIG. 102displayed. As described above, by selecting any of the registrationicons in favorite folder selection screen 509, the currently reproducedmusic file can be registered in the selected folder and displayed.

FIG. 65( b) shows a case where music file list 540 displayed on thescreen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 64( a) is displayed on the screen ofupper LCD 22 as a music file selection list screen 503#. A music fileincluded in the same folder where the music file being reproduced isincluded can be selected by operating direction input button 14A.Specifically, after the music file is selected with the touch pen etc.on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 64( a) (start is pressed), on thescreen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 65( a), processing relating to theoperation for reproducing the music file selected with the touch penetc. is selected in the reproduction operation selection screen with thetouch pen etc., and on the screen of upper LCD 22, a music file can beselected with direction input button 14A.

For example, by using direction input button 14A to select the musicfile and pressing any of operation buttons 14B to 14E, the music filebeing reproduced is switched to the selected music file and thereproduction operation thereof can be performed.

Therefore, the processing in reproduction operation selection screen 503on lower LCD 12 and the processing in music file selection list screen503# on upper LCD 22 can be performed in parallel, which contributes toconvenience of the user.

Detailed processing of the sound function according to the presentembodiment will be described hereinafter.

A processing procedure relating to the “sound function” according to thepresent embodiment described above will be described with reference tothe following flow. It is noted that each step is implementedrepresentatively by reading of a program or the like stored in memorycard 29 to main memory 32 and execution thereof by CPU 31.

<Function Selection Processing>

FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating processing relating to functionselection in game device 10 according to the present embodiment. It isnoted that the flow shown in FIG. 66 illustrates the processing in soundselection screen 400 in FIG. 61.

Referring to FIG. 66, when the power of game device 10 is turned on orthe start button is pressed and thereafter the user selects a prescribedicon in a not-shown menu screen, the sound function is performed.

In step SD1, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display sound selectionscreen 400 as shown in FIG. 61.

Thereafter, CPU 31 starts automatic recording and reproductionprocessing (step SD2). The automatic recording and reproductionprocessing will be described later. It is noted that the processing insteps SD1 and SD2 may be interchanged.

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether data of the touch position hasbeen input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD3). CPU 31 determineswhether or not the touch position data has been input from touch panel13 through I/F circuit 42. Namely, CPU 31 determines whether a touchoperation with touch pen 27 etc. by the user has been performed or not.When the touch position data has not been input (NO in step SD3), theprocessing in step SD3 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the touch position data has been input (YES instep SD3), the process proceeds to step SD4.

In step SD4, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated bythe touch position data is within a display range of the functionselection icon or not. Specifically, CPU 31 determines which of “playwith sound recorded through microphone” icon 402 or “play with music inSD card” icon 404 has been selected.

Then, when the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of “play with sound recorded throughmicrophone” icon 402 or “play with music in SD card” icon 404 (YES instep SD4), the process proceeds to step SD8.

On the other hand, when the coordinate value indicated by the touchposition data is out of the display range of “play with sound recordedthrough microphone” icon 402 or “play with music in SD card” icon 404(NO in step SD4), the process proceeds to step SD5.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position is within the display range of the functionselection icon, the processing for automatic recording and reproductionprocessing ends in step SD8 (step SD8).

Then, CPU 31 performs processing for transition to a next selectedfunction mode (step SD9). The processing for transition to the selectedfunction mode will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within thedisplay range of the function selection icon, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is withinthe display range of “setting” icon 408 or not (step SD5).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position is within the display range of “setting” icon 408,the automatic recording and reproduction processing ends (step SD10).

Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the setting processing (step SD11). Thesetting processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within thedisplay range of “setting” icon 408, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the displayrange of “end” icon 406 or not (step SD6).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD6 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position is within the display range of “end” icon 408, theautomatic recording and reproduction processing ends and the functionselection processing ends (end). Namely, the screen thus returns to thenot-shown menu screen.

On the other hand, when the coordinate value indicated by the touchposition is not within the display range of “end” icon 408 in step SD6,the process returns to step SD3.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for transition to a selection function mode in FIG. 66.

Referring to FIG. 67, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position is within the display range of “playwith music in SD card” icon 404 or “play with sound recorded throughmicrophone” icon 402 (step SD20).

When the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within thedisplay range of “play with music in SD card” icon 404, the processproceeds to step SD21.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether the SD card has been inserted or not(step SD21). When CPU 31 determines that the SD card has been inserted,transition to the music reproduction mode is then made (step SD22). Themusic reproduction mode will be described later. When the musicreproduction mode ends, the screen again returns to the sound selectionscreen in step SD1 in FIG. 1 (return).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD21 that the SD cardhas not been inserted, CPU 31 performs error indication processing (stepSD23). The error indication processing is processing for performingprocessing for indicating, for example, that an “SD card is notinserted” or the like and urging the user to insert the SD card. Then,the process again returns to step SD1 (return).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD20 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the displayrange of “play with sound recorded through microphone” icon 402,transition to the microphone recording and reproduction mode is made(step SD24). The microphone recording and reproduction mode will bedescribed later. When the microphone recording and reproduction modeends, the screen again returns to the sound selection screen in step SD1in FIG. 1 (return).

<Music Reproduction Mode>

The music reproduction mode will now be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in the musicreproduction mode.

Referring to FIG. 68, initially, CPU 31 performs processing for searchof a folder in an SD card (step SD30).

Then, CPU 31 generates the folder list (step SD31).

Then, CPU 31 has the music reproduction folder list selection screendisplayed (step SD32). FIGS. 62 and 63 above show examples of display ofmusic reproduction folder list selection screen 500.

The processing for search of a folder in an SD card will be describedhere.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for search of a folder in an SD card.

Referring to FIG. 69, CPU 31 sets a search initial path to be firstsearched, among paths associated with the folders stored in the SD card(step SD50). Thereafter, CPU 31 performs processing for searching for amusic file in accordance with the search initial path (step SD51).

Then, CPU 31 determines whether or not a music file is present in thefolder through the processing for search for the music file inaccordance with the search initial path (step SD52).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD52 that the music file is present, themusic folder including the music file is extracted (step SD53).

Whether the music file is present or not can be determined, for example,by referring to an extension for identifying a file. Here, determinationmay also be made by referring to identification information stored in aheader or the like of a file, without limited to determination based onthe extension, and a determination method is not limited.

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether search of all paths has beencompleted or not (step SD54).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD54 that search of all paths has notbeen completed, CPU 31 sets a next search path to be searched next (stepSD25).

Then, the process returns to step SD51 and the processing for searchingfor the music file which is the processing described above is performed.

The processing in steps SD51 to SD54 described above is repeated untilsearch of all paths is completed. When CPU 31 determines in step SD54that search of all paths has been completed, the process ends (return).

Thus, all folders in which a music file is present can be extracted fromthe attached SD card.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing forgenerating a folder list.

Referring to FIG. 70, initially, CPU 31 performs processing fordetermining a folder name (step SD60). Thereafter, CPU 31 performsfolder arrangement processing (step SD61).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for determining a folder name.

Referring to FIG. 71, CPU 31 selects a first folder extracted in theprocessing for search of the folder in FIG. 69 (step SD65). Then, CPU 31determines whether there is an identical folder name or not (step SD66).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that there is an identical foldername, CPU 31 merges the folders (step SD67).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that there is noidentical folder, the process proceeds to step SD68. CPU 31 determinesin step SD68 whether or not determination has been completed for allfolders extracted in the processing for search of the folder in FIG. 69.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that determination has not beencompleted for all folders, CPU 31 selects a next folder extracted in theprocessing for search of the folder in FIG. 69 (step SD69). Then, theprocess returns to step SD66 and the processing in steps SD66 to SD69described above is repeated.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that determination has beencompleted for all folders, the process then proceeds to the folderarrangement processing (step SD61) in FIG. 70.

Referring again to FIG. 70, in the folder arrangement processing (stepSD61), the folders or the like merged in the folder name determinationprocessing (step SD60) are arranged in accordance with a prescribedorder of arrangement based on a name, a symbol, or the like.

Then, the process again returns to FIG. 68 (return).

Referring to FIG. 68, in step SD32, in accordance with the order offolders arranged in the folder arrangement processing (step SD61), thefolder list is then displayed on the music reproduction folder listselection screen (step SD32).

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a specific example illustrating thefolder search processing.

Here, for example, a list structure of music files and folders stored inone SD card is shown.

Referring to FIG. 72, specifically, for example, a case where a folderFD1 and a folder FD2 are provided and music folder FA and music folderFB are provided in folder FD1 is shown.

Then, a case where a music file MAA, a music file MBB, . . . areincluded in music folder FA is shown.

In addition, a case where a music file . . . are included in musicfolder FB is shown.

A case where music folder FA and a music folder FC are provided infolder FD2 is shown.

Then, a case where music files MX, MY are included in music folder FA isshown.

In addition, a case where a music file . . . are included in musicfolder FC is shown.

In a case where folders having such a tree structure are stored in theSD card, four music folders of music folders FA, FB, FA, FC storingmusic files are extracted in the processing in accordance with the flowdescribed in connection with FIG. 69.

In the processing in accordance with the flow described in connectionwith FIG. 71, as music folder FA stored in folder FD1 and music folderFA stored in folder FD2 have the same folder name, music files stored inrespective music folders FA are merged. As a result of such merging, inthe example described above, music file MAA, music file MBB, . . . ,music file MX, music file MY, . . . are displayed in a list as musicfiles belonging to music folder FA, in music file list screen 501# asillustrated in FIG. 63( b) or music file selection list screen 503# asillustrated in FIG. 70( b).

In this processing, merging is carried out based on the same foldername, whereby the folder list is displayed on the folder list selectionscreen. Thus, if folders having the same name are present in theattached memory card (SD card), display in a list as belonging to thesame group is provided. Therefore, no disadvantageous condition infolder extraction processing due to a folder configuration in the SDcard, such as presence of a plurality of identical folder names, iscaused and convenience can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in order to group music files within theattached memory card (SD card), folder information in the memory card isutilized as it is, without utilizing attribute information of musicfiles (music files present in the same folder are handled as belongingto the same group). In addition, regardless of levels where folders arepresent, all folders are displayed in parallel (in one level) in musicreproduction folder list selection screen 500 or the like. Specifically,in the example of FIG. 72 where music files are present in both offolder FD1 and folder FD2, folder FD1, folder FD2, music folder FA,music folder FB, and music folder FC are displayed in a list in parallelon music reproduction folder list selection screen 500. Thus, in spiteof a complicated level configuration in the memory card, for example,even a child or the like representative of the user can readily find adesired music file.

In addition, since the folder name registered in the memory card isdirectly utilized on music reproduction folder list selection screen 500or the like as the name of the folder handled as belonging to the samegroup, the user can readily locate a desired music file and convenienceis improved.

In addition, as described previously, in music reproduction folder listselection screen 500, since the name of each folder extracted from thememory card (which also serves as a touch button for display in a listof music files belonging to each folder) and the favorite folder (whichalso serves as a touch button for display in a list of music filesregistered as favorite) are displayed in parallel (in one level), anoperation to select a folder is facilitated and convenience is furtherimproved. In addition, as the “random” folder is displayed in parallelin such a list, convenience is further improved.

Referring again to FIG. 68, after the music reproduction folder listselection screen is displayed in step SD32, CPU 31 then determineswhether the touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 ornot (step SD33). CPU 31 determines whether or not the touch positiondata has been input from touch panel 13 through I/F circuit 42. Namely,CPU 31 determines whether a touch operation with touch pen 27 by theuser has been performed or not. In other words, CPU 31 determineswhether the coordinate value input through the user's operation of touchpanel 13 is detected or not. When the touch position data has not beeninput (NO in step SD33), the processing in step SD33 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the touch position data has been input (YES instep SD33), the process proceeds to step SD34.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicating thetouch position data is within the display range of the folder list ornot (step SD34).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD34 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the folderlist, CPU 31 performs the processing for scroll display of the folderlist in accordance with the trail of movement from the touch position orthe touch position with the touch pen (step SD35).

Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the sliderposition on folder list scroll bar 510 in accordance with the positionof the selected folder in the folder list (step SD35#). Then, theprocess again returns to step SD33. It is noted that the processing insteps SD35 and SD35# may be interchanged, which is also applicablehereinafter.

In the present example, as the description is given by way of exampleassuming that the position of cursor 520 is not changed, only theprocessing for scroll display of the folder list is described. Asdescribed above, however, display processing can also be performed suchthat the position of cursor 520 is moved to a position in accordancewith a touch position which is a position touched with touch pen 27.

In this case, when the screen is touched and thereafter an operation toreset the touched state without changing the touch position from theoriginally touched position is performed (off the screen), only cursor520 moves in accordance with the touch position. Here, the processingfor scroll display of the folder list and the processing for moving theslider position on the folder list scroll bar are not performed.

Meanwhile, when an operation to touch the screen and move touch pen 27etc. while maintaining the touched state, that is, an operation tochange the touch position from the originally touched position whilemaintaining the touched state (drag operation), is performed, theprocessing for scroll display of the folder list is performed inaccordance with the trail of movement (travel distance) of the touchpen. Here, the processing for moving also the slider position on thefolder list scroll bar is performed.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD34 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of the folder list, CPU 31 determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step SD36).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of volume settingicon 550, CPU 31 then performs the volume setting processing (stepSD37). Then, the process again returns to step SD33. The volume settingprocessing will be described later.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of volumesetting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range of“open” icon 514 or not (step SD38).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “open” icon514, CPU 31 then performs music file selection processing (step SD39).The music file selection processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD38 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of “open” icon 514, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of folder list scroll bar 510 or not (step SD40).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD40 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of folder listscroll bar 510, CPU 31 performs the processing for scroll display of thefolder list in accordance with the touch position (step SD41).

Thereafter, the processing for moving the slider position on folder listscroll bar 510 in accordance with the position of the selected folder inthe folder list is performed (step SD42). Then, the process againreturns to step SD33.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD40 that thecoordinate indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of folder list scroll bar 510, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of the selection function icon or not (stepSD43).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD43 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the selectionfunction icon, CPU 31 performs the function corresponding to theselection function icon (step SD44).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD43 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of “back” icon 512 or not (step SD45).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD45 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “back” icon512, the processing in the music reproduction mode ends and the soundselection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 66 is displayed.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD45 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of “back” icon 512, the process returns to step SD33.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for selecting a music file.

Referring to FIG. 73, CPU 31 initially has music file selection screen502 as described in connection with FIG. 64 displayed (step SD70). CPU31 then determines whether the touch position data has been input fromtouch panel 13 or not (step SD70#). CPU 31 determines whether or not thetouch position data has been input from touch panel 13 through I/Fcircuit 42. Namely, CPU 31 determines whether a touch operation withtouch pen 27 by the user has been performed or not. In other words, CPU31 determines whether the coordinate value input through the user'soperation of touch panel 13 is detected or not. When the touch positiondata has not been input (NO in step SD70#), the processing in step SD70#is repeated.

On the other hand, when the touch position data has been input (YES instep SD70#), the process proceeds to step SD71.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicated by thetouch position data is within the display range of music file list 540or not (step SD71).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD71 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of music filelist 540, CPU 31 performs the processing for scroll display of musicfile list 540 in accordance with the touch position (step SD72).

Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the sliderposition on music file list scroll bar 510# in accordance with theposition of the selected music file in the music file list (step SD73).Then, the process again returns to step SD70#.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD71 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of music file list 540, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step SD74). When CPU 31determines in step SD74 that the coordinate value indicated by the touchposition data is within the display range of volume setting icon 550,CPU 31 performs the volume setting processing (step SD75). Then, theprocess again returns to step SD70#. The volume setting processing willbe described later.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD74 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of volumesetting icon 550, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range of a“start” icon 526 (step SD76).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD76 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “start” icon526, CPU 31 performs the music file reproduction processing (stepSD76#). The music file reproduction processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD76 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of “start” icon 526, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of music file list scroll bar 510# or not (step SD77).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD77 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of music filelist scroll bar 510#, CPU 31 performs the processing for scroll displayof music file list 540 in accordance with the touch position data (stepSD78).

Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the sliderposition on music file list scroll bar 510# in accordance with theposition of the selected music file in the music file list (step SD79).Then, the process again returns to step SD70#.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD77 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of music file list scroll bar 510#, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of the selection function icon or not (stepSD80).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD80 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the selectionfunction icon, CPU 31 performs the function corresponding to theselection function icon (step SD81). Then, the process again returns tostep SD70#. For example, when determination that the coordinate value iswithin the display range of selection function icon 515 of “favorite” ismade, favorite folder selection screen 509 described in connection withFIG. 102 above is displayed. By selecting any of the registration icons,processing for registering the music file in the selected folder isperformed.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD80 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of a “back” icon 512# or not.

When it is determined in step SD82 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “back” icon512#, the process proceeds to “A” and the music reproduction folder listselection screen in step SD32 in FIG. 68 is displayed.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for reproducing a music file.

Referring to FIG. 74, CPU 31 starts reproduction of the selected musicfile (step SD90).

As described above, in response to an instruction from CPU 31, audiooutput control circuit 42 c provides output to the headphone throughheadphone amplifier 48 when headphone 18 is connected, and it providesoutput to right speaker 45, 47 through amplifier 44, 46 when theheadphone is not connected.

Thereafter, the music file selection screen is displayed on upper LCD 22and the reproduction operation selection screen is displayed on lowerLCD 12 (step SD91).

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position data has beeninput from touch panel 13 or not (step SD92).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD92 that the touch position data has notbeen input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether theoperation of direction input button 14A has been performed or not (stepSD93).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD93 that the operation of directioninput button 14A has been performed, CPU 31 performs the processing forscroll display of the music file list selected by the cursor position onthe music file selection screen in accordance with the operation ofdirection input button 14A (step SD94).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD93 that theoperation of direction input button 14A has not been performed, theprocess again returns to step SD92.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether a prescribed button has been pressed ornot (step SD94#).

When the prescribed button has been pressed in step SD94#, CPU 31 startsreproduction of the music file selected by the cursor position (stepSD90).

On the other hand, when the prescribed button has not pressed in stepSD94#, the process again returns to step SD92. Here, it is assumed thatany of operation buttons 14B to 14E is set as the prescribed button.

When the touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 in stepSD92, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate value indicated bythe touch position data is within the display range of reproduction timebar 511 or not (step SD95).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD95 that indication by the touchposition data is within the display range of reproduction time bar 511,CPU 31 performs the processing for reproducing the music file from thetime corresponding to the touch position (step SD96).

Then, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the slider positionindicating the reproduction position in the total duration of the musicfile on reproduction time bar 511 in accordance with the touch position(step SD97). Then, the process again returns to step SD92.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD95 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range ofreproduction time bar 511, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof volume setting icon 550 or not (step SD98).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD98 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of volume settingicon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume setting processing (step SD99).Then, the process again returns to step SD92. The volume settingprocessing will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD98 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines whetherthe coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within therange of visualizer switching icon 531 or not (step SD 100).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of visualizerswitching icon 531, CPU 31 then performs the visualizer displayprocessing (step SD101). Then, the process again returns to step SD92.The visualizer display processing will be described later.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of visualizerswitching icon 531, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range of areproduction operation command icon or not (step SD402). Here, pausecommand icon 522, next music selection command icon 524 and previousmusic selection command icon 520 are provided by way of example of thereproduction operation command icon.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD402 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of thereproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 performs the functioncorresponding to the reproduction operation command (step SD103). Then,the process again returns to step SD92.

Specifically, when it is determined that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of pause commandicon 522, CPU 31 causes the reproduction operation to pause.Alternatively, when it is determined that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of next musicselection command icon 524, CPU 31 starts reproduction of the nextselected music file. On the other hand, when it is determined that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of previous music selection command icon 521, CPU 31starts reproduction of the previously selected music file.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD402 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of thereproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of the selection function icon or not.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD104 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the selectionfunction icon, CPU 31 then performs the function corresponding to theselection function icon (step SD 105). Then, the process again returnsto step SD92. For example, in the present example, “favorite” icon 515,reproduction mode switching icon 517, speed and key adjustment icon 541,tone adjustment icon 542, and recording data selection icon 544 aredisplayed as the selection function icon.

Specifically, as described above, when CPU 31 determines that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “favorite” icon 515, CPU 31 performs the processing formoving the currently selected music file to the favorite folder.

Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofreproduction mode switching icon 517, CPU 31 switches the setting of thereproduction mode for display.

Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofspeed and key adjustment icon 541, CPU 31 performs the function tochange a reproduction speed or a key which will be described later.

Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range of toneadjustment icon 542, CPU 31 performs the function for change to anothertone by performing filtering processing for modulating a frequency whichwill be described later.

Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofrecording data selection icon 544, CPU 31 performs the function tooutput an audio data file in which sound is recorded from the speaker assound effect, as will be described later.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD104 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of theselection function icon, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof a “back” icon 512 a or not (step SD106).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD106 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of “back”icon 512 a, the process returns to step SD92.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 106 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “back” icon 512 a, the process proceeds to “B” and themusic file selection screen is displayed in step SD70 in FIG. 73.

<Volume Setting Processing>

The volume setting processing will now be described.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged view of volume setting icon 550.

Referring to FIG. 75( a), volume setting icon 550 is provided with aslider 552, for example, of which position on the horizontal axis fromleft toward right indicates a greater volume.

Slider 552 is displayed at a position in accordance with a current valuewithin a volume level parameter setting range.

Here, a region in a direction of lower volume relative to a positioncorresponding to the current value, at which slider 552 is displayed, isidentified as a volume low region 554, and a region in a direction ofhigher volume relative to the position corresponding to the currentvalue, at which slider 552 is displayed, is identified as a volume highregion 555.

In the embodiment of the present invention, in a case where slider 552is selected with the touch pen etc., the slider can continuously beoperated to move (what is called a drag operation) in any directiontoward volume low region 554 and volume high region 555 from theposition corresponding to the current value, in accordance with asubsequent touch-and-slide operation (an operation to change the touchposition with a touch-on state being maintained).

The case where slider 552 is selected with the touch pen etc. includes(i) a case where slider 552 is touched and (ii) a case where the touchposition enters slider 552 during the touch operation. Here, the dragoperation of slider 552 may be performed only in the case (i), the dragoperation may be performed only in the case (ii), or the drag operationmay be performed in either of the case (i) or (ii).

Referring to FIG. 75( b), in a case where volume low region 554 otherthan slider 552 is touched with the touch pen etc., slider 552 caninstantaneously be operated to move to the touch-on position. Thus,change to a volume lower than a current volume value can instantaneouslybe made. On the other hand, when volume high region 555 other thanslider 552 is touched with the touch pen etc., slider 552 is notinstantaneously operated to move to the touch-on position. Thus, changeto a volume higher than the current volume value cannot instantaneouslybe made.

The case where volume low region 554 is touched includes (i) a casewhere somewhere within volume low region 554 is touched and (ii) a casewhere the touch position enters volume low region 554 during the touchoperation. Here, slider 552 may instantaneously be moved to the touch-onposition only in the case (i), slider 552 may instantaneously be movedto the touch position only in the case (ii), or slider 552 mayinstantaneously be moved in either of the case (i) or (ii).

In addition, when volume low region 554 is touched, slider 552 isinstantaneously moved to the touch position, and when the slideoperation follows, the drag operation as described above can beperformed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of the volumesetting processing according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 76, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofvolume setting icon 550, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofslider 552 or not (step SD110).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD110 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the slider,slider 552 is moved to and displayed at the most recent touch positionin accordance with the trail of movement of the touch pen that keepstouching the screen (slide operation) (step SD114). Namely, a continuousoperation of movement of slider 552 from the current position to adesired position within the volume level parameter setting range isaccepted.

Then, CPU 31 sets the volume in accordance with the position of slider552 (step SD115). Namely, the volume level parameter is updated to avalue in accordance with the position of slider 552 resulting frommovement in accordance with a moving operation. In this regard, asslider 552 continuously moves from the current position to the desiredposition, the volume level parameter is gradually adjusted along withmovement.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD110 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of slider 552, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of acceptable volume input or not (step SD111).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD111 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of acceptablevolume input, slider 552 is moved to and displayed at the position inputwith the touch pen (step SD112). Then, the volume in accordance with theposition of slider 552 within the parameter setting range is set (stepSD115).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 111 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of acceptable volume input, CPU 31 performs invalid inputdetermination processing (step SD113). Namely, processing fordetermining the input as invalid is performed. Then, the process ends.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the volume low region isset as inside of the display range of acceptable volume input. Volumehigh region 555 is not set as inside of the display range of acceptablevolume input. Specifically, in a case where the slider is moved in adirection of decrease from the current value of the parameter, in thepresent example, the input indicating the operation of moving the sliderto the desired position in the volume low region is accepted. In a casewhere the slider is moved in a direction of increase from the currentvalue of the parameter, in the present example, the input indicating theoperation of moving the slider to the desired position in the volumehigh region is not accepted.

Therefore, slider 552 is immediately moved to the touch position in thevolume low region and the volume in accordance with the slider positionis set. On the other hand, touching the volume high region results inthe invalid input determination processing, so that the slider is notmoved and the volume in accordance with the slider position is not set.

As a result of such processing, abrupt increase in the volume caused bya user's erroneous operation while the volume setting processing isperformed with the touch pen is avoided. Specifically, the position ofthe slider is varied with the touch pen in a direction of decrease inthe volume and the volume setting processing in accordance with theslider position can be performed. In the direction of increase in thevolume, however, the position of the slider is not varied with the touchpen and the volume is not increased.

In particular, in performing the setting processing using the touch pen,the user can freely designate any position on the touch panel but adisplay range of volume setting icon 550 cannot be great owing to layoutrestrictions. Accordingly, in performing the volume setting processing,though attention should be paid in designating a position in accordancewith a desired volume level within the display range of volume settingicon 550, it is very likely that the user erroneously designates thedirection of increase in the volume with the touch pen. Therefore, as aresult of this processing, such stress imposed on the user that he/sheoperates game device 10 while being anxious about the possibility ofabrupt increase in the volume caused by his/her erroneous operation canbe suppressed.

In the above, regarding the operation of moving the slider to thedesired position, a case where the slider is immediately moved to theposition in the volume low region so that the volume in accordance withthe slider position is set has been described, however, as in thecontinuous operation of moving the slider, such setting that the volumelevel parameter is gradually adjusted can also be made.

FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating another example of the volume settingicon.

Referring to FIG. 77( a), a volume setting region for setting a volumeat which output is provided from the right speaker and the left speakeris shown here.

Specifically, the ordinate (R) represents a volume level of the rightspeaker and the abscissa (L) represents a volume level of the leftspeaker. Namely, a coordinate value (position) at any point isassociated with the volume level of the right speaker and the leftspeaker. Here, a point 552# indicating a position corresponding to thecurrent volume level of the right speaker and the left speaker isdisplayed.

By touching point 552# with the touch pen, point 552# is selected. Bymoving the touch pen while the screen is being touched (performing theslide operation), the pointer is moved and displayed in accordance withthe trail of movement. On the other hand, when a position other thanpoint 552# is touched with the touch pen and this touched position iswithin the display range of acceptable audio input, point 552# is movedand displayed at the position of input with the touch pen.

Though a case where setting of two types of parameters, that is, thevolume level of the right speaker and the left speaker, is associatedwith the coordinate value (position) on the abscissa and the ordinatehas been described here, the setting may be associated with more typesof parameters, without limited to two types of parameters. Regardingdisplay of a parameter setting range, when a single parameter is set,for example, a position of the parameter may be displayedone-dimensionally, that is, on the abscissa. On the other hand, forexample, when two parameters are set, a position of the parameters maybe displayed two-dimensionally, that is, on the ordinate and theabscissa. Further, when a plurality of types of parameters are set, aposition of the parameters may be displayed multi-dimensionally, inaccordance with the number of types thereof.

Referring to FIG. 77( b), the case where a position within the displayrange of acceptable volume input is touched with the touch pen and thevolume level in accordance with this position is immediately set isshown here. Namely, for example, a direction of decrease in the volumeof at least any one of the right speaker and the left speaker with theuse of the touch pen is set as inside of the display range of acceptablevolume input, however, other regions are not set as inside of thedisplay range of acceptable volume input.

Therefore, when a position other than point 552# is touched, pointer552# is not moved in a direction of increase in the volume, which isoutside of the display range of acceptable audio input, in spite oftouch with the touch pen. Thus, the volume is prevented from becomingexcessively high and having the user feel uncomfortable can besuppressed.

In the present example, a case where the display range of volume settingicon 550 is divided into the display range of acceptable audio input andotherwise has been described. Such division, however, is not limited todivision relating to volume setting, and for example, the reproductiontime bar described in connection with FIG. 65 can also be divided into adisplay range of acceptable input and otherwise. For example, analready-reproduced position is defined as inside of the display range ofacceptable input, and a position where reproduction has not yet beencarried out is defined as outside of the display range of acceptableinput so that only a continuous operation of moving slider 519 isallowed. As a result of such processing, start of reproduction inresponse to touching with the touch pen from a position wherereproduction has not yet been carried out is prevented and having theuser feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.

<Speed and Key Adjustment Processing>

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a function to change a reproductionspeed or a key by selecting speed and key adjustment icon 541.

Referring to FIG. 78, a speed and key adjustment screen displayed on thescreen of lower LCD 12 by pressing speed and key adjustment icon 541 isshown here.

Here, the user uses the touch pen etc. to select and move a slider 553,so that adjustment to a reproduction speed and a key corresponding to amoved position can be made. Specifically, by moving the slider towardthe right from a current position of slider 553, the reproduction speedcan be made faster. In contrast, by moving the slider toward the left,the reproduction speed can be made slower. In addition, by moving slider553 upward from the current position of slider 553, the key can be madehigher. In contrast, by moving slider 553 downward, the key can belowered.

By performing this function, the reproduced and output audio signal canbe varied as the user desires.

<Tone Adjustment Processing>

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a function for change to another toneby modulating a frequency of a reproduction signal or performingfiltering processing or the like based on selection of tone adjustmenticon 542.

Referring to FIG. 79, a tone adjustment icon selection screen displayedon the screen of lower LCD 12 by pressing tone adjustment icon 542 isshown here.

Four tone adjustment selection icons are provided here. Specifically, a“radio” icon 542 a for adjusting sound to such a tone as heard on aradio by modulating a frequency, a “karaoke” icon 542 b suppressingvocals based on subtraction of left and right sound from a stereophonicsound source, an “echo” icon 542 c for making sound echo throughfiltering processing, and an “electronic sound” icon 542 d for varyingsound to an electronic tone by modulating a frequency are provided. Whenthe user selects any of these four tone adjustment selection icons byusing the touch pen etc., the function of the selected icon isperformed.

Though a case where four tone adjustment selection icons are providedand sound can be adjusted to four types of tones has been describedhere, any number of icons may be provided, without particularly limitedto four. By providing a plurality of tone adjustment selection patterns,adjustment to a tone as desired by the user can be made.

Here, regarding the function of “karaoke” icon 542 b, a case ofsuppression of vocals based on subtraction of left and right sound fromthe stereophonic sound source is described. This processing is performedgenerally because vocal sound or the like is localized in the center ofa sound field of the stereophonic sound source and ambient sound or thelike is localized on the left and right except for the center. Vocalscan also be suppressed with other methods without particularly limitedto this method.

<Sound Effect Selection Processing>

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a case where sound effect output froma speaker or the like is changed in response to a user's operation of Rbutton 14J and L button 14I for selecting sound effect selection icon532, 534. In the present embodiment, by operating R button 14J and Lbutton 14I, sound effect can additionally be produced for fun duringreproduction of music based on a music file.

Referring to FIG. 80, the sound effect can be changed by selecting soundeffect selection icon 532, 534 shown in FIG. 65. Specifically, in aninitial state, a “no sound effect” state is set (step SD120).Thereafter, sound effect selection icon 532 is selected once, to set thesound effect of “drum” (step SD121). Thereafter, by selecting soundeffect selection icon 532, the sound effect of “cymbal” is set (stepSD122). Thereafter, by selecting sound effect selection icon 532, thesound effect of “trumpet” is set (step SD123). By selecting sound effecticon 532 again, the “no sound effect” state is set (step SD120). Namely,switching between the sound effects output from the speaker or the likecan be made in accordance with the number of times of selection of thesound effect selection icon. In the present example, by selecting soundeffect selection icons 532, 534 with R button 14J and L button 14Irespectively, sound effect in accordance with the button operation canbe set.

Here, a case where switching in the order of “no sound effect”, “drum”,“cymbal”, and “trumpet” is made is described, however, the order is notparticularly limited as such and any order can be set. In addition, suchsetting as switching to a plurality of sound effects can also naturallybe made. Moreover, such setting that types of sound effects aredifferent between R button 14J and L button 14I respectively can also bemade.

<Visualizer Display Processing>

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating visualizer display processingaccording to the present embodiment.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 in FIG. 74 that the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within a range ofvisualizer switching icon 531, CPU 31 performs the visualizer displayprocessing.

FIG. 81( a) shows the reproduction operation selection screen on lowerLCD 12. As the screen is the same as described in connection with FIG.65, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

FIG. 81( b) shows the visualizer display screen on upper LCD 22.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of thevisualizer display processing.

Referring to FIG. 82, initially, an audio output level is sensed (stepSD130). Specifically, output level sensing circuit 42 d senses theoutput level of the audio signal output from audio output controlcircuit 42 c to amplifiers 44, 46 and outputs the result to CPU 31.

Thereafter, CPU 31 generates an object in accordance with the outputlevel sensed by output level sensing circuit 42 d (step SD131).

Thereafter, scroll display of the object is provided (step SD132). Theprocess again returns to step SD130 and the processing above isrepeated.

Specifically, in FIG. 81( b), as the output level of the audio signalbeing reproduced is successively sensed, new objects are successivelygenerated at positions in accordance with the output level, and scrolldisplay of these objects is provided. In the present embodiment, anobject 801 (specifically, a ground object) is sequentially generated ata height in accordance with the output level at the right end of avisualizer display area and scroll display of the entire picture towardthe left is provided. In addition, on the ground object thus generated,another object (in the present example, objects 802 and 803, forexample) in automatically controlled operation is provided (that is,moves horizontally along the ground on the screen or jumps).

In the present example, the height of the ground object is determined bythe total output level of the audio signal being reproduced from rightand left speakers 45 and 47, or alternatively the controlled operationof a first object (in the present embodiment, object 802 in a motorcycleform) (speed, acceleration, height of jump, etc.) is determined by theoutput level of right speaker 45 and the controlled operation of asecond object (in the present embodiment, object 803 in a motorcycleform) is determined by the output level of left speaker 47.

Without limited to the above, in yet another example, the height of theground object for the first object (in the present embodiment, object802) or the controlled operation (speed, acceleration, height of jump,etc.) of the first object may be determined by the output level of asignal for right speaker 45 of the audio signal, and the height of theground object for the second object (in the present embodiment, object803) or the controlled operation of the second object may be determinedby the output level of a signal for left speaker 47 of the audio signal.

The user can visually recognize variation of the output level based onthe height of a geographic feature in accordance with the output levelof the audio signal. In addition, as two objects 802 and 803 in amotorcycle form jump in accordance with the height of the geographicfeature, the user can visually recognize variation of the output levelof the audio signal also based on variation of objects 802 and 803.

In addition, relative positional relation between two objects 802 and803 in a motorcycle form may be varied, depending on a difference in thevolume level between the audio signal output from right speaker 45 andthe audio signal output from left speaker 47.

If the processing for reproducing the selected music file pauses, thereis no variation of the geographic feature in accordance with the outputlevel above and hence scroll display of a flat geographic feature objectis provided. Here, for example, when the user operates L button 14I andR button 14J described above, the sound effect is output from thespeaker or the like. Therefore, the output level of the audio signal ofthe sound effect is sensed, the geographic object in accordance with theoutput level of the audio signal is generated, and scroll displaythereof is provided. The visualizer display screen hereinafter is alsoprocessed in accordance with a similar scheme.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating another visualizer display screen.

Referring to FIGS. 83 (a) and (b), a visualizer for generation andscroll display on upper LCD 22 of an object 301 a in a snowball shapehaving a size in accordance with the sensed output level of the audiosignal is shown here. Scroll display of a geographic feature showing aslope is provided behind object 301 a in a snowball shape and suchscroll display as object 301 a in a snowball shape rolling down theslope is provided.

Comparing FIG. 83( a) with FIG. 83( b), a case that object 301 a in asnowball shape in FIG. 83( a) is greater than object 301 a in a snowballshape in FIG. 83( b) in accordance with the sensed output level of theaudio signal is shown here.

As a size of object 301 a in a snowball shape varies, the user canvisually recognize variation of the output level of the audio signal inaccordance with the size of object 301 a in a snowball shape.

In addition, as object 301 a in a snowball shape bounds at prescribedtiming during scroll display of the geographic feature showing theslope, the size of object 301 a in a snowball shape can further visuallybe recognized.

FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating yet another visualizer display screen.

Referring to FIG. 84, a visualizer for generation and scroll display onupper LCD 22 of an object 301# in a prescribed character shape at aheight in accordance with the sensed output level of the audio signal isshown here. In addition, setting is made such that scroll display of abackground region of the screen from a right end of the screen to a leftend of the screen is provided, and objects 606 in a coin shape arecontinuously arranged at prescribed intervals from the position ofobject 301# in a prescribed character shape and scroll display thereoffrom the right end of the screen to the left end of the screen isprovided.

In addition, setting is made such that an object 605 in anotherprescribed character shape is displayed, and for example, the object canjump in the screen in response to a user's operation. Moreover, settingis made such that, when object 605 in a prescribed character shape issuperimposed on object 606 in a coin shape, object 605 in a coin shapedisappears and the number of times of superposition on object 605 in acoin shape is displayed in the upper left field of the screen.

Therefore, the user can visually recognize variation of the output levelof the audio signal based on variation of the height of object 301#. Inaddition, as objects 606 in a coin shape are also continuously arrangedin accordance with the height of object 301#, the user can visuallyrecognize variation of the output level of the audio signal also basedon the height of object 606 in a coin shape.

Namely, a display position of a third object (in the present embodiment,object 806 in a coin shape) is determined by the output level of theaudio signal. Specifically, the third object is displayed at the heightin accordance with the output level, at an end portion of a display areaof a virtual space and thereafter scroll display of the third object ina direction toward an opposite end portion is provided. Then, inresponse to the user's operation, movement of a fourth object (in thepresent embodiment, object 805 in a prescribed character shape) iscontrolled. Prescribed game processing is then performed in accordancewith positional relation between the third object and the fourth object.Thus, the output level can be checked during reproduction of music andthe user can have fun based on his/her operation.

Further, as the user can operate object 605 in a prescribed charactershape by providing an operation input. As object 606 in a coin shapedisappears when object 605 is superimposed on object 606 in a coinshape, the user can recognize variation of the output level of the audiosignal also based on his/her own operation input (pressing of a button).

In the present example, visualizer display processing in three patternshas been described, however, the pattern is not limited to three. Asingle pattern may be provided, or a function of visualizer displayprocessing in a further greater number of patterns may also be provided.

For example, such setting that switching among three patterns ofvisualizer display processing is successively made in accordance withthe number of times of touch with the touch pen of a position within adisplay range of visualizer switching icon 531 on the reproductionoperation selection screen on lower LCD 12 shown in FIG. 81( a) can bemade. For example, setting can be such that, by touching the positionwithin the display range of visualizer switching icon 531 with the touchpen four times, the visualizer display processing ends and the screen inFIG. 65( b) is shown.

As described previously, in the present embodiment, the user can havefun by additionally producing the sound effect by performing theprescribed operation during reproduction of music based on the musicfiles. In detection of the output level of the audio signal describedabove, not only the output of reproduction of music based on the musicfiles but also the output of sound effect based on the user's operationare considered. Namely, the total output level of both of the audiosignal based on the music files and the audio signal of the sound effectbased on the user's operation is sensed as the output level of the audiosignal described above. Thus, display contents on the visualizer areindirectly varied in response to the user's operation, and morespecifically, a display position or an operation content of the objectis varied.

<Headphone Output Processing>

FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flow in a case where the headphoneis sensed according to the present embodiment. It is noted thatheadphone output processing is performed independently of otherprocessing while the sound function is being performed.

Referring to FIG. 85, initially, whether the headphone is sensed or notis determined (step SD140). Specifically, I/F circuit 42 sensesinsertion of the plug of the headphone into the jack by sensing turn-onof a mechanical switch, for example, resulting from insertion of theplug of the headphone into jack 62 described in connection with FIG. 2or an electrically conducting state resulting from insertion of the plugof the headphone into jack 62. Thereafter, I/F circuit 42 outputs theresult of sensing to CPU 31, and CPU 31 determines attachment of theheadphone upon receiving a signal indicating the result of sensing fromI/F circuit 42.

When the headphone is sensed, CPU 31 then performs equalizer adjustmentprocessing (step SD141).

The process then ends (end).

Comparing a case where the user wears the headphone to listen to thereproduced audio signal with a case where the user listens to thereproduced audio signal output from the speaker, wearing the headphonemeans covering of earholes. Accordingly, acoustic characteristics aresignificantly different from a case not wearing the headphone and hencethe user may feel discomfort.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the headphone is sensed,equalization adjustment processing for adjusting a prescribed frequencyband of audio data is performed so as not to produce an audio signaldisagreeable to the user due to variation of acoustic characteristics.

Thus, even when the user listens to music data through the headphone,the audio signal agreeable to the user can be output. In addition, thevolume of sound effect output in response to the user's operation of Lbutton 14I and R button 14J can also be adjusted, or a type of soundeffect described in connection with FIG. 80 can also be varied inaccordance with sensing of the headphone.

Here, though a case where the equalization adjustment processing foradjusting a prescribed frequency band when the headphone is sensed isperformed has been described, the processing is not particularly limitedas such. When the headphone is sensed, the audio signal itself to bereproduced may be made different from the audio signal for reproductionfrom the speaker. For example, sound of high key that gives nouncomfortable feeling in reproduction from the speaker but sounds toohigh in listening through the headphone may be replaced with differentsound of lower key, or sound accompanying noise in listening through theheadphone may be replaced with different sound.

Alternatively, when the headphone is sensed, instead of changing theaudio signal itself to be reproduced, the volume of the audio signal tobe reproduced may be made different from the volume thereof inreproduction from the speaker. For example, an audio signal reproducedin balance without giving uncomfortable feeling in reproduction from thespeaker but reproduced in poor volume balance in listening through theheadphone may be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the volume thereofto attain balance.

<Sleep Processing>

FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating sleep processing in a case wheregame device 10 is folded to a folded position.

Referring to FIG. 86, CPU 31 determines whether a folded position hasbeen detected or not (step SD150). Specifically, whether a determinationsignal indicating the closed state has been input from folded positiondetection sensor 50 or not is determined. When it is determined that thedetermination signal indicating the closed state has been input fromfolded position detection sensor 50, that is, when the folded positionis detected, CPU 31 then determines whether the music reproductionoperation is being performed or not (step SD151). Specifically, CPU 31determines whether or not the “start” icon is selected and theprocessing for reproducing the selected music file is being performed asdescribed above.

Receiving the input of the determination signal indicating the closedstate output from folded position detection sensor 50, for example, ifgame device 10 is operating, CPU 31 stops the operation and sets what iscalled a sleep state in which data of that state of operation is stored.On the other hand, receiving input of the determination signalindicating the opened state output from folded position detection sensor50 after game device 10 enters the sleep state, CPU 31 performsprocessing for recovering from the sleep state to the original statebased on the stored data of the state of operation.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD151 that the music reproductionoperation is not being performed, CPU 31 performs sleep processing (stepSD154). Namely, when other function is operated, the operation isstopped and the data of that state of operation is stored. Thus, whenmusic is being reproduced through the speaker, music reproduction isstopped by folding game device 10 from the unfolded state to the foldedstate.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 151 that the musicreproduction operation is being performed, CPU 31 then determineswhether the headphone is sensed or not (step SD152). Specifically, CPU31 determines whether a signal indicating a result of sensing involvedwith attachment of the headphone from I/F circuit 42 has been receivedor not as described above. On the other hand, as will be describedlater, when music is being reproduced through the headphone,reproduction of music is continued also after game device 10 is foldedfrom the unfolded state to the folded state.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD152 that the headphone is not sensed,CPU 31 performs sleep processing (step SD154). Namely, when the musicreproduction operation is being performed but the headphone is notsensed, CPU 31 stops the operation as in the case of other activefunctions and has the data of the state of operation stored.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 152 that theheadphone is sensed, transition to a sleep music reproduction mode ismade (step SD153).

FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in the sleepmusic reproduction mode.

Referring to FIG. 87, CPU 31 continues only the music reproductionfunction and performs the sleep processing for other functions (stepSD160). For example, display processing or the like is set to the sleepstate.

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether a continuous reproductionoperation has been set or not (step SD161). Specifically, it isdetermined whether the reproduction mode is set to the reproduction modein which data being reproduced is repeatedly reproduced, to thereproduction mode in which data is sequentially reproduced andreproduction is repeated from the beginning when reproduction iscompleted, or to the reproduction mode in which only a set section isrepeatedly reproduced, or whether or not the “random” folder is selectedand executed.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD161 that the continuous reproductionoperation has been set, CPU 31 continues the music reproductionoperation (step SD 162).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 161 that thecontinuous reproduction operation has not been set, the reproductionoperation ends with the current music file (step SD163). Then, the sleepprocessing described above is performed (step SD164).

According to this method, when the user folds game device 10 and doesnot operate game device 10, the sleep processing is performed except fora case where the music reproduction operation is being performed.Therefore, this processing allows extension of a service life of a powersupply of game device 10. In addition, when the user folds game device10 during performance of the music reproduction function and when theheadphone is sensed and the continuous reproduction operation is set,the music reproduction operation is continued.

In general, it is highly likely that the user carries game device 10 inthe folded state in a bag or in a pocket or the like of clothing.Therefore, as it is less likely that the user operates game device 10 insuch a folded state, the sleep processing is normally performed.

On the other hand, it would be convenient for the user if the functionof the music reproduction operation can be performed while carrying gamedevice 10 in the folded state although not operating game device 10.

Therefore, in spite of game device 10 being in the folded state, if themusic reproduction operation is being performed, the headphone is sensedand the continuous reproduction operation is set, the music reproductionoperation is continued, to thereby contribute to convenience of theuser. In addition, when the continuous reproduction operation is notset, it can be determined that the user does not desire to continue themusic reproduction operation. Therefore, after the reproductionoperation of the current music file ends, normal sleep processing isperformed, to thereby contribute to convenience of the user. Inparticular, as the normal sleep processing is performed after thereproduction operation of the current music file ends, the reproductionoperation can end without giving uncomfortable feeling to the user whoenjoys the music reproduction operation.

<Automatic Recording and Reproduction Processing>

In the automatic recording and reproduction processing, processing oftwo functions of an automatic recording mode and an automaticreproduction mode is performed independently of each other. As describedin step SD2 in FIG. 66, the automatic recording and reproductionprocessing is started after sound selection screen 400 is displayed.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the automatic recording modeaccording to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 88, whether the volume of input from microphone 43 isequal to or greater than a threshold value is determined (step SD170).Specifically, audio input control circuit 42 b senses whether the volumeof input from microphone 43 is equal to or greater than the thresholdvalue. When the sensed volume of input from microphone 43 is equal to orgreater than the threshold value, audio input control circuit 42 boutputs the result of sensing to CPU 31.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD 170 that the volume of input frommicrophone 43 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, CPU 31performs the recording processing (step SD171). Specifically, CPU 31performs the recording processing, upon receiving the input of theresult of sensing from audio input control circuit 42 b that the volumeof input from microphone 43 is equal to or greater than the thresholdvalue.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of therecording processing according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 89, initially, CPU 31 determines whether audio inputis present or not (step SD180). When CPU 31 determines that audio inputis present, CPU 31 temporarily has the recording data input from audioinput control circuit 42 b stored (step SD181). Specifically, CPU 31causes the main memory to temporarily store the recording data.

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether a capacity of the recording datahas reached a capacity limit of a slot or not (step SD182). Here, theslot refers to a recording data storage area in memory 34 for storage,in which the recording data is stored as a recording data file. In thepresent example, it is assumed that a plurality of slots used forrecording processing are provided in advance in memory 34 for storage.In the present example, for example, it is assumed that recording dataof 10 seconds can be stored in one slot.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD 182 that the capacity of the recordingdata has not reached the capacity limit of the slot, the processing instep SD 180 and step SD181 is repeated and the recording data istemporarily stored.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD 182 that the capacity of the recordingdata has reached the capacity limit of the slot, the process proceeds tostep SD 184 and the recording ends. Then, referring back to FIG. 88, theprocess proceeds to step SD172.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 180 that audioinput is not present, the process then proceeds to step SD183.

In step SD183, CPU 31 determines whether or not audio input is absentfor a prescribed period. For example, the prescribed period fordetermining absence of sound can be set to three seconds. This period ismerely by way of example, and an appropriate period may be set.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD183 that audio input is absent for theprescribed period, recording ends (step SD184). Then, referring back toFIG. 88, the process proceeds to step SD172.

On the other hand, when it is not determined in step SD 183 that audioinput is absent for the prescribed period, that is, when the audio inputis made again, the process again returns to step SD180 and proceeds tostep SD181.

According to this recording processing, when audio input is present, therecording data is automatically stored until the capacity limit of theslot is reached, and when there is no longer audio input, the recordingprocessing automatically ends.

Through a series of processing as above (SD180 to SD183), voice andsound is automatically recorded while sound selection screen 400 isdisplayed. Speech of the user while sound selection screen 400 isdisplayed (including unconscious utterance) is automatically recorded inthe slot as the recording data so long as the capacity of the slot isavailable.

Referring again to FIG. 88, thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether thecapacity of the recording data is equal to or greater than a prescribedcapacity or not (step SD 172). Specifically, CPU 31 determines whetherthe capacity of the recording data temporarily stored in the main memoryis equal to or greater than the prescribed capacity or not. For example,the prescribed capacity can be set to a capacity not less than a minimumperiod of time that can be recognized by the user as the audio signal inreproduction. In other words, a capacity less than the prescribedcapacity means a capacity to such an extent that the recording datacannot be recognized as the audio signal when the user reproduces therecording data.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD172 that the recording data of theprescribed capacity or greater is stored in the main memory, CPU 31performs the processing for storing the recording data (step SD173). Onthe other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD172 that the recordingdata of the prescribed capacity or greater is not stored, thetemporarily stored recording data is erased (step SD174), because anamount of stored data is too small as the recording data and such datais not recognizable. Here, the prescribed capacity is assumed as beingsmaller than the capacity limit of the slot. Therefore, the recordingdata of such a length that the user cannot recognize as the audio signalis automatically erased.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for storing the recording data.

Referring to FIG. 90, initially, CPU 31 checks an empty slot (stepSD190). Specifically, CPU 31 checks whether there is a slot notincluding the recording data, among a plurality of slots provided inadvance in memory 34 for storage and serving as a plurality of recordingdata storage areas.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether there is an empty slot or not (stepSD191).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD 191 that there is an empty slot, theprocessing for storing the recording data in the empty slot as therecording data file is performed (step SD192). Specifically, CPU 31causes memory 34 for storage to store the temporarily stored recordingdata as the recording data file through memory control circuit 33. Then,the process returns to the flow in FIG. 88 (return).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 191 that there isno empty slot, one slot is determined from among the plurality of slotsthrough processing using a random number, and processing for overwritingthe slot determined by using a random number with the recording data asthe recording data file (step SD193). Then, the process returns to theflow in FIG. 30 (return).

As a result of this processing, one recording data file is stored in theslot.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 191 that thecapacity of the recording data is not lower than a capacity limit,erasing processing for erasing an old recording data file is performed(step SD193). Then, the process again returns to step SD191, where it isdetermined whether the capacity of the recording data is lower than thecapacity limit or not. The processing in step SD193 is repeated until itis determined that the capacity of the recording data is lower than thecapacity limit. When the capacity of the recording data is lower thanthe capacity limit, processing for storage as the recording data filedescribed above is performed. Therefore, the old recording data file isautomatically updated to a new recording data file.

The automatic reproduction mode will now be described.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the automatic reproduction mode according tothe present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 91, CPU 31 determines whether there is a slot in whicha recording data file is stored or not (step SD200). Specifically, CPU31 determines whether or not the recording data files are present in aplurality of slots provided in advance in memory 34 for storage throughmemory control circuit 33.

When there is no recording data file in a slot in step SD200, CPU 31repeats the processing in step SD200.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD200 that there is arecording data file in a slot, CPU 31 performs the processing forreproducing the recording data file (step SD201). Thereafter, CPU 31performs stand-by processing (step SD202). Specifically, CPU 31 is in astand-by state for a prescribed period of time and the process againreturns to step SD200. The stand-by processing may be processing ofbeing in a stand-by state for a certain prescribed period of time or fora random period of time.

Therefore, when there is a recording data file in a slot, CPU 31 repeatsexecution of the reproduction processing for a certain period of time orfor a random period of time.

In addition, when it is determined that the recording data files arepresent in the plurality of slots in memory 34 for storage respectively,the processing for reproducing the recording data file stored in eachslot is sequentially performed. In addition, during the reproductionprocessing, object 410 in a bird shape in FIG. 61 can be displayed in ananimated manner. As a result of such display processing, the user canvisually recognize execution of the reproduction processing based on theoperation of object 410 in a bird shape.

As a result of this processing, when the user speaks loud enough for thevolume of input from the microphone to exceed the threshold value whilethe sound selection screen in FIG. 61 is displayed, the audio signalrepresenting the speech is stored in the slot as the recording data filebased on the automatic recording mode. Based on the automaticreproduction mode, the audio signal stored in the slot as the recordingdata file is then automatically reproduced and the reproductionprocessing is repeated.

This function allows the user to create his/her own audio signal as therecording data file and to enjoy reproduction thereof.

The method of performing the recording processing or the recording andstoring processing based on determination as to whether the capacity ofthe recording data has reached a prescribed capacity or not has beendescribed above, however, such determination can be made, for example,based on a recording period of time without limited to the capacity, orsuch determination may be made based on another parameter.

<Setting Processing>

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing of thesetting processing according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 92, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position is within the display range of “setting”icon 408 in FIG. 61, CPU 31 has the setting screen displayed (stepSD210).

FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen 508 according to thepresent embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 93, here, a “headphone” setting item 560, a “touchsound” setting item 562, and a “backlight” setting item 564 areprovided. In addition, as “headphone” setting item 560, a selectionfunction icon 561 for selecting and setting “stereophonic” or “monaural”is provided. Moreover, as “touch sound” setting item 562, a selectionfunction icon 563 for selecting and setting “sound on” or “sound off” isprovided. Further, as “backlight” setting item 564, a selection functionicon 565 for selecting and setting “always on” or “automatically turnedoff” is provided. In addition, a “saved data initialization” icon 566 isprovided, and by selecting this “saved data initialization” icon 566,the content in the recording data file in the automatic recording andreproduction processing, the content in the recording data file createdin the microphone recording and reproduction mode which will bedescribed later, or the music file content registered in “favorite” iserased. In addition, by selecting a “back” icon 512 b, the screenreturns to immediately preceding sound selection screen 400.

Referring again to FIG. 92, CPU 31 determines whether the touch positiondata has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD211).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD211 that the touch position data hasbeen input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof the function selection icon of “headphone” or not (step SD212).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD212 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the functionselection icon of “headphone”, CPU 31 determines whether the currentsetting is “stereophonic” or not (step SD213).

When the current setting is “stereophonic” in step SD213, CPU 31 makesswitching to monaural setting (step SD214).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD213 that the currentsetting is not “stereophonic”, CPU 31 makes switching to stereophonicsetting (step SD215).

In the “stereophonic” setting, while the headphone is connected,stereophonic audio output is provided. Namely, output for the right andoutput for the left are separately provided. On the other hand, in the“monaural” setting, while the headphone is connected, monaural audiooutput is provided, but while the headphone is not connected,stereophonic audio output is provided, regardless of this setting.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD212 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of thefunction selection icon of “headphone”, CPU 31 then determines whetherthe coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of the function selection icon of “touch sound” or not(step SD216).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD216 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the functionselection icon of “touch sound”, CPU 31 determines whether the currentsetting is “sound on” or not (step SD217).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD217 that the current setting is “soundon”, CPU 31 makes switching to touch sound off setting (step SD218).

The process again returns to step SD211.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD217 that the current setting is not“sound on”, CPU 31 makes switching to touch sound on setting (stepSD219).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD216 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of thefunction selection icon of “touch sound”, CPU 31 then determines whetherthe coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of the function selection icon of the “backlight function”or not (step SD220).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD220 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the functionselection icon of “backlight”, CPU 31 determines whether the currentsetting is “always on” or not (step SD221).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD221 that the current setting is “alwayson”, CPU 31 makes switching to automatic off setting (step SD222). As aresult of switching to the automatic off setting, when it is determinedthat game device 10 is not operated for a certain period of time, theprocessing for automatically turning off the backlight is performed.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD221 that the currentsetting is not “always on”, CPU 31 makes switching to always on setting(step SD223). Then, the process returns to step SD211.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD220 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of the function selection icon of “backlight”, CPU 31determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch positiondata is within the display range of the function selection icon of“saved data initialization” or not (step SD224).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD224 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the functionselection icon of “saved data initialization”, CPU 31 performsprocessing for erasing the recording data file and the contentsregistered in “favorite” (step SD225). Namely, the processing or thelike for erasing the recording data file stored in data memory 34 forstorage is performed.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD224 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of thefunction selection icon of “saved data initialization,” CPU 31determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch positiondata is within the display range of the function selection icon of“back” or not.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD226 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the functionselection icon of “back”, the screen returns to immediately precedingsound selection screen 400.

As a result of this setting processing, for example with regard to thereproduction processing when the headphone for one ear is attached, thestereophonic setting can be switched to the monaural setting as desiredby the user. As a result of such switching setting, appropriatereproduction processing can be selected in accordance with the type ofthe headphone. Naturally, in the case of the headphone for both ears,switching to the monaural setting can also be made.

<Microphone Recording and Reproduction Mode>

The microphone recording and reproduction mode will now be described.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing in themicrophone recording and reproduction mode.

Referring to FIG. 94, when transition to the microphone recording andreproduction mode is made, initially, CPU 31 has a recording data filelist selection screen for play with sound recorded through themicrophone displayed (step SD230).

FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file list selectionscreen 600 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 95, a case where recording data file list selectionscreen 600 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 is shown.

The user can select any recording data file from a recording data filelist by touching the screen on lower LCD 12 with touch pen 27 etc. Aswill be described later, it is assumed that the recording data file isset to a display color selectively designated by the user. Here, eachrecording data file in the recording data file list corresponds to eachone of the plurality of slots provided in advance in memory 34 forstorage for use in the recording processing.

For example, it is assumed that a cursor 590 selects a recording datafile displayed at the top left in a recording data file list 610 onrecording data file list selection screen 600. For example, by touchinga recording data file included in recording data file list 610 withtouch pen 27 etc., cursor 590 moves to the touched recording data fileand the recording data file designated with cursor 590 is in a selectedstate.

In addition, it is assumed that, by touching any recording data file onthe screen and moving this recording data file to a position of anyother recording data file while maintaining the touched state, that is,maintaining the selected state of the recording data file designatedwith cursor 590 (performing slide operation), positions of theserecording data files are interchanged.

Here, for example, a recording data file 615 is assumed as a filestoring no recording data, which is also applicable to other files. Onthe other hand, recording data files other than aforementioned areassumed as files storing recording data. In the present example, forexample, it is assumed that one file can record an audio signal forapproximately 10 seconds.

In addition, the user can set the volume at which output is providedfrom the speaker or the like by designating volume setting icon 550 withtouch pen 27 etc. Since this processing is as described above, detaileddescription thereof will not be repeated.

Moreover, the user can return to sound selection screen 400 which is thepreceding screen, by selecting a “back” icon 620.

Further, by selecting a recording data file in recording data file listselection screen 600 and selecting a “play” icon 570, the reproductionprocessing is started and a recording data reproduction operationselection screen 301 is displayed.

On the other hand, it is assumed that, if a file in which no recordingdata is stored is selected from recording data file list selectionscreen 600, “play” icon 570 is changed to a “record” icon 570#. Then, byselecting this “record” icon 570#, a recording start screen 602 whichwill be described later is displayed.

In addition, by selecting an “erase” icon 571 with touch pen 27 etc.,the currently selected recording data file can be erased and a file inwhich no recording data is stored can be set.

In addition, regarding a manner of display of the recording data file, adata amount of the recording data included in each file relative to thetotal capacity is displayed as a water level. Based on such a manner ofdisplay, the user can sensuously recognize the amount of data of therecording data file. In addition, in recording data file list 610, arecording data file different in shape is shown. For example, when amodification and edition function by using tone adjustment icon 542 orthe like which will be described later is performed and “overwrite” isselected, that is, when change to different recording data is made,display processing is performed such that the shape of the recordingdata file is changed in accordance with modification and edition.

As a result of this manner of display, the user can intuitivelyrecognize that a recording data file is a modified and edited file,which contributes to convenience of the user.

FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating recording data reproduction operationselection screen 601 according to the embodiment of the presentinvention.

FIG. 96( a) shows a case that recording data reproduction operationselection screen 601 is displayed on lower LCD 12.

Specifically, the user can perform the function of the operation withmusic being modified, in the reproduction operation or the like of therecording data based on selection with the touch pen etc.

Here, a case where speed and key adjustment icon 541, tone adjustmenticon 542, reproduction mode switching icon 517, and an “overwrite” icon586 are provided as the selection function icon is shown.

The user can perform the function to change the reproduction speed orthe key by selecting speed and key adjustment icon 541 described above.

In addition, the user can perform the function for modification andedition to another tone by modulating a frequency of the reproductionsignal or by performing filtering processing or the like based onselection of tone adjustment icon 542. Specifically, the tone adjustmenticon described in connection with FIG. 79 may be provided or anothertone adjustment icon may be provided.

In addition, the user can cause the recording data file being reproducedto pause, by pressing a pause command icon 580 serving as thereproduction operation command icon. Here, display of pause command icon580 is changed to display of a play command icon 582#. Moreover, areverse play command icon 580 is also provided as the reproductionoperation command icon. When reverse play command icon 580 is selected,reverse reproduction processing is performed. Here, display of reverseplay command icon 580 is changed to display of a pause command icon580#. Two icons of the play command and the reverse play command aredisplayed as such command icons, and the selected icon is switched tothe pause command icon. Therefore, the user can switch between thereproduction operation and the reverse reproduction operation with oneaction by using touch pen 27 etc.

Specifically, in a reproduction interface for music data (here, musicdata will be described by way of example, however, a video data may beapplicable), two command icon areas are provided (a first command iconarea and a second command icon area), any of the reverse play commandicon and the pause command icon is displayed in a switched manner in thefirst command icon area, and any of the play command icon and the pausecommand icon is displayed in a switched manner in the second commandicon area.

More specifically, the manner of display is as follows.

In stop state: The reverse play command icon is displayed in the firstcommand icon area and the play command icon is displayed in the secondcommand icon area.

In play state: The reverse play command icon is displayed in the firstcommand icon area and the pause command icon is displayed in the secondcommand icon area.

In reverse play state: The pause command icon is displayed in the firstcommand icon area and the play command icon is displayed in the secondcommand icon area.

Play command icon: When touched, forward play of audio data is started.

Reverse play command icon: When touched, reverse play of audio data isstarted.

Pause command icon: When touched, reproduction of audio data is causedto pause.

Though the pause command icon indicating pause has been described in thepresent example, a stop command icon indicating stop instead of pausemay be employed.

Thus, transition to any of play, reverse play and stop can be made byusing two command icon areas in any state of stop, play and reverseplay.

Speaking more generally, in an information processing device that cantake three states (a first state, a second state, and a third state),two button areas are provided, and when the information processingdevice is currently in the first state, a button for transition to thesecond state and a button for transition to the third state aredisplayed (i). When the button for transition from the (i) state to thesecond state is operated to make transition to the second state, thebutton for transition to the second state is changed to a button fortransition to the first state, and the button for transition to thefirst state and the button for transition to the third state aredisplayed (ii). In addition, when the button for transition from the (i)state to the third state is operated to make transition to the thirdstate, the button for transition to the third state is changed to thebutton for transition to the first state, and the button for transitionto the second state and the button for transition to the first state aredisplayed (iii). Moreover, when the button for transition from the (ii)state to the first state is operated to make transition to the firststate, the state returns to the (i) state. Further, when the button fortransition from the (iii) state to the first state is operated to maketransition to the first state, the state returns to the (i) state. Inaddition, when the button for transition from the (ii) state to thethird state is operated to make transition to the third state, thebutton for transition to the first state is changed to the button fortransition to the second state, the button for transition to the thirdstate is changed to the button for transition to the first state, andthe button for transition to the second state and the button fortransition to the first state are displayed. In addition, when thebutton for transition from the (iii) state to the second state isoperated to make transition to the second state, the button fortransition to the second state is changed to the button for transitionto the first state, and the button for transition to the first state ischanged to the button for transition to the third state.

Thus, two button areas can be used to efficiently make transition to anyof the three states.

Further, the user can make switching among the reproduction modes in therecording data file list by pressing reproduction mode switching icon517. Specifically, the reproduction mode in which data being reproducedis repeatedly reproduced, the reproduction mode in which data issequentially reproduced and reproduction is repeated from the beginningwhen reproduction is completed, the reproduction mode in which data issequentially reproduced and reproduction is stopped when reproduction iscompleted, the reproduction mode in which random reproduction isperformed, and the reproduction mode in which only a set section isrepeatedly reproduced can sequentially be switched and executed.

In addition, by pressing “overwrite” icon 586, for example, the user canoverwrite for storage, the recording data file with a recording datafile modified and edited through filtering processing or the like basedon selection of a tone adjustment icon 588.

In addition, FIG. 96( b) shows a case where recording data file list 610displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 95 is now displayed onthe screen of upper LCD 22 as a recording data file selection listscreen 601#. The recording data file displayed on recording data filelist 610# can then be selected by operating direction input button 14A.Namely, after the recording data file is selected with the touch penetc. (by pressing play) on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 95, on thescreen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 96( a), the processing for thereproduction operation of the recording data file selected with thetouch pen etc. is selected on the recording data reproduction operationselection screen with the touch pen etc. and on the screen of upper LCD22, the recording data file can be selected with direction input button14A.

For example, by using direction input button 14A to select the recordingdata file and pressing any of operation buttons 14B to 14E, therecording data file being reproduced is switched to the selectedrecording data file and the reproduction operation thereof can beperformed.

Therefore, the processing in reproduction operation selection screen 601on lower LCD 12 and the processing in recording data file selection listscreen 601# on upper LCD 22 can be performed in parallel, whichcontributes to convenience of the user.

In addition, by pressing “overwrite” icon 586, for example, the user canoverwrite for storage, the recording data file with a recording datafile modified and edited through filtering processing or the like basedon selection of a tone adjustment icon 588.

Specifically, in an information processing device having two screens (ortwo display areas), contact detection means (in the present embodiment,a touch panel) is provided for at least one screen (in the presentembodiment, lower LCD 12). Then, an icon group (a first icon group; inthe embodiment, a group of icons 615 showing respective recording datafiles) showing a plurality of choices is displayed on one screen, andselection of any icon is permitted through the contact detection means.After any icon is selected from among the plurality of icons by usingthe contact detection means, display of the first icon group is moved tothe other screen (in the present embodiment, upper LCD 22) and anothericon group (a second icon group; in the embodiment, 541 and 542) isdisplayed on one screen and selection of any icon from this second icongroup is permitted through the contact detection means. Even after thefirst icon group has moved to the other screen, one icon can be selectedfrom the first icon group by using a key switch (which is a directionkey, and in the embodiment, a cross-shaped key 14A). Thus, selectionfrom the first icon group and selection from the second icon group canbe made in parallel. For example, first selection may be made with theuse of the first icon group and selection relating to the icon selectedin the first selection may be made with the use of the second icon group(in the present embodiment, data to be processed is selected in thefirst selection and processing content for the selected data is selectedin the second selection). Here, even after transition to a condition forthe second selection is made after the first selection from the firsticon group, selection from the first icon group can be changed byoperating the key switch and hence the first selection can be redone inparallel after transition to the condition for the second selection,which contributes to improved convenience.

Referring again to FIG. 94, CPU 31 determines whether the touch positiondata has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD231).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD231 that the touch position data hasbeen input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of recording data file list 610 or not (step SD232).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD232 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of recording datafile list 610, the recording data file is selected and displayed inaccordance with the touch position (step SD233).

Then, CPU 31 changes a function icon button in accordance with therecording data file and has the resultant function icon button displayed(step SD234). The process then again returns to step SD231.Specifically, when the cursor selects and indicates a recording datafile, “play” icon 570 is displayed. When the cursor selects andindicates a file in which nothing is recorded, “record” icon 570# isdisplayed.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD232 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of recordingfile list 610, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range ofvolume setting icon 550 or not (step SD235).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD235 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of volume settingicon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume setting processing (step SD236). Asthe volume setting processing has been described above, detaileddescription thereof will not be repeated.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD235 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines whetherthe coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “play” icon 570 or not (step SD237).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “play” icon570, CPU 31 performs the processing for reproducing a recording datafile (step SD237#). The processing for reproducing the recording datafile will be described later.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of “play” icon 570, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “erase” icon 571 or not (step SD238).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD238 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “erase” icon571, CPU 31 performs the processing for erasing the recording data file(step SD239).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD238 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of “erase”icon 571, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “record” icon570# or not (step SD240).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD240 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “record” icon570#, CPU 31 performs processing for creating the recording data file(step SD241). The processing for creating the recording data file willbe described later.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD240 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of “record”icon 570#, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “back” icon620 or not (step SD242).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD242 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of “back”icon 620, the process again proceeds to step SD231.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD242 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “back” icon 620, sound selection screen 400 shown inFIG. 61 is displayed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of theprocessing for reproducing the recording data file.

Referring to FIG. 97, when CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of the “play” icon, CPU 31 then starts the processing forreproducing the selected recording data file (step SD250).

Thereafter, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display recording data fileselection list screen 601# and lower LCD 12 to display reproductionoperation selection screen 601 (step SD251).

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position data has beeninput from touch panel 13 or not (step SD252).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD252 that the touch position data hasbeen input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of a reproduction time bar 551 or not (step SD253).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD252 that the touch position data hasnot been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether theoperation of direction input button 14A has been performed or not (stepSD264).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD264 that the operation of directioninput button 14A has been performed, CPU 31 performs the processing forscroll display of the cursor position indicating the selected recordingdata file in recording data file selection list screen 601# inaccordance with the operation of direction input button 14A (stepSD265).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD264 that theoperation of direction input button 14A has not been performed, theprocess again returns to step SD252.

Then, CPU 31 determines whether a prescribed button has been pressed ornot (step SD266).

When the prescribed button has been pressed in step SD266, CPU 31 startsreproduction of the recording data file selected by the cursor position(step SD250).

On the other hand, when the prescribed button has not been pressed instep SD266, the process again returns to step SD252. Here, it is assumedthat the prescribed button is set to any of operation buttons 14B to14E.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step S252 that the touchposition data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of reproduction time bar 551 or not (stepSD253).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD253 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of reproductiontime bar 251, CPU 31 performs the processing for reproducing therecording data file from the time corresponding to the touch position(step SD254).

In step SD254, CPU 31 then performs the processing for moving the sliderposition on reproduction time bar 251 in accordance with the touchposition (step SD255).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD253 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range ofreproduction time bar 251, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof volume setting icon 550 or not (step SD256).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD256 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of volume settingicon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume setting processing (step SD257). Asthe volume setting processing has been described above, detaileddescription thereof will not be repeated.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD256 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of volumesetting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position data is within the display range of thereproduction operation command icon or not (step SD258).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD258 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of thereproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 performs the functioncorresponding to the reproduction operation command (step SD259).

Thereafter, display of the reproduction operation command is switched(step SD260).

Then, the process again returns to step SD252.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD258 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of thereproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of the selection function icon or not (step SD261).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD261 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of the selectionfunction icon, CPU 31 performs the function corresponding to theselection function icon (step SD262).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD261 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of theselection function icon, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate valueindicated by the touch position is within the display range of “back”icon 513.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD263 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “back” icon513, recording data file list selection screen 600 which is thepreceding screen is displayed (step SD230).

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD263 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within thedisplay range of “back” icon 513, the process returns to step SD252.

FIGS. 98 and 100 are flowcharts illustrating sub routine processing ofthe processing for creating a recording data file.

As described above, it is assumed that a plurality of slots used forprocessing for recording in memory 34 for storage are provided inadvance in the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 98, initially, CPU 31 has recording start screen 602displayed.

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating recording start screen 602 accordingto the present embodiment (step SD270).

Referring to FIG. 99, a recording command icon 610 is provided inrecording start screen 602. In addition, a “quit” icon 615 is provided.By pressing recording command icon 610, recording is started. Inaddition, it is assumed that, after recording is started, display ofrecording command icon 610 is changed to display of a stop command icon610#. By pressing stop command icon 610#, recording is stopped. Inaddition, by pressing “quit” icon 615, it is assumed that the screenreturns to recording data file list selection screen 600 which is thepreceding screen.

Referring again to FIG. 98, CPU 31 determines whether the touch positiondata has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD270#).

Thereafter, when CPU 31 determines that the touch position data has beeninput from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof the recording command icon or not (step SD271).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD271 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of recordingcommand icon 610, CPU 31 then determines whether the volume of inputfrom the microphone is equal to or greater than the threshold value ornot (step SD272).

When it is determined that the volume of input from the microphone isequal to or greater than the threshold value, CPU 31 then starts therecording processing (step SD273).

Thereafter, CPU 31 makes switching of display of the recording command(step SD274). Specifically, stop command icon 610# is displayed.

Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position data has beeninput from touch panel 13 or not (step SD275).

When CPU 31 determines that the touch position data has been input fromtouch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of stop commandicon 610# or not (step SD276).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD276 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of stop commandicon 610#, the recording processing ends (step SD277) and the processproceeds to “D”.

Referring to FIG. 100, when the recording processing ends in step SD277,CPU 31 then stores the recording data file (step SD290). Specifically,CPU 31 causes data memory 34 for storage to store the recording datafile through memory control circuit 33.

Thereafter, CPU 31 has a recording data file color designation screendisplayed (step SD291).

FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file colordesignation screen 603 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 101, a case where a message “Recording is completed.You can play with this sound.” is displayed on recording data file colordesignation screen 603 according to the present embodiment is shown. Acolor designation area 620 is provided and color designation selectionicons 621 to 626 indicating red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and navy,respectively are provided. The user can designate any color designationicon by touching the icon with touch pen 27 etc. A display color of therecording data file corresponding to the designated slot is registeredin this designated color. In addition, by pressing a “cancel” icon 630,the recording data file is erased and the screen returns to recordingdata file list selection screen 600.

Referring again to FIG. 100, CPU 31 determines whether the touchposition data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD292).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD292 that the touch position data hasbeen input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines whether thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thecolor designation area or not (step SD293).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD293 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the color designation area, thedesignated display color is registered (step SD294). Then, CPU 31 hasrecording data file list selection screen 600 displayed. Here, theselected recording data file is displayed in the designated displaycolor.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD293 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thecolor designation area, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinatevalue indicated by the touch position data is within the display rangeof “cancel” icon 630 or not (step SD295).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is not within the display range of “cancel”icon 630, the process returns to step SD292.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within thedisplay range of “cancel” icon 630, the recording data filecorresponding to the designated slot is erased (step SD296).

Then, CPU 31 has recording data file list selection screen 600displayed. Here, the selected file is displayed as a file in which norecording data is stored.

Referring again to FIG. 98, when CPU 31 determines in step SD276 thatthe coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not withinthe display range of stop command icon 610#, the process returns to stepSD275.

When the touch position data has not been input from touch panel 13 instep SD275, CPU 31 determines whether the capacity of the recording datahas reached the capacity limit of the slot or not (step SD278).

When CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity of the recordingdata has not reached the capacity limit of the slot, the process againreturns to step SD275.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity of the recordingdata has not reached the capacity limit of the slot, the process againreturns to step SD275.

Then, when CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity of therecording data has reached the capacity limit of the slot, the recordingprocessing ends (step SD279). Then, the process proceeds to step SD290in FIG. 100. The subsequent processing is as described above.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD271 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of recording command icon 610, CPU 31 then determineswhether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data iswithin the display range of “quit” icon 615 or not.

When CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that the coordinate value indicatedby the touch position data is within the display range of “quit” icon615, CPU 31 has recording data file list selection screen 600 asdescribed in connection with FIG. 95 displayed.

On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that thecoordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not within thedisplay range of “quit” icon 615, the process proceeds to step SD270#.

As a result of this processing, the user can create a recording datafile freely recorded by the user through the microphone in the main bodyand reproduce the created recording data file. In addition, the functionto display the created recording data file by selecting recording dataselection icon 544 described in connection with FIG. 65 and to outputthe recording data file recorded in a similar manner as sound effectfrom the speaker can also be performed.

In the present embodiment described above, for example, a case where theslot storing the recording data file is provided in memory 34 forstorage embedded in game device 10 has been described. Storage of therecording data file, however, is not limited to storage in memory 34 forstorage, and for example, the recording data file may be stored in amemory card such as an SD card in accordance with a user's operationinstruction.

10. Storage Medium Storing Program

Description above has been provided on the premise that variousapplication programs to be executed are stored in any of at least datamemory 34 for storage, memory card 28, and memory card 29. A morepreferred embodiment of an application program stored in each storagemedium will be exemplified hereinafter.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for illustrating a storage medium that can be usedwith game device 10 according to the present embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 103, data memory 34 for storage embedded in gamedevice 10 is provided with a program area and a data area separately foreach other. Typically, a first photographing function program 901 (forexample, photographing function program 52 or photographing applicationprogram 53 described previously), a first recording function program 902(for example, sound application program 57 described previously), asecond photographing function program 903 (which is a program that hasnot yet been described so far, for example, a program similar tophotographing application program 53 described previously that allowsstorage of taken images also in a memory in an attached card complyingwith dedicated specifications in a photographing mode and allows displayof taken images stored in the memory in the attached card complying withdedicated specifications), a second recording function program 904(which is a program that has not yet been described so far, for example,a program similar to sound application program 57 described previouslythat allows storage of audio data also in a memory in an attached cardcomplying with dedicated specifications and allows utilization of audiodata stored in the memory in the attached card complying with dedicatedspecifications), a first photograph utilization program 905 (which is aprogram that has not yet been described so far, for example, a programhaving an edition function (only the edition function in thephotographing mode described previously) and a photograph viewingfunction (the photograph display mode described previously) inphotographing application program 53 described previously), a firstaudio utilization program 906 (which is a program that has not yet beendescribed so far, for example, a program having functions of soundapplication program 57 described previously with the recording functionbeing deleted therefrom), a second photograph utilization program 907(which is a program that has not yet been described so far, for example,a program that has only the photograph display mode of photographingapplication program 53 described previously and in addition allowsdisplay of taken images stored in a memory in an attached card complyingwith dedicated specifications), and a second audio utilization program907 (which is a program that has not yet been described so far, forexample, a program having functions of sound application program 57described previously with the recording function being deletedtherefrom, that allows reproduction or edition of the audio data storedin the memory in the attached card complying with dedicatedspecifications) can be stored in the program area.

It is assumed that first photographing function program 901, firstrecording function program 902, first photograph utilization program905, and first audio utilization program 906 among these programs arestored in advance (pre-installed) in data memory 34 for storage of gamedevice 10.

In contrast, second photographing function program 903, second recordingfunction program 904, second photograph utilization program 907, andsecond audio utilization program 907 are downloaded from a not-showndistribution server through wireless communication module 38, localcommunication module 39, or other communication means.

In addition, a data area 909 can store in a non-volatile manner, imagepick-up data obtained by first or second photographing function program901 or 903 and/or audio data obtained by first or second recordingfunction program 902 or 904 or the like. It is noted that image pick-updata obtained by the first photographing function program and imagepick-up data obtained by the second photographing function program maybe stored in the same area without distinction, so that both of them canbe utilized. Alternatively, the audio data obtained by the firstrecording function program and the audio data obtained by the secondrecording function program may be stored in the same area withoutdistinction, so that both of them can be utilized.

For better understanding, FIG. 103 shows an “embedded NAND” representinga NAND-type flash memory typically implementing data memory 34 forstorage. Naturally, memory 34 for storage may be implemented by anon-volatile memory other than the NAND-type flash memory.

In addition, memory card 28 (typically an SD card) implemented by auniversal specifications card complying with universal specificationscan be attached to game device 10 according to the present embodimentthrough memory card interface 36 (FIG. 18). Memory card 28 can storevarious types of data in a non-volatile manner. Namely, memory card 28is provided with a data area 910.

Moreover, any of various memory cards 29-1 to 29-4 implemented by adedicated specifications card complying with dedicated specificationscan selectively be attached to game device 10 according to the presentembodiment through memory card interface 37 (FIG. 18). Each of memorycards 29-1 to 29-4 is provided with a program area and a data areaseparately from each other.

More specifically, it is assumed that memory card 28-1 stores aphotographing function program 921 (a program having a function similarto that of photographing function program 2 described previously, butdifferent in specific contents thereof) and a photograph utilizationprogram 922 (a program having a function similar to that of the secondphotograph utilization program described previously, but different inspecific contents thereof). In addition, memory card 29-1 is providedwith a data area 923 where image pick-up data and/or audio data can bestored in a non-volatile manner.

Similarly, it is assumed that memory card 29-2 stores a photographingfunction program 931 (a program having a function similar to that ofphotographing function program 2 described previously, but different inspecific contents thereof; storage destination of taken images beinglimited to a non-volatile memory 933 in the card itself) and aphotograph utilization program 932 (a program having a function similarto that of photograph utilization program 2 described previously, butdifferent in specific contents thereof; photographs that can be utilizedbeing limited to taken images stored in non-volatile memory 933 in thecard itself). In addition, memory card 28-2 is provided with a data area933 where image pick-up data and/or audio data can be stored in anon-volatile manner.

In addition, it is assumed that memory card 29-3 stores a recordingfunction program 941 (a program having a function similar to that ofrecording function program 2 described previously, but different inspecific contents thereof) and an audio utilization program 942 (aprogram having a function similar to that of audio utilization program 2described previously, but different in specific contents thereof).Moreover, memory card 28-3 is provided with a data area 943 where imagepick-up data and/or audio data can be stored in a non-volatile manner.

Similarly, it is assumed that memory card 28-4 stores a recordingfunction program 951 (a program having a function similar to that ofrecording function program 2 described previously, but different inspecific contents thereof; storage destination of recorded audio databeing limited to a non-volatile memory 953 in the card itself) and anaudio utilization program 952 (a program having a function similar tothat of audio utilization program 2 described previously, but differentin specific contents thereof; audio data that can be utilized beinglimited to audio data stored in non-volatile memory 933 in the carditself). Moreover, memory card 28-4 is provided with a data area 953where image pick-up data and/or audio data can be stored in anon-volatile manner.

Programs stored in respective storage media are different from eachother in a provided function in a part or in its entirety, for example,even though a program is a photographing function program providing thesame photographing function.

For example, first photographing function program 901 pre-installed inthe main body of game device 10 and second photographing functionprogram 903 stored in game device 10 as a result of downloading aredifferent from each other in a variety of choices of storage destinationof image data obtained in photographing. Namely, according to firstphotographing function program 901, the obtained image pick-up data canselectively be stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage(data area 909, embedded NAND) and memory card 28 (SD card). On theother hand, according to second photographing function program 903, theobtained image pick-up data can selectively be stored in any of embeddeddata memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card28 (SD card), and memory card 29 attached to game device 10 (cardcomplying with dedicated specifications). Namely, second photographingfunction program 903 provides more sophisticated processing than firstphotographing function program 901, in terms of a variety of choices ofstorage destination of image pick-up data.

The processing as shown in FIG. 30 above is performed as a result ofexecution of any photographing function program by CPU 31. Difference ina function between similar photographing function programs leads to thedifferent number of button images for selecting a storage destinationshown in FIG. 31.

Similarly, according to first recording function program 902, theobtained audio data can selectively be stored in any of embedded datamemory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND) and memory card 28(SD card). On the other hand, according to second recording functionprogram 904, the obtained audio data can selectively be stored in any ofembedded data memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND),memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29 attached to game device 10(card complying with dedicated specifications). Namely, secondphotographing recording program 904 provides more sophisticatedprocessing than first recording function program 902, in terms of avariety of choices of storage destination of image pick-up data. It isnoted that the processing as shown in FIG. 30 above is implemented as aresult of execution of the recording function program by CPU 31.

It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 98 above is implementedas a result of execution of any recording function program by CPU 31.Difference in a function between similar recording function programsleads to difference in a variety of choices of a storage destination ofa recording data file, as shown in step SD290 in FIG. 100.

In addition, according to first photograph utilization program 905,image pick-up data stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage(data area 909, embedded NAND) and memory card 28 (SD card) canselectively be utilized. On the other hand, according to secondphotograph utilization program 907, image pick-up data stored in any ofembedded data memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND),memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29 attached to game device 10(card complying with dedicated specifications) can selectively beutilized. Namely, second photograph utilization program 907 providesmore sophisticated processing than first photograph utilization program905, in terms of a variety of choices of a storage medium from whichimage pick-up data can be read and utilized.

It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 32 above is implementedas a result of execution of any photograph utilization program by CPU31. Namely, image pick-up data that has already been obtained can beviewed (displayed) or the image pick-up data can be subjected to varioustypes of edition. Difference in a function between similar photographutilization programs leads to the different number of button images forallowing selection of a source of reading shown in FIG. 31.

Similarly, according to first audio utilization program 906, audio datastored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage (data area 909,embedded NAND) and memory card 28 (SD card) can selectively be utilized.On the other hand, according to second audio utilizing program 908,audio data stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage (dataarea 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29attached to game device 10 (card complying with dedicatedspecifications) can selectively be utilized. Namely, second audioutilization program 908 provides more sophisticated processing thanfirst audio utilization program 906, in terms of a variety of choices ofa storage medium from which audio data can be read and utilized.

It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 97 above is implementedas a result of execution of any audio utilization program by CPU 31.Difference in a function between similar audio utilization programsleads to difference in a variety of choices of a source from which audiodata to be reproduced is read.

Photographing function program 921 stored in memory card 29-1 provides afunction similar to that of second photographing function program 903stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely, according to photographingfunction program 921, obtained image pick-up data can selectively bestored in any of data memory 34 for storage embedded in the main body ofgame device 10 (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card),and memory card 29-1 itself (data area 923). Namely, photographingfunction program 921 provides more sophisticated processing than firstphotographing function program 901 stored in data memory 34 for storageembedded in the main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety ofchoices of a storage destination of image pick-up data.

In contrast, photographing function program 931 stored in memory card29-2 is restricted in a function that it can provide, as compared withphotographing function program 921. Namely, according to photographingfunction program 931, obtained image pick-up data can be stored only inmemory card 29-2 itself (data area 933).

In addition, photograph utilization program 922 stored in memory card29-1 provides a function similar to that of second photographutilization program 907 stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely,according to photograph utilization program 922, image pick-up datastored in any of data memory 34 for storage embedded in the main body ofgame device 10 (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card),and memory card 29-1 itself (data area 923) can selectively be utilized.Namely, photograph utilization program 922 provides more sophisticatedprocessing than first photograph utilization program 905 stored in datamemory 34 for storage embedded in the main body of game device 10, interms of a variety of choices of a storage medium from which imagepick-up data can be read and utilized.

In contrast, photograph utilization program 932 stored in memory card29-2 is restricted in a function that it can provide, as compared withphotograph utilization program 922. Namely, according to photographutilization program 932, image pick-up data stored in memory card 29-2itself (data area 933) can only be utilized.

Similarly, recording function program 941 stored in memory card 29-3provides a function similar to that of second recording function program904 stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely, according to recordingfunction program 941, obtained audio data can selectively be stored inany of data memory 34 for storage embedded in the main body of gamedevice 10 (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), andmemory card 29-3 itself (data area 943). Namely, recording functionprogram 941 provides more sophisticated processing than first recordingfunction program 902 stored in data memory 34 for storage embedded inthe main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety of choices of astorage destination of audio data.

In contrast, recording function program 951 stored in memory card 29-4is restricted in a function that it can provide, as compared withrecording function program 941. Namely, according to recording functionprogram 951, obtained audio data can be stored only in memory card 29-4itself (data area 953).

In addition, audio utilization program 942 stored in memory card 29-3provides a function similar to that of second audio utilization program908 stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely, according to audioutilization program 942, image pick-up data stored in any of data memory34 for storage embedded in the main body of game device 10 (data area909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29-3itself (data area 943) can selectively be utilized. Namely, audioutilization program 942 provides more sophisticated processing thanfirst audio utilization program 906 stored in data memory 34 for storageembedded in the main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety ofchoices of a storage medium from which audio data can be read andutilized.

In contrast, audio utilization program 952 stored in memory card 29-4 isrestricted in a function that it can provide, as compared with audioutilization program 942. Namely, according to audio utilization program942, audio data stored in memory card 29-4 itself (data area 953) canonly be utilized.

In game device 100 according to the present embodiment, reading andexecution of an application stored in memory cards 29-1 to 29-4 that arememory cards complying with dedicated specifications is permitted,however, reading and execution of an application stored in memory card28 which is a memory card complying with universal specifications isprohibited.

Thus, game device 100 according to the present embodiment can executevarious applications stored in various types of storage media.Therefore, a degree of freedom of a method of marketing or distributingan application program can be enhanced. For example, an applicationprogram capable of executing only a basic function may be pre-installedin data memory 34 for storage embedded in game device 10 and anapplication program may be marketed in such a manner that an applicationprogram capable of executing a more sophisticated function is downloadedor provided in a form of a card complying with dedicated specifications.

11. Function and Effect of Present Embodiment and Other Features

The present invention is implemented as embodiments as described above,however, the present invention essentially includes the followingaspects. In the description below, for better understanding of thepresent invention, correspondence with the embodiments described aboveis shown, however, reference numerals, supplemental explanation and thelike in parentheses are not intended to limit the present invention inany manner.

First Aspect

According to the first aspect of the present invention, a portable imagepick-up device (10) including a first housing (lower housing 11), asecond housing (upper housing 21), a first image pick-up portion (outercamera 25), a first display portion (lower LCD 12), touch coordinatedetection means (touch panel 13), first display control means (CPU 31performing step SB6), and change means (CPU 31 performing step SB5) isprovided. The second housing is foldably connected to the first housing.The first image pick-up portion is provided in an outer surface of thesecond housing when folded. The first display portion has a displayscreen in an inner surface of the first housing when folded. The touchcoordinate detection means detects touch coordinates on the displayscreen of the first display portion. The first display control meanscauses the first display portion to display a live image currentlypicked-up by the first image pick-up portion. The change means changesthe live image based on an input to the touch coordinate detectionmeans.

It is noted that the above phrase “changes the live image based on aninput to the touch coordinate detection means” typically includes thefollowing examples, but not limited thereto, and includes combining aprescribed image with a live image by providing a touch input to thelive image (typically, at a position based on a touch input) orperforming prescribed image conversion processing on a live image(typically, performing image conversion processing on a position or anarea based on a touch input).

-   -   Drawing an image handwritten by a touch input on a live image    -   Combining a stamp image at a touched position with a live image    -   Performing image processing for distorting an image at a touched        position or in a touched area on a live image    -   Performing processing for changing color at a touched position        or in a touched area on a live image

According to this aspect, the following first problem can be solved.

First Problem

In the portable phone described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), an image being picked-up by the camera(a live image; an image which is a picked-up image output from thecamera and displayed as a moving image in real-time) is displayed on adisplay screen provided in a housing on which the camera is mounted.This is because, since a photographing direction of the camera isopposite to a direction in which the live image is displayed, the liveimage is displayed such that a user can view the live image in the samedirection as a direction of viewing a real view, and thus it is easy forthe user to recognize where the user is photographing in the real view.In the portable phone described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), however, it is impossible to perform anedition operation on the live image.

Here, the edition operation on the live image is an operation formodifying the live image, such as superimposing on the live image animage prepared in advance and referred to as a stamp image or a sealimage and an image handwritten by a user, and the like. Examples ofdevices capable of such an edition operation include those in JapanesePatent Laying-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5), Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent Document 6), Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 01-297986 (Patent Document 7), Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 2002-125176 (Patent Document 8), and Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 2004-320091 (Patent Document 9).

For example, in the image pick-up device described in Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5), an input to a still imageor a live image can be made through a touch panel. In this image pick-updevice, however, since a screen for displaying a live image is locatedon a back side of a camera lens (see FIG. 1 of Japanese PatentLaying-Open No. 04-156791), it is difficult to place the image pick-updevice with the touch panel facing upward, and a user cannot perform anedition operation (a touch input operation to the touch panel) in astable manner.

Further, in an audio and image recording/displaying device described inJapanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent Document 6), a mouseis used as an input device for adding a handwritten image to a liveimage displayed on a display portion. Thus, it is impossible to performan intuitive edition operation to directly touch a live image. Inaddition, when the audio and image recording/displaying device above isplaced, a photographing direction of a camera cannot be changed in anup-down direction, and hence a degree of freedom of photographing islimited when the audio and video recording/displaying device is placed.

Further, according to a device described in Japanese Patent Laying-OpenNo. 01-297986 (Patent Document 7), an image created by a user with adigitizer can be superimposed on a picked-up image. In the device above,however, the user merely creates in advance an image with the digitizerand superimposes the created image on a picked-up image, and the usercannot perform an edition operation on a live image. In addition, thedigitizer is provided separately from a camera (see FIG. 1 of JapanesePatent Laying-Open No. 01-297986) or integrally with the camera (seeFIGS. 5 and 6 of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 01-297986). Thus, whenthe digitizer is provided separately from the camera, the device issuitable for use in a placed state. On the other hand, in using thedevice while holding the same, both of two devices (the camera and thedigitizer) should be held, which leads to difficulty in operating thedevice. When the digitizer is provided integrally with the camera, sincea display screen is arranged perpendicular to a surface on which thedevice is placed as in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791 (PatentDocument 5) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478 (PatentDocument 6) above, an operation of the digitizer is difficult.

Devices disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2002-125176 (PatentDocument 8) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-320091 (PatentDocument 9) are stationary devices, and two manners of use includingholding the device and placing the device are not taken intoconsideration.

Function and Effect According to First Aspect

According to the first aspect, in order to address the first problemabove, a portable image pick-up device with which it is easy to performan edition operation on a live image can be provided.

Namely, according to the first aspect, a camera is provided in an upperhousing (the second housing) of a foldable portable image pick-updevice, and a live image being picked-up by the camera is displayed on ascreen provided in a lower housing (the first housing). By using a touchpanel provided on the screen, a user can perform an edition operationdirectly on the live image. According to the feature above, since aphotographing direction of the camera can be changed independently of asurface on which an edition operation on a live image is performed (asurface of the touch panel), the touch panel can be arranged at such anangle as facilitating the user's operation in either holding or placingthe image pick-up device for use. Namely, an edition operation on a liveimage is facilitated. In other words, even when the touch panel isarranged at such an angle as facilitating the user's operation, thephotographing direction of the camera can freely be adjusted and hencephotographing can easily be performed.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the portableimage pick-up device may further include a second display portion (upperLCD 22), storage means (data memory 34 for storage), storing means (CPU31 performing step SB9), and second display control means (CPU 31performing step SB10). The second display portion has a display screenin an inner surface of the second housing when folded. The storing meanscauses the storage means to store the live image that has been changedby the change means as a stored image in accordance with a prescribedoperation. The second display control means causes the second displayportion to display the stored image.

According to this aspect, by displaying a picked-up image on a displayscreen facing in a direction opposite to the photographing direction ofthe camera, a stored image that has already been taken can be presentedto the user together with a live image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, in the thirdinvention, the second display control means may cause the second displayportion to display a stored image stored in response to the prescribedoperation, in accordance with the prescribed operation being performed.

According to this aspect, when the user performs a photographingoperation, an image obtained by the photographing operation is displayedon the second display portion immediately after the photographingoperation. Therefore, (though the photographing direction does notcorrespond to a direction in which a live image is displayed,) bycausing the photographing direction of the camera to correspond to adirection in which a taken image is displayed, the picked-up image canbe presented to the user so that the user easily recognizes thephotographing direction.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the firstimage pick-up portion may be arranged in an area of the outer surface ofthe second housing corresponding to non-screen areas of the innersurface of the second housing provided on both right and left sides ofthe second display portion, on a side more distant from a lower side ofthe second housing than a center thereof in an up-down direction.

According to this aspect, by arranging the first image pick-up portionon an upper side of the upper housing (the second housing), when theportable image pick-up device is held for use, an image of a hand of theuser holding the lower housing can be prevented from being picked-up. Inaddition, when the portable image pick-up device is placed for use,since a distance from a surface on which the portable image pick-updevice is placed to the first image pick-up portion is increased, animage of the surface on which the portable image pick-up device isplaced can be prevented from being picked-up. Further, by arranging thecamera in a non-screen area of the upper housing, a space of thenon-screen area is effectively used and the device can be reduced insize.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, a prescribedimage for performing the photographing operation may be displayed on thefirst display portion. Here, the portable image pick-up device furtherincludes storage means (data memory 34 for storage) and storing means(CPU 31 performing step SB9). The storing means causes the storage meansto store the live image that has been changed by the change means as astored image, in accordance with an operation to designate theprescribed image through coordinate input means.

According to this aspect, a photographing operation can be performed byoperating the touch panel. In other words, since an edition operationand a photographing operation can both be performed through the touchpanel, it becomes extremely easy for the user to perform thephotographing operation after the edition operation.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the portableimage pick-up device may further include an operation button (button 14Iand/or 14J), storage means (data memory 34 for storage) and storingmeans (CPU 31 performing step SB9). The operation button is provided atleast at one of right and left ends of an upper side of the firsthousing. The storing means causes the storage means to store the liveimage that has been changed by the change means as a stored image inaccordance with an operation of the operation button.

According to this aspect, the user can perform a photographing operationby pressing the operation button with a hand holding the portable imagepick-up device. In other words, since the user can perform aphotographing operation while holding the portable image pick-up device,the user can easily perform a photographing operation.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the operationbutton may be provided at a left end of the upper side of the firsthousing as viewed from the inner surface of the first housing.

According to this aspect, while holding the portable image pick-updevice with a left hand and performing an edition operation on a liveimage with a right hand, the user can perform a photographing operationby pressing the operation button with the left hand. Therefore, the usercan quickly perform a photographing operation with the left hand whileperforming an edition operation with the right hand when holding theportable image pick-up device, and hence the user can easily perform anedition operation and a photographing operation.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the operationbutton may be provided at each of the right and left ends of the upperside of the first housing.

According to this aspect, either a right-handed user or a left-handeduser can easily perform an edition operation and a photographingoperation.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the portableimage pick-up device may further include a second image pick-up portion(inner camera 23) provided in an inner surface of the second housing.Here, the first display control means causes the first display portionto display a live image currently picked-up by the first image pick-upportion or the second image pick-up portion.

According to this aspect, by providing the image pick-up means also inthe inner surface of the second housing, photographing can be performedalso in a direction opposite to a photographing direction of the firstimage pick-up portion.

According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, the portableimage pick-up device may further include an operation button (button 14Iand/or 14J), storage means (data memory 34 for storage) and storingmeans (CPU 31 performing step SB9). The operation button is provided atat least one of right and left ends of an upper side of the firsthousing. The storing means causes the storage means to store the liveimage that has been changed by the change means as a stored image inaccordance with an operation of the operation button. The first housinghas a first shaft portion (11A) provided to project from the innersurface of the first housing in a direction perpendicular thereto. Thesecond housing has a second shaft portion (21A) pivotably connected tothe first shaft portion. The second image pick-up portion is arranged inthe second shaft portion.

According to this aspect, by providing the second image pick-up portionin the shaft portion (the second shaft portion), a space for the deviceis saved. Further, since the second shaft portion is located on theinner surface of the first housing, when the two housings are folded,the second image pick-up portion faces the first housing. Thus, when theportable image pick-up device is closed, the second image pick-upportion is covered with the inner surface of the first housing and notexposed to the outside, thereby protecting the second image pick-upportion.

According to an alternative aspect of the first aspect, a programexecuted by a computer of a portable image pick-up device for achievingthe functions in the invention described above may also be provided. Theprogram provides a program executed by a computer of a portable imagepick-up device including the first housing above, the second housingabove, the first image pick-up portion above, the first display portionabove, and the touch coordinate detection means above, and causes thecomputer to execute a first display control step (SB6) and a change step(SB5). In the first display control step, the computer causes the firstdisplay portion to display a live image currently picked-up by the firstimage pick-up portion. In the change step, the computer changes the liveimage based on an input to the touch coordinate detection means.

Second Aspect

According to the second aspect of the present invention, an imagepick-up device including a first housing (lower housing 11), a secondhousing (upper housing 21), a first display portion (lower LCD 12), afirst image pick-up portion (outer camera 25), a plurality of operationbuttons (buttons 14A to 14E), and a touch panel (13) is provided. Thefirst housing has a horizontally long shape. The second housing has ahorizontally long shape, and a long side thereof is connected to anupper long side of the first housing such that the first and secondhousings are foldable. The first display portion has a display screenprovided in an inner surface thereof, which is a surface located insidewhen the first and second housings are folded. The first image pick-upportion is provided in an outer surface of the second housing which is asurface located outside when the first and second housings are folded,and arranged at an end portion opposite to a connection portion wherethe second housing is connected to the first housing. The plurality ofoperation buttons are provided on the inner surface of the firsthousing, on opposing sides of the display screen in a longitudinaldirection of the first housing. The touch panel is provided on thedisplay screen.

According to this aspect, the following second problem can be solved.

Second Problem

In the image pick-up device disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), the vertically long housings arearranged lengthwise and connected to each other. Thus, a width of theimage pick-up device is too small for a user to firmly hold the imagepick-up device with both hands. Further, since the display screen isprovided across the entire surface of each housing, when the user holdsthe image pick-up device either lengthwise or sideways, fingers arelocated on the screen, thereby deteriorating visibility of the screenand operability of the touch panel. On the other hand, when the userholds the image pick-up device such that the fingers are not located onthe screen, the user has to hold the image pick-up device at backsurfaces and side surfaces of the housings, and hence cannot firmly holdthe image pick-up device. Further, since the information equipmentdisclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (PatentDocument 4) is a notebook personal computer, it is assumed that thenotebook personal computer is used in a placed state in image pick-up,and the notebook personal computer cannot be held with hands for use inimage pick-up.

As described above, the image pick-up devices disclosed in JapanesePatent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and JapanesePatent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4) respectivelycannot firmly be held by the user while maintaining visibility of thescreen and operability of the touch panel in image pick-up. Thus, thereis a problem that hand movement is highly likely in image pick-up.Further, since the image pick-up device cannot firmly be held in imagepick-up, an operation in image pick-up has been difficult.

Function and Effect According to Second Aspect

According to the second aspect, in order to address the second problemabove, an image pick-up device that can firmly be held by the user whilemaintaining visibility of the display screen and operability of thetouch panel in image pick-up can be provided.

Namely, according to the second aspect, when the user holds the imagepick-up device sideways, the user can firmly hold the image pick-updevice by holding portions of the first housing on opposing sides of thedisplay screen (portions on which the operation buttons are provided).Here, hands of the user are located on the operation buttons, not on thedisplay screen. Thus, the display screen is not covered with hands andhidden, and visibility of the display screen can be maintained. In otherwords, an image pick-up device that can firmly be held by the user whilemaintaining visibility of the display screen in image pick-up can beachieved.

In addition, according to the second aspect, the display portion and thetouch panel are provided in the first housing held by the user.Therefore, even when the image pick-up device is held for use or evenwhen the image pick-up device is placed on a desk or the like for use,an operation of the touch panel is easy (as compared to the case wherethe touch panel is provided in the second housing).

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a second display portion (upper LCD22) of which display screen is provided in an inner surface of thesecond housing located inside when the first and second housings arefolded. Here, non-display-screen areas (B1 and B2) having a width aslarge as that of areas (A1 and A2) on the inner surface of the firsthousing on which the plurality of operation buttons are provided areprovided on the inner surface of the second housing, on opposing sidesof the second display portion.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the secondhousing may have a width as large as that of the first housing. In thiscase, the display screen of the first display portion and a displayscreen of the second display portion have the same width, and they areprovided in the same position with regard to the longitudinal direction.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a speaker provided inside thenon-display-screen area of the second housing.

According to each aspect above, since the image pick-up device includestwo display screens, more information can be displayed. Further,according to the configuration in which non-display-screen areas areprovided on opposing sides of the display screen on the second housing((1-2) above), even when the user rotates the image pick-up device by90° from a state where the image pick-up device is held sideways to holdthe image pick-up device lengthwise, the user can firmly hold the imagepick-up device. In other words, when the user holds the image pick-updevice lengthwise, the user can support the areas of the first housingon which the operation buttons are provided and the non-display-screenareas with thumbs and can support a back surface of each housing inwhich the display screen is provided with index fingers to littlefingers. Thus, while the user can firmly hold the image pick-up device,the thumbs are not located on the display screen, and visibility of thedisplay screen does not deteriorate. Further, according to the featureof (4) above, by arranging the speaker inside the non-display-screenarea of the second housing, the inside space of the second housing caneffectively be used and the image pick-up device can be made smaller insize.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the seconddisplay portion may display an image picked-up by the first imagepick-up portion in real time. Here, the first display portion displaysan operation screen for performing an operation to the image pick-updevice (see FIG. 42).

According to this aspect, the display screen on which the picked-upreal-time image is displayed and the first image pick-up portion forpicking up an image are both provided in the second housing. Thus, ifthe image pick-up direction of the first image pick-up portion ischanged, an orientation of the display screen is changed accordingly.Thus, the user can intuitively and easily grasp the image pick-updirection.

In addition, according to this aspect, since the operation screen isdisplayed on the display screen provided in the first housing held bythe user, the operation screen is displayed on the display screen in thevicinity of input means (the touch panel and the operation buttons).Therefore, the user can easily perform an operation while looking at theoperation screen.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, when areal-time image picked-up by the first image pick-up portion isdisplayed on the second display portion, the first display portion maydisplay an image for providing an input to the touch panel as theoperation screen. Thus, an operation to the image pick-up device caneasily be performed through the touch panel.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the firstdisplay portion may display an image for editing a picked-up image.Thus, the user can easily perform edition processing through the touchpanel.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a second image pick-up portion (innercamera 23) provided in an inner surface of the second housing locatedinside when the first and second housings are folded, and provided on aside closer to a coupling portion of the first and second housings thana screen of the second display portion. Thus, the user can pick upimages in two different directions without changing a manner of holdingthe image pick-up device. Further, when photographing is performed usingthe second image pick-up portion, as in the case of the first imagepick-up portion, the image pick-up direction can easily be changed byadjusting an angle of the second housing, and the image pick-updirection of the image pick-up portion can easily be changed withoutproviding a special mechanism. Further, since the second image pick-upportion is not exposed to the outside when the housings are folded, thesecond image pick-up portion can be protected by folding the housings.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include an image pick-up instruction button(button 14J) arranged at a right end of the upper long side of the firsthousing for giving an instruction to store a picked-up image. Thus,while holding the first housing, the user can easily press thephotographing instruction button with an index finger.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include two image pick-up instruction buttons(buttons 14J and 14I) arranged at opposing ends of the upper long sideof the first housing respectively, for giving an instruction to store apicked-up image. Thus, while holding the first housing, either aright-handed user or a left-handed user can easily press thephotographing instruction button with an index finger.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, weight of thefirst housing and parts provided in the first housing may be greaterthan that of the second housing and parts provided in the secondhousing.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, at least abattery, a circuit board on which electronic parts are mounted, and aconnector for removable connection of a storage medium may be providedin the first housing.

According to the two aspects above, when the image pick-up device isplaced on a desk or the like, the image pick-up device is less likely tofall down. Further, by making the first housing held by the user heavierthan the second housing, stability when the image pick-up device is heldcan be increased and hand movement in image pick-up can be prevented.

According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect, the secondhousing can be fixed at an angle smaller than 180° with respect to thefirst housing. Thus, by setting the angle between the housings to beslightly smaller than 180°, the outer surfaces of the housings fit to ashape of a hand, and hence it becomes easier to hold the image pick-updevice.

Third Aspect

According to the third aspect of the present invention, a foldable imagepick-up device including a first image pick-up portion (camera 23 or25), a first housing (lower housing 11), a second housing (upper housing21), and a coupling portion (shaft portions 11A and 21A) is provided.The coupling portion foldably couples the first housing and the secondhousing to each other. Further, the image pick-up device includes atleast one photographing button (buttons 14J and 14I) for giving aninstruction to record an image picked-up by the first image pick-upportion. At least one photographing button is provided on a side surfaceof the first housing, assuming an inner surface of the first housingwhen folded as a front surface, on a side where the second housing islocated when the first housing and the second housing are opened.

According to this aspect, the following third problem can be solved.

Third Problem

In the portable phone disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2003-333149 (Patent Document 10), when a user performs photographing, amanner of operation in which the user presses a first shutter buttonwith a thumb while holding the lower second housing with one hand isassumed. In other words, the user presses the first shutter button withthe thumb while touching the inner surface of the second housing with athumb and an outer surface of the second housing with other fingers (soas to sandwich the second housing between the thumb and other fingers).In such a manner of operation, since the thumb should be released fromthe second housing when pressing the first shutter button, the secondhousing cannot firmly be held. Thus, it is difficult to press the firstshutter button, and hand movement may occur when the first shutterbutton is pressed. Thus, the conventional foldable image pick-up devicesuffers from a problem that it is difficult to perform a photographingoperation by pressing the shutter button.

Function and Effect According to Third Aspect

According to the third aspect, in order to address the third problemabove, operability in the photographing operation can be improved.

Namely, according to the third aspect, by providing the photographingbutton on the side surface of the first housing on a side where thefirst housing is coupled to the second housing, the user can press thephotographing button with an index finger while holding the firsthousing by touching the inner surface of the first housing with a thumband an outer surface of the first housing with a middle finger or thelike (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, since the user can press thephotographing button while firmly holding the first housing, the buttonis easily pressed in a photographing operation, and hand movement isless likely. Thus, according to the feature of (2-1) above, operabilityin the photographing operation in the foldable image pick-up device canbe improved.

In addition, according to the third aspect, since the photographingbutton is provided on the side surface of the first housing, thephotographing operation can be performed even in a state where the imagepick-up device is placed with its outer surface of the first housingfacing downward. As the image pick-up portion is provided in the secondhousing, the user can freely change a photographing direction even in astate where the image pick-up device is placed.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the firstimage pick-up portion may be provided in an outer surface of the secondhousing when folded.

According to this aspect, since the first image pick-up portion isprovided in the second housing, the image pick-up direction can readilybe changed by changing an angle of the second housing with respect tothe first housing. Further, since the first image pick-up portion isprovided in the outer surface of the second housing, photographing in adirection the same as the line-of-sight of the user can be carried out.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the firstimage pick-up portion may be arranged in the outer surface of the secondhousing, on a side more distant from the coupling portion than a centerthereof in an up-down direction. Here, the first housing and the secondhousing are vertically coupled to each other, and a direction in whichthe first housing and the second housing are coupled to each other isdefined as the up-down direction. Further, a direction of a shaft bywhich the first housing and the second housing are coupled to each otheris defined as a left-right direction. For example, when the firsthousing has a horizontally long shape, a longitudinal direction of thefirst housing may be defined as a left-right direction.

Since the user presses the photographing button provided on the sidesurface of the first housing with an index finger as described above,the index finger may be located within an image pick-up range of thefirst image pick-up portion, depending on a position of the first imagepick-up portion. In contrast, according to the feature of (2-3) above,since the first image pick-up portion is located on a side distant fromthe connection portion with the first housing, the index finger can beprevented from being located within the image pick-up range of the firstimage pick-up portion.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, in the imagepick-up device, first and second buttons may be provided on left andright ends of the side surface respectively, as at least onephotographing button.

According to this aspect, since the photographing buttons are providedon the left and right ends of the side surface of the first housingrespectively, the user can easily press the photographing button evenwhen the user holds the image pick-up device with either a right hand ora left hand. Thus, according to the feature of (2-4) above, the user caneasily perform the photographing operation regardless of handedness.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a second image pick-up portion (innercamera 23). The second image pick-up portion is provided substantiallyat a center in a left-right direction of a device main surface (theoperation surface) formed by the inner surface of the first housing andan inner surface of the second housing when the image pick-up device isopened.

According to this aspect, since the second image pick-up portion isprovided on the device main surface, image pick-up in a direction towardthe user by the second image pick-up portion can be carried out.Further, since the second image pick-up portion is providedsubstantially at the center of the device main surface in the left-rightdirection, the user can easily adjust the image pick-up device to anappropriate position in the left-right direction, for example, inphotographing the user himself/herself.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a plurality of operation buttons(buttons 14A to 14F). The plurality of operation buttons are provided onthe inner surface of the first housing, on a right side and a left sideof the second image pick-up portion.

According to this aspect, by providing the operation buttons on theinner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the image pick-updevice while touching the operation buttons with thumbs. Since theoperation buttons are provided on the outer side of the second imagepick-up portion (in the left-right direction), the thumbs of the usercome in contact at positions on the outer side of the second imagepick-up portion. Thus, according to the feature of (2-6) above, apossibility that the thumbs are located within an image pick-up range ofthe second image pick-up portion can be lowered (naturally, withoutparticularly making the user aware of such a fact).

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a display portion (lower LCD 12) anda plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14F). The displayportion has a display screen substantially at a center of the innersurface of the first housing in a left-right direction. The plurality ofoperation buttons are provided on the inner surface of the firsthousing, on a left side and a right side of the display screen.

According to this aspect, by providing the operation buttons on theinner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the image pick-updevice while touching the operation buttons with thumbs. Here, since theoperation buttons are provided on the left and right sides of thedisplay portion, the thumbs of the user come in contact at positions onthe outer side of the display portion. Thus, according to the feature of(2-7) above, the thumbs are prevented from entering the display screenof the display portion and disturbing display (naturally, withoutparticularly making the user aware of such a fact).

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include a display portion (lower LCD 12), acoordinate input portion (touch panel 13), and a control unit (CPU 31).The display portion has a display screen provided in the inner surfaceof the first housing. The coordinate input portion is an input devicethrough which coordinates on the display screen can be input. Thecontrol unit has a prescribed image displayed on the display screen, andcauses recording of an image picked-up by the first image pick-upportion when an input in an area of the prescribed image is providedthrough coordinate input means.

According to this aspect, the user can perform a photographing operationthrough the coordinate input portion provided on the inner surface ofthe first housing. Thus, the user can easily perform a photographingoperation even when the image pick-up device is placed, with the outersurface of the first housing facing downward. Thus, as a photographingoperation using the coordinate input portion can be performed, it isunnecessary to operate the photographing button with an index finger andthe photographing operation can easily be performed in various holdingmanners (for example, in a holding manner in which the second housing islocated on a lower side).

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the controlunit may have the prescribed image displayed substantially at a centerof the first housing in a left-right direction.

According to this aspect, since the prescribed image to be touched whenthe user performs a photographing operation is displayed substantiallyat the center of the first housing, the user can easily perform anoperation in operating the touch panel with either a right hand or aleft hand. Thus, according to this aspect, even in performing aphotographing operation in a state where the image pick-up device isplaced with the outer surface of the first housing facing downward, theuser can easily perform the photographing operation regardless ofhandedness.

According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, the firsthousing may have a length in a left-right direction not smaller than 100mm and not larger than 150 mm and a length in an up-down direction notsmaller than 60 mm and not larger than 90 mm.

According to this aspect, by setting a length of the first housing to anappropriate length, that is, by setting the length of the first housingin the left-right direction not smaller than 100 mm and not larger than150 mm and the length of the first housing in the up-down direction notsmaller than 60 mm and not larger than 90 mm, the image pick-up devicecan easily be held when it is held with either one hand or both hands.In other words, according to this aspect, difficulty in holding theimage pick-up device with one hand because of its too long a length inthe left-right direction or with both hands because of its too short alength in the left-right direction is not likely. Further, since thefirst housing has such a length in the up-down direction that the firsthousing fits into a palm, it is easy for the user to hold the imagepick-up device in holding the image pick-up device with either one handor both hands.

Fourth Aspect

According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, an imagepick-up device including a first housing (lower housing 11), a secondhousing (upper housing 21), a first display portion (lower LCD 12), asecond display portion (upper LCD 22), an image pick-up portion (innercamera 23), and an audio input portion (microphone 42) is provided. Thesecond housing has a lower side connected to an upper side of the firsthousing such that the first and second housings are foldable. The firstdisplay portion has a display screen provided in an inner surface of thefirst housing when folded. The second display portion has a displayscreen provided in an inner surface of the second housing when folded.The image pick-up portion is provided in the inner surface of the secondhousing, between the display screen of the first display portion and thedisplay screen of the second display portion. The audio input portion isprovided in the inner surface of the second housing, between the displayscreen of the first display portion and the display screen of the seconddisplay portion.

According to this aspect, the following fourth problem can be solved.

Fourth Problem

As in the portable instruments described in Japanese Patent Laying-OpenNo. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2), Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2005-184060 (Patent Document 11), and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2007-201727 (Patent Document 12) above, in the structure in which ascreen is provided in each of the inner surface and the outer surface ofthe housing, the user can look at only one screen at a time.Accordingly, an amount of information that can be presented to the userat a time is less. As a result, the user cannot obtain (view) sufficientinformation in image pick-up and audio input.

Meanwhile, in the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.09-247634 (Patent Document 13) above, as a user can look at two screensat a time, an amount of information that can be presented to the user ata time is large. In these telephones, however, since positions of thecamera and the microphone are inappropriate, it is difficult to carryout image pick-up and audio input for the following reasons.

In the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (PatentDocument 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 09-247634 (PatentDocument 13) above, the camera and the microphone are provided indifferent housings and arranged at end portions of the telephone,respectively. Specifically, the camera is arranged at an end portion ofone housing and the microphone is arranged at an end portion of theother housing. Accordingly, in the case where a folded angle is not180°, an image pick-up direction of the camera and a direction in whichthe microphone collects sound are different from each other. Further,here, the direction in which the microphone collects sound and adirection in which a “screen of a housing provided with the camera”faces are different from each other. A foldable device is meaningfullyused, for example, in such a manner that it is placed on a desk with afolding angle thereof being set to a desired angle. Here, the device iseasily operated if setting is made such that a screen of an upperhousing faces the user. In these prior telephones, however, in such asituation, the direction in which the microphone collects sound isdifferent from a direction of a mouth of the user.

Further, in the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.09-247634 (Patent Document 13) above, the camera is provided at the endportion of the housing, and two screens are both present under thecamera. Thus, in order to look at information displayed on each screenfrom a state where the line-of-sight is directed toward the camera, theline-of-sight should inevitably be moved downward, and particularly, anamount of movement of user's line-of-sight is great when information ona lower screen is viewed. Further, in order for the user to equally lookat information displayed on two screens, user's line-of-sight isdesirably moved with reference to a center between the two screens. Inthe telephone of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (PatentDocument 1) or Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 09-247634 (PatentDocument 13) above, however, such a line-of-sight direction and thephotographing direction of the camera are different from each other.

Function and Effect According to Fourth Aspect

According to the fourth aspect, in order to address the fourth problemabove, an image pick-up device with which it is easy for a user to carryout image pick-up and audio input can be provided.

Namely, according to the fourth aspect, since the image pick-up portionand the audio input portion are provided between the two screens, if theuser faces the two screens in image pick-up and audio input, the cameraand the microphone are located in front of the user. Therefore, the usercan successfully achieve image pick-up and audio input while facing thetwo screens (without changing an orientation of user's face). Further,for example, in picking up an image of the user himself/herself with thecamera, the user performs an image pick-up operation looking at thecamera while looking at the screen. According to the feature of (3-1)above, since the camera is arranged between the two screens, the usercan minimize a distance of movement of his or her line-of-sight betweenthe camera and the screen in the image pick-up operation, and the imagepick-up operation while looking at the two screens is facilitated.Further, according to the feature of (3-1) above, since the camera andthe microphone are arranged substantially at the same position in thesecond housing, the user naturally turns his or her face to themicrophone if the user faces the camera in image pick-up. Thus, user'svoice can easily be collected by the audio input portion and sensedaccurately.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include an operation button (buttons 14A to14F) provided in the first housing.

According to this aspect, since the operation button and the microphoneare provided in different housings, collection by the microphone ofoperation sound (noise) generated when the operation button is operatedis less likely, and desired voice and sound can accurately be detectedby the microphone. Further, according to the feature of (3-2) above,since the operation button is provided in the first housing, it isconsidered that the user holds the first housing in image pick-up. Thus,the user can easily change an image pick-up direction to a desireddirection by turning the second housing to the desired direction withoutchanging his or her position for holding the image pick-up device(without moving the first housing).

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, the secondhousing may have, in its lower side, a shaft portion (21A) pivotablycoupled to the upper side of the first housing. Here, the image pick-upportion and the audio input portion are arranged in the shaft portion.

According to this aspect, by arranging the image pick-up portion and theaudio input portion in the shaft portion for achieving a foldablestructure, a distance between the two screens can be shorter than in thecase where the image pick-up portion and the audio input portion arearranged between the screen of the second display portion and the shaftportion. Thus, the two screens can be arranged closer to each other, andit becomes easier for the user to look at the two screens.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, may beprovided substantially at a center of the second housing in a left-rightdirection.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, since theimage pick-up portion and the audio input portion are arrangedsubstantially at the center also in the left-right direction, it becomeseasier for the user to achieve image pick-up and audio input.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, may bearranged substantially at a center in a left-right direction. Here, theaudio input portion is arranged at a position displaced from a positionof the image pick-up portion in the left-right direction.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, by arrangingthe image pick-up portion at the center in the left-right direction, forexample, it becomes easier for the user to pick up an image of the userhimself/herself such that he/she is located at a center of an imagepick-up region. In addition, even if the audio input portion is arrangedat a position slightly displaced from the center, it does not have asignificant effect on detection accuracy. Further, according to thisaspect, since the image pick-up portion and the audio input portion canbe juxtaposed to each other in the left-right direction, a distancebetween the two screens can be shorter than in the case where the imagepick-up portion and the audio input portion are juxtaposed to each otherin an up-down direction. Thus, according to this aspect, the imagepick-up portion and the audio input portion can be arranged such that itbecomes easier to look at the two screens while ease of image pick-upand audio input is maintained.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, the imagepick-up device may further include audio output portions (speakers)provided in the inner surface of the second housing, on opposing sidesof the display screen of the second display portion in a left-rightdirection, respectively.

According to this aspect, when the user holds the image pick-up deviceso as to face the two screens, the audio output portions are arranged inpositions corresponding to left and right ears (in positions on bothleft and right sides of user's face), respectively. Thus, a stereoeffect can effectively be obtained.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a firsthousing (lower housing 11), a second housing (upper housing 21), a firstdisplay portion (lower LCD 12), a second display portion (upper LCD 22),an image pick-up portion (inner camera 23), and an audio output portion(speaker) are provided. The second housing has a lower side connected toan upper side of the first housing such that the first and secondhousings are foldable. The first display portion has a display screenprovided in an inner surface of the first housing when folded. Thesecond display portion has a display screen provided in an inner surfaceof the second housing when folded. The image pick-up portion is providedin the inner surface of the second housing, between the screen of thefirst display portion and the screen of the second display portion. Theaudio output portions are provided in the inner surface of the secondhousing, on opposing sides of the display screen of the second displayportion in a left-right direction, respectively.

According to this aspect, as in the preceding aspect, when the userholds the image pick-up device so as to face the two screens, a stereoeffect can effectively be obtained. Further, as in the first invention,when the user faces the two screens, the camera is located in front ofthe user. Thus, the user can successfully pick up an image while facingthe two screens (without changing an orientation of user's face).

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a firsthousing (lower housing 11), a second housing (upper housing 21), a firstdisplay portion (lower LCD 12), a second display portion (upper LCD 22),and an image pick-up portion (inner camera 23) are included. The secondhousing has a lower side connected to an upper side of the first housingsuch that the first and second housings are foldable. The first displayportion has a display screen provided in an inner surface of the firsthousing when folded. The second display portion has a display screenprovided in an inner surface of the second housing when folded. Theimage pick-up portion is provided in a central portion in the left-rightdirection, and between the display screen of the first display portionand the display screen of the second display portion when the firsthousing and the second housing are opened. According to this aspect, byproviding the camera at the center between the two screens, movement ofthe user's line-of-sight from a state where the user looks at thecamera, for obtaining information displayed on the upper screen andinformation displayed on the lower screen, can be minimized. Further,even when the user looks at the information on any of the upper screenand the lower screen, a difference between the photographing directionof the camera and the user's line-of-sight is small, and an image of theuser facing the camera can be taken.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, an audioinput portion (microphone 42) provided in the central portion in theleft-right direction and between the display screen of the first displayportion and the display screen of the second display portion when thefirst housing and the second housing are opened may further be included.

According to this aspect, since the camera and the microphone arearranged substantially at the same position in the second housing, theuser naturally turns his or her face to the microphone if the user facesthe camera in image pick-up. Thus, user's voice can easily be collectedby the audio input portion and sensed accurately.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, may beprovided at a center in the left-right direction and between the displayscreen of the first display portion and the display screen of the seconddisplay portion when the first housing and the second housing areopened. Here, the audio input portion is provided in proximity to theimage pick-up portion.

According to this aspect, the image pick-up portion and the audio inputportion can be arranged such that it becomes easier to look at the twoscreens while ease of image pick-up and audio input is maintained.

According to an aspect similar to the fourth aspect of the presentinvention, an image pick-up device is structured to be capable oftransformation between a first form in which a first housing and asecond housing are stacked on each other and a second form in which thefirst housing and the second housing are opened. The image pick-updevice includes at least one photographing button provided on a sidesurface of the first housing with an inner surface thereof in the firstform being assumed as a front surface, on a side where the secondhousing is located in the second form, for giving an instruction torecord an image picked-up by an image pick-up portion.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a secondimage pick-up portion may be provided substantially at a center in aleft-right direction of a device main surface in the second form. Here,the image pick-up device further includes a plurality of operationbuttons provided on an inner surface of the first housing in the firstform, on the left side and the right side relative to the second imagepick-up portion.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a displayscreen may be provided substantially at a center in the left-rightdirection of the inner surface of the first housing in the first form.Here, the image pick-up device further includes operation buttonsprovided on the inner surface of the first housing, on the left side andthe right side of the display screen.

Fifth Aspect

According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, a launch program(61) executed by a computer (CPU 31) of an information processing device(10) including image pick-up means (cameras 23 and 25), capable ofstoring a plurality of application programs (53 to 56), and storing inadvance a prescribed photographing application program (53) forperforming photographing with the image pick-up means as the applicationprogram, is provided. The launch program is a program for selectivelylaunching an application program desired by a user from among theplurality of application programs above. The launch program causes thecomputer to function as: first launch operation acceptance means (CPU 31performing steps SA6 and SA11; hereinafter, steps are indicated onlywith step numbers); first launch means (SA12); photographing processingmeans (SA10); photographing enabling operation acceptance means (SA6,SA9); photographing operation acceptance means (SA24, SA25); secondlaunch operation acceptance means (SA24, SA28); and second launch means(SA30). The first launch operation acceptance means accepts a firstlaunch operation for selectively launching the plurality of applicationprograms. The first launch means launches an application programselected in the first launch operation from among the plurality ofapplication programs when the first launch operation is performed. Thephotographing processing means performs photographing processing forstoring an image picked-up by the image pick-up means in storage meansin the information processing device in accordance with a prescribedphotographing operation. The photographing enabling operation acceptancemeans accepts a photographing enabling operation for causing aphotographing enabled state in which the photographing processing by thephotographing processing means can be performed in accordance with thephotographing operation in a launch acceptance state of accepting thefirst launch operation. The photographing operation acceptance meansaccepts the photographing operation when the photographing enablingoperation is performed. The second launch operation acceptance meansaccepts a second launch operation for launching the photographingapplication program in the photographing enabled state. The secondlaunch means launches the photographing application program when thesecond launch operation is performed.

According to this aspect, the fifth problem below can be solved.

Fifth Problem

The first and second application programs above executable in theinformation processing device described in “‘Chotto Shot CameraInstruction Manual’ published by Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. onNov. 2, 2006” (Non-Patent Document 1) above have different functions(although having also common functions). Therefore, in a state where theuser performs photographing by executing any one of the applicationprograms, a case where a user desires (or needs) to use a functionattained only by the other application program is assumed. Here, inorder to use the desired function, the user has to perform a troublesomeoperation of ending execution of one of the application programs above,thereafter selecting the other application program in a menu screen orthe like, and launching the other application program.

Function and Effect According to Fifth Aspect

According to the fifth aspect, in order to address the fifth problemabove, a user-friendly information processing device capable ofperforming a plurality of types of photographing functions with a simpleoperation can be provided.

According to the fifth aspect, in the launch acceptance state, the usercan launch a selected application program by performing the first launchoperation, and can perform the photographing processing by thephotographing processing means by performing the photographing enablingoperation. Therefore, even in the launch acceptance state for launchingthe application program, the user can easily and quickly activate afunction of the photographing processing means. In addition, in thephotographing enabled state, the photographing application program canbe launched by performing the second launch operation. Therefore, evenduring the photographing processing by the photographing processingmeans, the user can easily and quickly launch the photographingapplication program by performing the second launch operation. In otherwords, according to the present embodiment, when the user desires to usea function (of the photographing application program) not provided bythe photographing processing means during use of a photographingfunction of the photographing processing means, the user can easily andquickly use the function by performing the second launch operation. Asdescribed above, according to the first invention, both a photographingfunction of the photographing processing means and a photographingfunction of the photographing application program can be performed witha simple operation, and a user-friendly information processing devicecan be provided.

Further, according to the fifth aspect, during performance of thephotographing function by the photographing processing means, thephotographing application program can directly be launched. In otherwords, since the other photographing function (the photographingfunction attained by the photographing application program) can easilybe activated from one photographing function (the photographing functionattained by the photographing processing means), the user can be led touse the other function through use of one function.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, a manner ofoperation of the photographing enabling operation may be different fromthat of the first launch operation.

According to this aspect, the photographing function attained by thephotographing processing means can easily be performed by an operationdifferent from the first launch operation for launching the selectedapplication program.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, thephotographing processing means may have only a part of a photographingfunction enabled as a result of execution of the photographingapplication program.

According to this aspect, the photographing function of thephotographing processing means which is a relatively simple function canquickly be activated from the launch acceptance state, and thephotographing application program having more functions can immediatelybe launched during performance of the photographing function of thephotographing processing means. Here, the user can be caused to use theinformation processing device in such an order that the informationprocessing device is initially operated based on the photographingfunction of the photographing processing means which is the simplefunction and then various photographing functions are utilized based onthe photographing application program having more functions. By usingthe information processing device in such an order, the user can use theinformation processing device in a manner gradually getting used to theoperation of the information processing device.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the launchprogram above may further cause the computer to function as imagedisplay means (SA5) for causing display means of the informationprocessing device to display the picked-up image (stored image) storedin the storage means in the launch acceptance state (FIG. 23).

According to this aspect, an image taken in the past is displayed in thelaunch acceptance state. Therefore, by taking a picture of which displayis desired, the user can customize a screen (menu screen) in the launchacceptance state for each user (for each information processing device).Further, a user who touches (uses) the information processing device forthe first time can be made aware that the information processing devicehas the photographing function.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the imagedisplay means may automatically change at prescribed timing, a picked-upimage to be displayed on the display means among a plurality ofpicked-up images stored in the storage means.

According to this aspect, by changing content of a displayed image atprescribed timing, variation in the menu screen is produced and the usercan be prevented from getting bored.

In a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the image display meansmay change a picked-up image to be displayed on the display means, attiming of launch of the information processing device.

According to this aspect, an image displayed in the launch acceptancestate is changed each time the information processing device is startedup. Thus, the user has things to look forward to (about “which imagewill be displayed”) at the time of start-up. Further, from the viewpointof the supplier of the information processing device, by giving the usersuch things to look forward to, the user can be prompted to start up theinformation processing device (that is, to use the informationprocessing device).

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the imagedisplay means may cause the display means of the information processingdevice to display in the launch acceptance state a picked-up image laststored in an immediately preceding photographing enabled state.

According to this aspect, an image taken in the photographing enabledstate is displayed in the launch acceptance state immediately after theend of that photographing enabled state. Therefore, in the launchacceptance state, the user can check an image last taken in thephotographing enabled state.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the launchprogram above further causes the computer to function as firsttransition means (SA21) and second transition means (SA4). The firsttransition means ends the launch acceptance state and causes transitionto the photographing enabled state in accordance with the photographingenabling operation. The second transition means ends the photographingenabled state and causes transition to the launch acceptance state inaccordance with a prescribed operation in the photographing enabledstate.

According to this aspect, since the photographing operation is notaccepted in the launch acceptance state, the user does not accidentallyperform the photographing operation in the launch acceptance state.Further, since the launch acceptance state has ended in thephotographing enabled state, display for causing the user to perform thefirst launch operation (for example, display of an image indicating anapplication program) is unnecessary. Therefore, a display area caneffectively be used, for example, by displaying a picked-up image on thescreen of the display device. Further, by not allowing acceptance of thefirst launch operation in the photographing enabled state, an operationin the photographing enabled state can be simplified and an operation iseasier for the user.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, in the secondtransition means, the prescribed operation above may be thephotographing operation.

According to this aspect, when the photographing operation is performedin the photographing enabled state, the photographing enabled state ends(after the photographing processing is performed). In other words, oncethe user performs the photographing operation in the photographingenabled state, the state of the information processing device returns tothe launch acceptance state. Accordingly, even a novice user who has notread an instruction manual or the like can naturally return to thelaunch acceptance state by performing the photographing operation.Therefore, a state where “the user does not know how to return from thephotographing enabled state to the launch acceptance state” can beprevented and a user-friendly information processing device can beprovided.

According to this aspect, since the state of the information processingdevice makes transition from the photographing enabled state to thelaunch acceptance state after the photographing operation, an imagerepresenting a result of photographing cannot be displayed in thephotographing enabled state. Here, when the invention according to theprevious aspect and the invention according to the present aspect arecombined, the image representing the result of photographing that couldnot be displayed in the photographing enabled state can be shown to theuser in the launch acceptance state immediately after the photographingenabled state, which is particularly effective.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, thephotographing enabling operation may be performed by performing anoperation the same as the photographing operation.

According to this aspect, since the photographing enabling operation andthe photographing operation are performed by performing the sameoperation, a series of operations for making transition to thephotographing enabled state and further performing photographing can beperformed by performing one type of operation, and thus the series ofoperations can easily be performed. Further, when the inventionaccording to the previous aspect and the invention according to thepresent aspect are combined, transition from the launch acceptance stateto the photographing enabled state and transition from the photographingenabled state to the launch acceptance state can be made by performingthe same operation. Therefore, even if the user accidentally performsthe photographing enabling operation or performs the photographingenabling operation without fully understanding a manner of operation tocause transition to the photographing enabled state, the user can returnto the original state (the launch acceptance state) by performing thesame operation again. Thus, a state where “the user does not know how toreturn from the photographing enabled state to the launch acceptancestate” can be prevented and a user-friendly information processingdevice can be provided.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, thephotographing enabling operation and the photographing operation may bean operation to press a prescribed button.

According to this aspect, the user can perform the photographingenabling operation and the photographing operation with a simpleoperation. Therefore, the photographing function of the photographingprocessing means can be activated with the simple operation and apicked-up image can be stored with the simple operation.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, theinformation processing device may include coordinate input means (touchpanel 13) through which a coordinate position on a screen of a displaydevice (lower LCD 12) can be input. Here, the first launch operationacceptance means causes display on the screen of at least a plurality ofimages (icon images 71 a to 71 c) among images corresponding to theplurality of application programs respectively, changes a displayedimage in accordance with an operation to scroll the screen, and acceptsas the first launch operation, an input to a position of the displayedimage through the coordinate input means. The first launch meanslaunches an application program corresponding to an icon image indicatedby the input accepted by the first launch operation acceptance means.The second launch operation acceptance means causes display of an image(72) indicating the photographing application program at a prescribedposition on the screen, and accepts as the second launch operation, aninput to the prescribed position through the coordinate input means. Thesecond launch means launches the photographing application program inaccordance with the input accepted by the second launch operationacceptance means.

According to this aspect, in the launch acceptance state, by performingan operation to select a position of one image from among a plurality ofimages indicating respective application programs through the coordinateinput means, the application program can be launched. In thephotographing enabled state, by performing an operation to designate aprescribed position at which an image indicating a photographingapplication is displayed through the coordinate input means, thephotographing application program can be launched. Further, in thelaunch acceptance state, for facilitating selection from imagesindicating the plurality of application programs respectively, adisplayed image (an application program) is changed by performing ascroll operation. Thus, for launching a desired application program inthe launch acceptance state, the user may have to perform an operationto scroll the screen and an operation to designate an image. On theother hand, in the photographing enabled state, since an imageindicating the photographing application program is always displayed ata prescribed position, the user can always easily launch thephotographing application program by performing only an operation todesignate the image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, when thesecond launch operation is performed, the second launch means may causethe computer to execute the photographing application program, using atleast a part of information set in the photographing processing by thephotographing processing means as an argument to be passed to thephotographing application program.

According to this aspect, setting in the photographing processing by thephotographing processing means is reflected also in processing based onthe photographing application program. Thus, when transition from thephotographing processing by the photographing processing means to theprocessing based on the photographing application program is made, theuser can similarly perform an operation and there is no need to changethe setting. Thus, according to the thirteenth invention, a furtheruser-friendly information processing device can be provided.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the programabove may further cause the computer to function as first-time start-updetermination means (SA1) and photographing leading means (SA2). Thefirst-time start-up determination means determines whether theinformation processing device is started up for the first time or notbefore acceptance of the first launch operation after start-up of theinformation processing device. When it is determined that theinformation processing device is started up for the first time, thephotographing leading means sets a state of the information processingdevice to the photographing enabled state or provides display allowingthe user to select whether or not to set the photographing enabledstate.

According to this aspect, when the information processing device isstarted up for the first time, the user can initially be caused toactually experience the photographing operation, so that a novice usercan get used to the photographing operation. Further, when the inventionaccording to the previous aspect and the invention according to thepresent aspect are combined, it is the photographing processing by thephotographing processing means having a relatively simple function thatis performed when the information processing device is started up forthe first time. Therefore, since the user performs the photographingoperation only with a simple function when the information processingdevice is started up for the first time, the user can relatively easilyperform the photographing operation even when he/she operates theinformation processing device for the first time.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, thephotographing application program may have a function to performprocessing for storing the picked-up image in the storage means and afunction to view a picked-up image stored as a result of thephotographing processing of the photographing processing means or of theprocessing based on the photographing application program.

According to this aspect, by using the photographing applicationprogram, the user can view an image taken based on any of thephotographing function of the photographing processing means and thephotographing application program.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, thephotographing processing means and the photographing application programmay be capable of performing a function common to a function of thephotographing processing means and a function enabled as a result ofexecution of the photographing application program, in response to thesame operation by the user.

According to this aspect, since the user can perform the same operationfor the same function even when a program executed for photographing ischanged, a user-friendly operation system can be provided.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the launchprogram may include a launch function program (51) for launching theapplication program and a photographing function program (52) forcausing the computer to function as the photographing processing means.Here, the photographing function program has a data size smaller thanthat of the photographing application program.

According to this aspect, by setting the photographing function programhaving a smaller data size as a program that can be launched in thelaunch acceptance state, a program for photographing can quickly belaunched in the launch acceptance state.

According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the launchprogram may include a launch function program (51) for launching theapplication program and a photographing function program (52) forcausing the computer to function as the photographing processing means.Here, the launch program above may further cause the computer tofunction as read means (SA4) for reading, at timing of execution of thelaunch function program, the photographing function program along withthe launch function program in prescribed storage means for storing aprogram executed by the computer, after start-up of the informationprocessing device.

According to this aspect, by reading the launch function program and thephotographing function program together, the photographing functionprogram can quickly be launched in the launch acceptance state.

According to an alternative aspect of the fifth aspect of the presentinvention, an information processing device including each means in theaspects above may be provided.

Sixth Aspect

According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, an imagecommunication system including a plurality of image communicationdevices (1) each having image storage means (28, 32, 34) for storingprescribed images, and allowing transmission and reception of theprescribed images among the plurality of image communication devices isprovided. An image communication device (10 t) serving to transmit animage among the plurality of image communication devices furtherincludes transmitter information transmission control means (CPU 31performing step SC63; hereinafter steps are indicated only with stepnumbers). The transmitter information transmission control meanstransmits as transmitter information (transmitter data) indicating atransmitter, its own identification information to other unspecifiedimage communication devices. An image communication device (10 r)serving to receive an image among the plurality of image communicationdevices further includes transmitter information reception means (SC84),selection means (SC85), and destination information transmission controlmeans (SC86, SC92). The transmitter information reception means receivesthe transmitter information. The selection means provides displayindicating the transmitter (Nt1 to Nt3) on display means (12) based onthe received transmitter information, and allows a user to selectwhether or not to receive an image from the image communication devicethat has transmitted the transmitter information. The destinationinformation transmission control means transmits as destinationinformation (receiver data) indicating a destination, its ownidentification information to the image communication device selected bythe selection means as the transmitter from which an image is to bereceived. The image communication device serving to transmit an imagefurther includes destination information reception control means (SC64),destination determination means (SC64, SC65), and image transmissionmeans (SC69). The destination information reception control meansreceives the destination information. The destination determinationmeans determines the image communication device to serve as thedestination based on the received destination information. The imagetransmission means transmits at least one of images stored in the imagestorage means to the destination determined by the destinationdetermination means. The image communication device serving to receivean image further includes image reception means (SC90) and image storagecontrol means (SC90). The image reception means receives an imagetransmitted by the image transmission means. The image storage controlmeans causes the image storage means to store the image received by theimage reception means. Transmission of the transmitter information fromthe transmitter information transmission control means to otherunspecified image communication devices includes, for example,transmission of the transmitter information without specifying adestination and transmission of the transmitter information to anunidentified image communication device in accordance with a requesttherefrom.

According to this aspect, the following sixth problem can be solved.

Sixth Problem

The electronic camera disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.10-341388 (Patent Document 14) communicates through infrared, andtherefore the transmission-end electronic camera and the reception-endelectronic camera should be arranged to face each other. Further, when aplurality of transmission-end electronic cameras are present in acommunication range of the reception-end electronic camera, thereception-end electronic camera is not allowed to select a camera fromamong the plurality of transmission-end electronic cameras.

Function and Effect According to Sixth Aspect

According to the sixth aspect, in order to address the sixth problemabove, an image communication system, an image communication device, andan image communication program allowing a user to receive an image froma desired transmission-end device when images are transmitted andreceived among devices are provided.

According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the imagecommunication device serving to receive an image is allowed to selectwhether or not to receive an image depending on a transmitter, therebypreventing reception of an image from an unintended transmitter. On theother hand, the image communication device serving to transmit an imagecan invite receivers to which an image is to be distributed, withoutspecifying in advance a device to receive an image, and distribute theimage.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, thetransmitter information reception means is capable of receiving aplurality of pieces of transmitter information transmitted to theunspecified image communication devices. The selection means providesdisplay of each piece of transmitter information in accordance with eachpiece of received transmitter information on the display means, andcauses a user to select any transmitter information.

According to this aspect, the image communication device serving toreceive an image is allowed to select a transmitter from which imagedata is to be received from among a plurality of transmitters. Forexample, when a plurality of image communication devices serving astransmitters are present, the image communication device serving toreceive an image is allowed to select an image communication devicedesired by a user from among the plurality of image communicationdevices, and to receive an image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image further includestransmitter display control means (SC65, FIG. 51). The transmitterdisplay control means causes display means (12) of the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image to provide indicationindicating the image communication device (Nr1 to Nr3) requesting imagetransmission, based on the destination information received from theimage communication device serving to receive an image.

According to this aspect, a user of the image communication deviceserving to transmit an image can know the destination imagecommunication device to which an image is to be transmitted.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, thetransmitter information includes transmitter user information (Dc) thatcan be set by a user of the image communication device serving totransmit an image. The selection means causes the display means of theimage communication device serving to receive an image to display thetransmitter user information included in the transmitter information asinformation indicating the image communication device transmitting thetransmitter information.

According to this aspect, a user of the image communication deviceserving to transmit an image can express its characteristic, and theimage communication device serving to receive the image also can easilyidentify the image communication device serving to transmit the image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, thedestination information includes destination user information (Dc) thatcan be set by a user of the image communication device serving toreceive an image, and the transmitter display control means causes thedisplay means of the image communication device serving to transmit animage to display the transmitter user information included in thedestination information as notification indicating the imagecommunication device requesting image transmission.

According to this aspect, a user of the image communication deviceserving to receive an image can express its characteristic, and theimage communication device serving to transmit an image also can easilyidentify the image communication device serving to receive an image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image further includes imageselection means (SC66) for selecting an image to be transmitted to theimage communication device that has transmitted the destinationinformation, in accordance with a user's operation, after reception ofthe destination information. The image transmission means transmits theimage selected by the image selection means to the image communicationdevice that has transmitted the destination information.

According to this aspect, an image desired by a user of the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image can be selected andtransmitted. Further, after the image communication device serving toreceive an image and the image communication device serving to transmitan image are determined, an image to be transmitted from the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image to the imagecommunication device is selected, so that the image communication deviceserving to transmit the image can change a type and the number of imagesto be transmitted to the image communication device serving to receivean image.

According to a more preferred aspect, the image selection means includesimage-to-be-transmitted display control means (FIG. 52). Theimage-to-be-transmitted display control means urges a user to select animage to be transmitted to the image communication device serving toreceive an image, from among images stored in the image storage means,as images to be transmitted to the image communication device serving toreceive an image, by displaying these images on the display means of theimage communication device serving to transmit an image.

According to this aspect, the display means displays images stored asimages to be transmitted, so that selection of an image by a user of theimage communication device serving to transmit an image is facilitated.

According to a more preferred aspect, the image storage means of theimage communication device serving to transmit an image includesembedded storage means (34) and removable storage means (28). Theembedded storage means is embedded in a main body of the imagecommunication device. The removable storage means is removably attachedto the main body of the image communication device. The image selectionmeans includes storage destination selection means (SC50). The storagedestination selection means selects any one of the embedded storagemeans and the removable storage means. The image selection means selectsan image to be transmitted to the image communication device serving toreceive an image from among images stored in the storage means selectedby the storage destination selection means, in accordance with a user'soperation.

According to this aspect, an image to be transmitted can be limited toan image stored in predetermined storage means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device serving to receive an image further includesdetermination means and image transmission continuation requesttransmission means. The determination means determines, after the imagereception means receives an image transmitted from the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image, whether or not tofurther receive an image from the image communication device serving totransmit an image. The image transmission continuation requesttransmission means transmits an image transmission continuation requestto the image communication device serving to transmit an image that hasbeen selected by the selection means, when the determination meansdetermines further reception of an image. Receiving the imagetransmission continuation request, the image transmission meanstransmits an image to the image communication device that hastransmitted the image transmission continuation request.

According to this aspect, the image communication device serving totransmit an image can transmit images in a stepwise fashion to the imagecommunication device serving to receive an image.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image further includes imageselection means. After receiving the image transmission continuationrequest, the image selection means selects an image to be transmitted tothe image communication device that has transmitted the imagetransmission continuation request, in accordance with a user'soperation. Receiving the image transmission continuation request, theimage transmission means transmits the image selected by the imageselection means to the image communication device that has transmittedthe image transmission continuation request.

According to this aspect, an image to be transmitted can be selected andtransmitted each time a request is issued from the reception end.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image further includeslimitation means. The limitation means limits the number of images to betransmitted at a time by the image transmission means.

According to this aspect, as images in number not larger than aprescribed number are transmitted at a time from the image communicationdevice serving as a transmitter, the reception-end device can receiveimages while confirming the number of received images and determinewhether or not to continue reception based on the number of receivedimages.

According to a more preferred aspect, the determination means determineswhether or not to further receive an image from the image communicationdevice serving to transmit an image, in accordance with a user'soperation. The image communication device serving to receive an imagefurther includes reception end notification means. The reception endnotification means transmits reception end notification to the imagecommunication device selected by the selection means when thedetermination means determines not to receive an image. The imagetransmission means transmits, each time the image transmissioncontinuation request is received, an image only to the imagecommunication device that has transmitted the image transmissioncontinuation request, except for the image communication device that hastransmitted the reception end notification.

According to this aspect, each image communication device serving toreceive an image can leave a group of devices to which the imagecommunication device serving to transmit an image transmits an image, attiming desired by a user.

According to a more preferred aspect, the image communication deviceserving to receive an image further includes remaining capacitymonitoring means. The remaining capacity monitoring means monitors aremaining storage capacity of the image storage means for additionallystoring the image. The reception end notification means transmits thereception end notification to the image communication device selected bythe selection means when the remaining storage capacity is equal to orsmaller than a prescribed capacity.

According to this aspect, the image communication device serving toreceive an image can automatically leave a group of devices to which theimage communication device serving to transmit an image transmits animage, based on a capacity for storing image data.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagestorage means of the image communication device serving to receive animage further includes embedded storage means and removable storagemeans. The embedded storage means is embedded in a main body of theimage communication device. The removable storage means is removablyattached to the main body of the image communication device. The imagecommunication device serving to receive an image further includesstorage means determination means (SC50). The storage meansdetermination means determines in advance any one of the embeddedstorage means and the removable storage means as storage means forstoring the received image. The image storage control means causes thestorage means determined by the storage means determination means tostore an image transmitted from the image communication device servingto transmit an image.

According to this aspect, received image data can be stored only in apredetermined storage means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, the imagecommunication device further includes image pick-up means andphotographing means. The photographing means causes the image storagemeans to store an image picked-up by the image pick-up means, inaccordance with a user's prescribed operation. The image transmissionmeans transmits the image stored in the image storage means by means ofthe photographing means.

According to this aspect, an image picked-up by the image communicationdevice can be transmitted and received.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an imagecommunication device (10 r) for receiving an image from another imagecommunication device is provided. The image communication deviceincludes: storage means; transmitter information reception means;selection means; destination information transmission control means;image reception means; and image storage control means. The transmitterinformation reception means receives from another image communicationdevice, identification information of another image communication deviceas transmitter information indicating a transmitter. The selection meanscauses display means to provide display indicating the transmitter basedon the received transmitter information, and allows a user to selectwhether or not to receive an image from the image communication devicethat has transmitted the transmitter information. The destinationinformation transmission control means transmits as destinationinformation indicating a destination, its own identification informationto the image communication device selected by the selection means as thetransmitter from which an image is to be received. The image receptionmeans receives an image transmitted by the image communication device towhich the destination information has been transmitted. The imagestorage control means causes the storage means to store the imagereceived by the image reception means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an imagecommunication device (10 t) for transmitting an image to another imagecommunication device is provided. The image communication deviceincludes: image storage means; transmitter information transmissioncontrol means; destination information reception control means;destination determination means; and image transmission means. The imagestorage means stores a prescribed image. The transmitter informationtransmission control means transmits as transmitter informationindicating a transmitter, its own identification information to otherunspecified image communication devices.

The destination information reception control means receives asdestination information indicating a destination, identificationinformation of another image communication device from another imagecommunication device. The destination determination means determines animage communication device to serve as the destination based on thereceived destination information. The image transmission means transmitsat least one of images stored in the image storage means to thedestination determined by the destination determination means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an imagecommunication device (1) for receiving an image from another imagecommunication device or transmitting an image to another imagecommunication device is provided.

The image communication device includes image storage means; andtransmission/reception selection means (SC51). The image storage meansstores a prescribed image. The transmission/reception selection meansselects any of reception of an image from another image communicationdevice and transmission of an image to another image communicationdevice. When the transmission/reception selection means selectsreception of an image from another image communication device, the imagecommunication device further includes: transmitter information receptionmeans; selection means; destination information transmission controlmeans; image reception means; and image storage control means. Thetransmitter information reception means receives identificationinformation of another image communication device from another imagecommunication device as transmitter information indicating atransmitter. The selection means causes display means to provide displayindicating the transmitter based on the received transmitterinformation, and allows a user to select whether or not to receive animage from the image communication device that has transmitted thetransmitter information. The destination information transmissioncontrol means transmits as destination information indicating adestination, its own identification information to the imagecommunication device selected by the selection means as the transmitterfrom which an image is to be received. The image reception meansreceives an image transmitted from the image communication device towhich the destination information has been transmitted. The imagestorage control means causes the image storage means to store the imagereceived by the image reception means. When the transmission/receptionselection means selects transmission of an image to another imagecommunication device, the image communication device further includes:transmitter information transmission control means; destinationinformation reception control means; destination determination means;and image transmission means. The transmitter information transmissioncontrol means transmits as transmitter information indicating atransmitter, its own identification information to other unspecifiedimage communication devices. The destination information receptioncontrol means receives identification information of another imagecommunication device from another image communication device as thedestination information indicating the destination. The destinationdetermination means determines an image communication device to serve asthe destination, based on the received destination information. Theimage transmission means transmits at least one of images stored in theimage storage means to the destination determined by the destinationdetermination means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an imagecommunication program executed by a computer (31) of a device forreceiving an image from another image communication device is provided.The image communication program causes the computer to function as:transmitter information reception means; selection means; destinationinformation transmission control means; image reception means; and imagestorage control means. The transmitter information reception meansreceives identification information of another image communicationdevice from another image communication device as transmitterinformation indicating a transmitter. The selection means causes displaymeans to provide display indicating the transmitter based on thereceived transmitter information, and allows a user to select whether ornot to receive an image from the image communication device that hastransmitted the transmitter information. The destination informationtransmission control means transmits as destination informationindicating a destination, its own identification information to theimage communication device selected by the selection means as thetransmitter from which an image is to be received. The image receptionmeans receives an image transmitted by the image communication device towhich the destination information has been transmitted. The imagestorage control means causes a storage device to store the imagereceived by the image reception means.

According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an imagecommunication program executed by a computer of a device for receivingan image from another image communication device or transmitting animage to another image communication device is provided. A prescribedimage is stored in a storage device of the device. The imagecommunication program causes the computer to function astransmission/reception selection means. The transmission/receptionselection means selects any of reception of an image from another imagecommunication device and transmission of an image to another imagecommunication device. When the transmission/reception selection meansselects reception of an image from another image communication device,the image communication program causes the computer to further functionas: transmitter information reception means; selection means;destination information transmission control means; image receptionmeans; and image storage control means. The transmitter informationreception means receives identification information of another imagecommunication device from another image communication device astransmitter information indicating a transmitter. The selection meanscauses display means to provide display indicating the transmitter basedon the received transmitter information, and allows a user to selectwhether or not to receive an image from the image communication devicethat has transmitted the transmitter information. The destinationinformation transmission control means transmits as destinationinformation indicating a destination, its own identification informationto the image communication device selected by the selection means as thetransmitter from which an image is to be received. The image receptionmeans receives an image transmitted from the image communication deviceto which the destination information has been transmitted. The imagestorage control means causes the image storage means to store the imagereceived by the image reception means. When the transmission/receptionselection means selects transmission of an image to another imagecommunication device, the image communication program causes thecomputer to further function as: transmitter information transmissioncontrol means; destination information reception control means;destination determination means; and image transmission means. Thetransmitter information transmission control means transmits as thetransmitter information indicating the transmitter, its ownidentification information to other unspecified image communicationdevices. The destination information reception control means receivesidentification information of another image communication device fromanother image communication device as the destination informationindicating the destination. The destination determination meansdetermines the image communication device to serve as the destination,based on the received destination information. The image transmissionmeans transmits at least one of images stored in the image storage meansto the destination determined by the destination determination means.

In addition, according to the image communication device and the imagecommunication program according to an aspect similar to the sixth aspectof the present invention, the same effect as in the image communicationsystem described above can be achieved.

Seventh Aspect

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, an informationprocessing program executed in a computer (1) setting a value of atleast one parameter based on an input from an input device (13) isprovided. The information processing program causes the computer (1) tofunction as: first change operation accepting means (SD110) foraccepting an operation of change from a position in accordance with acurrent value of the parameter within a prescribed display area (250) ina prescribed screen (500, 501, 502, 503); first update means (SD114,SD115) for gradually updating the parameter from the current value basedon the operation of change accepted by the first change operationaccepting means; second change operation accepting means (SD111) foraccepting an operation of change to a position in accordance with adesired value of the parameter within the prescribed display area; andsecond update means (SD112, SD115) for updating the parameter from thecurrent value to the desired value based on the operation of changeaccepted by the second change operation accepting means. In addition,the second update means updates the parameter from the current value tothe desired value (SD115) when the desired value is smaller than thecurrent value of the parameter (SD111, SD112) and the second updatemeans does not update the parameter from the current value to thedesired value (SD113) when the desired value is greater than the currentvalue of the parameter (SD111, SD113).

According to this aspect, the following seventh problem can be solved.

Seventh Problem

In a general media player, the user cannot know only from appearance,the highest volume in a volume adjustment portion and associationbetween the volume adjustment portion and the volume. Further, even whenthe volume is the same, how sound is heard varies depending on variationin an ambient environment, and it is difficult to immediately change thevolume to a user's desired volume.

In this regard, if the volume cannot immediately be changed to theuser's desired volume, in particular, if the volume is higher than theuser's desired volume, the user and a person around the user may feeluncomfortable, that is, stress may be imposed.

Function and Effect According to Seventh Aspect

According to the seventh aspect, in order to address the seventh problemabove, an information processing program and an information processingdevice implementing a user interface suitable for a user's operation inan operation to change setting of a parameter are provided.

According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, when a slideroperation which is an operation of change from the position inaccordance with the current value is accepted through the input device(13), the parameter is gradually updated in accordance with a sliderposition. On the other hand, when the operation of change to theposition in accordance with the desired value is accepted through theinput device (13), the parameter is updated from the current value tothe desired value if the desired value is smaller than the current valueof the parameter, and the parameter is not updated from the currentvalue to the desired value if the desired value is greater than thecurrent value of the parameter.

Therefore, the user can change the parameter through a series ofoperations of the input device (13). Specifically, the parameter cangradually be changed from the current value to a greater value or asmaller value. On the other hand, a change operation input for abruptlyincreasing the parameter from the current value to a greater value isprohibited. Thus, by prohibiting the change operation for abruptlyincreasing the parameter value to a greater value in the operation tochange setting of the parameter, stress imposed on a user or the likedue to abrupt change in the parameter caused by an erroneous operationis suppressed and the user interface suitable for a user's operation canbe implemented.

In addition, according to an aspect similar to the seventh aspect of thepresent invention, an information processing program executed in acomputer setting a value of at least one parameter based on an inputfrom an input device (13) is provided. The information processingprogram causes the computer (10) to function as: slider display means(SD32, SD70, SD91) for displaying a slider (252) indicating a currentvalue of the parameter within a prescribed display area (550) in aprescribed screen (500, 501, 502, 503); first movement operationaccepting means (SD110, SD114) for accepting a continuous operation ofmovement from a position of the slider (552) in accordance with thecurrent value of the parameter; second movement operation acceptingmeans (SD110, SD111) for accepting an operation of movement to aposition of the slider (552) in accordance with a desired value of theparameter within the prescribed display area; and update means (SD115)for updating the parameter to a value in accordance with a position ofthe slider (552) resulting from movement in accordance with the acceptedoperation of movement. The second movement operation accepting meansaccepts the operation of movement to a desired position of the slider(552) (SD112) when the slider moves in a direction of decrease from thecurrent value of the parameter and the second movement operationaccepting means does not accept the operation of movement to the desiredposition of the slider (SD113) when the slider moves in a direction ofincrease from the current value of the parameter.

According to this similar aspect, when the continuous operation ofmovement from the position of the slider (552) in accordance with thecurrent value or an operation of movement to the position of the sliderin accordance with the desired value is accepted through the inputdevice (13), the parameter is updated to the value in accordance withthe position of the slider (552) resulting from movement. When theoperation to move the slider (552) through the input device (13) is suchthat the slider moves in a direction of decrease from the current value,the operation of movement to the desired position is accepted, whereaswhen the operation to move the slider (552) through the input device(13) is such that the slider moves in a direction of increase from thecurrent value, the operation of movement to the desired position is notaccepted.

Therefore, the user can change the parameter through a series ofoperations of the input device (13). Specifically, by continuouslymoving the slider, the parameter can gradually be changed from thecurrent value to a greater value or a smaller value. On the other hand,when the slider is operated to move to the position in accordance withthe desired value, an operation of movement in a direction of increasefrom the current value of the parameter is prohibited. Thus, byprohibiting the operation of movement to abruptly increase the parametervalue to a greater value in the operation to change setting of theparameter, stress imposed on the user or the like due to abrupt changein the parameter caused by an erroneous operation is suppressed and theuser interface suitable for a user's operation can be implemented.

According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, the inputdevice is a pointing device (27). According to this aspect, as the userprovides input to an arbitrary position on a touch panel by using atouch pen (27), user's operability in selection is improved.

According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, means forupdating the parameter from the current value to the desired value basedon the operation of change to a position corresponding to the desiredinformation processing value gradually updates the parameter from thecurrent value. According to this aspect, when the parameter is updatedfrom the current value to the desired value as well, the parameter isgradually updated, so that variation of the parameter can be smooth andhence natural.

According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, the computersets values of a plurality of types of parameters based on the inputfrom the input device (13). The values of the plurality of types ofparameters are associated with arbitrary positions within the prescribeddisplay area, respectively.

According to this aspect, as association with the plurality of types ofparameters is established, setting of the parameter through the inputdevice can be made in a simplified manner.

In particular, the prescribed display area is a multi-dimensional areain accordance with the number of types of parameters set by thecomputer. Thus, as the parameter is displayed in a dimension inaccordance with the number of types of parameters, the position of eachparameter can readily be recognized.

According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, theparameter corresponds to a volume level of sound output from an outputdevice of the computer. According to this aspect, abrupt increase involume from the current volume, which leads to uncomfortable feeling,that is, stress imposed on the user and a person around the user, can besuppressed.

According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect, theparameter corresponds to duration of a file reproduced in the computer.According to this aspect, start of reproduction from a position wherereproduction has not yet been carried out is avoided and having the userfeel uncomfortable can be suppressed.

According to another aspect similar to the seventh aspect of the presentinvention, an information processing device (10) setting a value of atleast one parameter based on an input from an input device (13) isprovided. The information processing device (10) includes: first changeoperation accepting means (552, SD110, SD114) for accepting an operationof change from a position in accordance with a current value of theparameter, within a prescribed display area (550) in a prescribed screen(500, 501, 502, 503); first update means (SD114, SD115) for graduallyupdating the parameter from the current value based on the operation ofchange accepted by the first change operation accepting means; secondchange operation accepting means (554, 555) for accepting an operationof change to a position in accordance with a desired value of theparameter within the prescribed display area; and second update means(SD111, SD112, SD115) for updating the parameter from the current valueto the desired value based on the operation of change accepted by thesecond change operation accepting means. The second update means updatesthe parameter from the current value to the desired value when thedesired value is smaller than the current value of the parameter (554)and the second update means does not update the parameter from thecurrent value to the desired value when the desired value is greaterthan the current value of the parameter (555) (SD113).

According to yet another aspect similar to the seventh aspect of thepresent invention, an information processing device setting a value ofat least one parameter based on an input from an input device (13) isprovided. The information processing device (10) includes: sliderdisplay means (SD32, SD70, SD91) for displaying a slider (552)indicating a current value of the parameter within a prescribed displayarea (550) in a prescribed screen (500, 501, 502, 503); first movementoperation accepting means (SD110, SD114) for accepting a continuousoperation of movement from a position of the slider (552) in accordancewith the current value of the parameter; second movement operationaccepting means (SD110, SD111) for accepting an operation of movement toa position of the slider (552) in accordance with a desired value of theparameter within the prescribed display area; and update means (SD115)for updating the parameter to a value in accordance with a position ofthe slider (552) resulting from movement in accordance with the acceptedoperation of movement. The second movement operation accepting meansaccepts the operation of movement to a desired position of the slider(552) when the slider moves in a direction of decrease from the currentvalue of the parameter (554, SD112) and the second movement operationaccepting means does not accept the operation of movement to the desiredposition of the slider when the slider moves in a direction of increasefrom the current value of the parameter (555, SD113).

Eighth Aspect

According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, an informationprocessing program executed in a computer representing an informationprocessing device (10) capable of reproducing music data in which anupper member (21) and a lower member (11) are coupled to each other toallow opening and closing is provided. The information processingprogram causes the computer to function as music reproduction means(SD90) for reproducing music data, opening and closing detection means(SD150) for detecting an opened or closed state of the upper member andthe lower member, and sleep means (SD153, SD154) for continuingreproduction of the music data by the music reproduction means whentransition from the opened state to the closed state of the upper memberand the lower member is detected by the opening and closing detectionmeans and connection with prescribed external output equipment isdetected while the music data is being reproduced by the musicreproduction means, continuing reproduction of the music data by themusic reproduction means when connection with prescribed external outputequipment is detected, and stopping reproduction of the music data bythe music reproduction means when connection with prescribed externaloutput equipment is not detected.

According to this aspect, the following eighth problem can be solved.

Eighth Problem

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-216289 (Patent Document 1) shows acomputer device implemented as a notebook PC which is a portableterminal device, in which when the notebook PC is closed (in a closedstate), sleep processing is performed to set a sleep state whereoperation such as display is stopped. On the other hand, this documentshows the feature that setting from a sleep state to an active state ismade when the notebook PC is again opened (in an opened state).

In addition, this document discloses such a technique that, even inperforming the sleep processing, when the notebook PC is connected to areproduction device performing reproduction processing of music datathrough a USB cable, an active state is partially set in order totransmit necessary data from the notebook PC to the reproduction devicethrough the USB cable.

Therefore, even when the sleep processing is performed, the sleepprocessing is not performed for a partial function relating toreproduction processing of the music data.

In an information terminal device in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.2003-216289 (Patent Document 1), however, reproduction processing of themusic data in the information processing device has not been consideredand it has not been possible to perform reproduction processingconvenient for a user.

Function and Effect According to Eighth Aspect

According to the eighth aspect, in order to address the eighth problemabove, an information processing program and an information processingdevice performing processing convenient for a user in reproduction ofmusic data are provided.

According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, when the usercloses the upper member and the lower member of the informationprocessing device coupled to allow opening and closing, transition fromthe opened state to the closed state of the upper member and the lowermember is detected. When connection with prescribed external outputequipment is detected, reproduction of the music data is continued. Whenconnection with prescribed external output equipment is not detected,reproduction is stopped.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user closes the upper memberand the lower member from the opened state and connection of prescribedexternal output equipment (typically, a headphone) is detected, areproduction function is continued and hence an audio signal is outputfrom the headphone. Therefore, as the audio signal is not output from aspeaker or the like of the device, the user and a person around the userdo not feel uncomfortable. In addition, the reproduction function iscontinued while connection with the headphone is detected, andotherwise, i.e., when connection with the headphone is not detected, thesleep state where the reproduction function is stopped is set, which isconvenient for the user who has been expecting transition to the sleepstate where reproduction is stopped by closing the device.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, thisinformation program further causes the computer to function ascontinuous reproduction accepting means (517, SD161) for accepting asetting instruction indicating continuous reproduction of music data.When the opening and closing detection means detects transition from theopened state to the closed state of the upper member and the lowermember and the setting instruction is accepted, the music reproductionmeans carries out continuous reproduction of the music data (SD162), andwhen the setting instruction is not accepted, the music reproductionmeans stops reproduction of the music data (SD163) at the timing of endof reproduction of the music data that is currently being carried out.

According to this aspect, when the user provides input of the settinginstruction indicating continuous reproduction of the music data andtransition from the opened state to the closed state of the upper memberand the lower member is detected, reproduction of the music data iscontinuously carried out. When input of the setting instruction is notprovided, reproduction of the music data is stopped at the timing of endof reproduction of the music data that is currently being carried out.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects “reproductionmode” switching icon 517 to select a reproduction mode of repeatedreproduction, that is, the reproduction mode in which reproduction ofthe music data is continuously carried out, reproduction of the musicdata is continued. When the user selects a reproduction mode other thanthat, reproduction is stopped at the timing of end of reproduction ofthe music data that is currently being carried out. Thus, as whether tocontinue reproduction or not is determined based on the settinginstruction indicating continuous reproduction provided by the user,reproduction as intended by the user can be carried out. In addition, asreproduction is stopped at the timing of end of reproduction of themusic data that is currently being carried out, reproduction can endwithout having the user feel uncomfortable.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, thisinformation processing program further causes the computer to functionas reproduction setting accepting means (561, SD212, SD213) foraccepting a setting instruction to switch between stereophonicreproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction of music data bythe music reproduction means. When the setting instruction is acceptedand connection with prescribed external output equipment is detected,the music reproduction means carries out reproduction in accordance withthe setting instruction, and when connection with prescribed externaloutput equipment is not detected, the music reproduction means carriesout stereophonic reproduction (SD214, SD215).

According to this aspect, the reproduction setting means for accepting asetting instruction to switch between stereophonic reproduction andmonaural reproduction in reproduction of the music data functions, andwhen connection with prescribed external output equipment is detected,stereophonic reproduction or monaural reproduction is carried out inaccordance with the setting instruction.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects functionselection icon 561 of “headphone” in reproduction through externaloutput equipment (typically, a headphone) and switches to the headphone,reproduction processing appropriate for a type of the headphone can beselected.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, thisinformation processing program further causes the computer to functionas adjustment means (SD141) for adjusting a prescribed frequency band ofmusic data to be reproduced by the music reproduction means whenconnection with prescribed external output equipment is detected(SD140).

According to this aspect, when connection with external output equipment(typically, a headphone) is detected, the adjustment means for adjustinga prescribed frequency band of music data to be reproduced functions.

As shown in a typical embodiment, equalization processing is performedwhen the user attaches external output equipment (typically, aheadphone), so that reproduction can be carried out without having theuser feel uncomfortable by adjusting a prescribed frequency band evenwhen acoustic characteristics are significantly changed owing toattachment of the headphone.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, thisinformation processing program further causes the computer to functionas adjustment means for adjusting a prescribed tone of music data to bereproduced by the music reproduction means when connection withprescribed external output equipment is detected.

According to this aspect, when connection with external output equipment(typically, a headphone) is detected, the adjustment means for adjustinga prescribed tone of music data to be reproduced functions.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user attaches external outputequipment (typically, a headphone), reproduction can be carried outwithout having the user feel uncomfortable, for example, in such amanner that sound of high key that gives no uncomfortable feeling inreproduction from the speaker but sounds too high in listening throughthe headphone is replaced with different sound of lower key, or soundaccompanying noise in listening through the headphone is replaced withdifferent sound.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, thisinformation processing program further causes the computer to functionas adjustment means for adjusting a volume of music data to bereproduced by the music reproduction means when connection withprescribed external output equipment is detected.

According to this aspect, when connection with external output equipment(typically, a headphone) is detected, the adjustment means for adjustinga volume of music data to be reproduced functions.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user attaches external outputequipment (typically, a headphone), reproduction can be carried outwithout having the user feel uncomfortable, for example, in such amanner that an audio signal reproduced in balance without givinguncomfortable feeling in reproduction from the speaker but reproduced inpoor volume balance in listening through the headphone is adjusted byincreasing or decreasing the volume thereof to attain balance.

According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect, sleep meansstops at least a part of a display function when the opening and closingdetection means detects transition from the opened state to the closedstate of the upper member and the lower member.

According to this aspect, when transition from the opened state to theclosed state of the upper member and the lower member is detected, atleast a part of the display function is stopped.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user sets the upper memberand the lower member from the opened state to the closed state, a sleepstate where an unnecessary function is stopped by stopping at least apart of the display function is set and hence power consumption can belowered.

According to another aspect of the eighth aspect, an informationprocessing program executed in a computer representing an informationprocessing device capable of reproducing music data causes a computer tofunction as music reproduction means for reproducing music data andreproduction setting accepting means for accepting a setting instructionto switch between stereophonic reproduction and monaural reproduction inreproduction of music data by the music reproduction means. When thesetting instruction is accepted and connection with prescribed externaloutput equipment is detected, the music reproduction means carries outreproduction in accordance with the setting instruction, and whenconnection with prescribed external output equipment is not detected,the music reproduction means carries out stereophonic reproduction.

According to this aspect, reproduction setting means for accepting asetting instruction to switch between stereophonic reproduction andmonaural reproduction in reproduction of the music data functions, andwhen connection with prescribed external output equipment is detected,stereophonic reproduction or monaural reproduction is carried out inaccordance with the setting instruction.

As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects functionselection icon 561 of “headphone” in reproduction through externaloutput equipment (typically, a headphone) and switches to the headphone,reproduction processing appropriate for a type of the headphone can beselected.

According to yet another aspect of the eighth aspect, an informationprocessing device (10) capable of reproducing music data in which anupper member (21) and a lower member (11) are coupled to each other toallow opening and closing includes music reproduction means (SD90) forreproducing music data, opening and closing detection means (SD150) fordetecting an opened or closed state of the upper member and the lowermember, and sleep means (SD153, SD154) for continuing reproduction ofthe music data by the music reproduction means when transition from theopened state to the closed state of the upper member and the lowermember is detected by the opening and closing detection means andconnection with prescribed external output equipment is detected whilethe music data is being reproduced by the music reproduction means,continuing reproduction of the music data by the music reproductionmeans when connection with prescribed external output equipment isdetected, and stopping reproduction of the music data by the musicreproduction means when connection with prescribed external outputequipment is not detected.

According to this yet another aspect, an information processing devicecapable of reproducing music data includes music reproduction means forreproducing music data and reproduction setting accepting means (SD261,SD212, SD213) for accepting a setting instruction to switch betweenstereophonic reproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction ofmusic data by the music reproduction means. When the setting instructionis accepted and connection with prescribed external output equipment isdetected, the music reproduction means carries out reproduction inaccordance with the setting instruction, and when connection withprescribed external output equipment is not detected, the musicreproduction means carries out stereophonic reproduction (SD214, SD215).

It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein areillustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of thepresent invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than thedescription above, and is intended to include any modifications withinthe scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1. An information processing device comprising: a housing; a displayprovided in a major surface of the housing; a built-in camera arrangedat a center in a lateral direction of the housing; a first operationcontrol disposed on another surface of the housing that is transverse tothe major surface of the housing, the first operation control arrangedon one of a left or right side of the another surface; a secondoperation control disposed on the another surface of housing that istransverse to the major surface of the housing, the second operationportion arranged on the other one of the left or right side of theanother surface; a memory device; a processing system that includes atleast one processing circuit that is coupled to the built-in camera andthe memory device, the processing system configured to: cause thebuilt-in camera to acquire first image pick-up data in response todetection of actuation of the first operation control; store theacquired first image pick-up data to the memory device; cause thebuilt-in camera to acquire second image pick-up data in response todetection of actuation of second operation control; and store theacquired second image pick-up data to the memory device; and at leastone audio output disposed in a surface of the housing.
 2. Theinformation processing device of claim 1, wherein the surface in whichthe at least one audio output is disposed is the major surface of thehousing in which the display is provided.
 3. The information processingdevice of claim 1, wherein the at least one audio output includes firstand second audio outputs that are respectively arranged on opposingsides of the surface.
 4. The information processing device of claim 1,wherein the first operation control is disposed at a distal end of theanother surface of the housing that is transverse to the major surfaceof the housing.
 5. The information processing device of claim 1, whereinthe display is a touch-enabled display and the processing system isfurther configured to output a button image to the display for displaythereon, wherein third image pick-up data is obtained, via the built-incamera, in response to detection of touch input on the display incorrespondence with the button image displayed on the display.
 6. Theinformation processing device of claim 5, wherein the processing systemis further configured to: output a live view obtained via the built-incamera for concurrent display with the button image on the display. 7.The information processing device of claim 5, wherein the concurrentlydisplayed button image overlaps the displayed live view.
 8. Theinformation processing device of claim 1, wherein the built-in camera isconfigured to acquire third image data, which is different from thefirst and second image pick-up data, in response to selective actuationof either one of the first operation control and the second operationcontrol.
 9. The information processing device of claim 1, wherein thefirst operation control and the second operation control are configuredto be concurrently actuated and the processing system is furtherconfigured to detect both of the concurrently actuated first and secondoperation controls.
 10. The information processing device of claim 1,further comprising: another camera orientated in a direction oppositethe built-in camera, wherein the processing system is further configuredto cause the another camera to acquire third image data in response toselective actuation of the first operation control or the secondoperation control.
 11. The information processing device of claim 10,wherein the processing system is further configured to: output a buttonimage to a touch screen for display thereon; detect a touch inputprovided in correspondence with the button image; and responsive to thetouch input, switch an active camera between the built-in camera and theanother camera.
 12. The information processing device of claim 1,further comprising: a wireless transceiver configured to directlycommunicate, via wireless transmissions, with another informationprocessing device that includes a built-in camera, the processing systemfurther configured to instruct the wireless transceiver to transmit thestored first image pick-up data to the another information processingdevice.
 13. The information processing device of claim 1, wherein theprocessing system is further configured to: execute a video gameprogram; and output images of the executed video game program to thedisplay.
 14. The information processing device of claim 1, furthercomprising: a microphone disposed at a position offset from the center,in the lateral direction, of the housing.
 15. The information processingdevice of claim 1, wherein the housing includes a memory card slot withelectrical circuitry configured to connect an inserted memory devicewith the processing system.
 16. An information processing devicecomprising: a housing; a display included in a major surface of thehousing; first and second input controls included with the housing,where the first input control is arranged on a transverse surface to themajor surface and is positioned at one of two opposing sides of thetransverse surface in the housing, where the second input control is atouch input device provided in correspondence with the display in thehousing; a built-in camera centrally arranged in a lateral direction ofthe housing; a memory device; a processing system that includes at leastone processor circuit coupled to the memory device and the built-incamera, the processing system configured to: obtain first image pick-updata with the built-in camera in response to activation of the firstinput control; responsive to the first image pick-up data beingobtained, store the first image pick-up data to the memory device;obtain second image pick-up data with the built-in camera in response totouch input provided to the touch input device; and responsive to thesecond image pick-up data being obtained, store the second image pick-updata to the memory device; and an audio input provided in a surface ofthe housing.
 17. The information processing device of claim 16, whereinthe surface in which the audio input is provided is the major surface ofthe housing that includes the display.
 18. The information processingdevice of claim 16, wherein the audio input is provided at a position inthe housing that is offset from the center in the lateral direction ofthe housing.
 19. An information processing device comprising: a housing;a display included in a major surface of the housing; first and secondinput controls included with the housing, where the first input controlis arranged on a side surface that is different from the major surfaceand is positioned offset from a center of the side surface, where thesecond input control is a touch input device provided in correspondencewith the display in the housing; a built-in camera disposed in the majorsurface of the housing and/or an opposing surface of the housing that isopposite the major surface; a memory device; a processing system thatincludes at least one processor circuit coupled to the memory device andthe built-in camera, the processing system configured to: obtain firstimage pick-up data with the built-in camera in response to activation ofthe first input control; responsive to the first image pick-up databeing obtained, store the first image pick-up data to the memory device;obtain second image pick-up data with the built-in camera in response totouch input provided to the second input control; and responsive to thesecond image pick-up data being obtained, store the second image pick-updata to the memory device; and an audio input provided in a surface ofthe housing.